Mid-market companies face a unique set of challenges compared to both small businesses and large enterprises. They often have fewer resources than big corporations but need to be just as agile and competitive. This is where AI comes into play. With the rapid development of AI technologies, the barrier to entry has significantly lowered, making it more accessible to businesses of various sizes.

In this article, we will explore how mid-market companies are using AI to grow their business, highlighting the key areas where AI is being implemented and the specific benefits it offers.

AI in Customer Experience and Engagement

One of the most powerful ways that mid-market companies are utilizing AI is to enhance customer experience and engagement. In today’s competitive market, delivering exceptional customer service is a key differentiator. AI-powered tools such as chatbots, virtual assistants, and personalized recommendations are helping mid-market businesses improve customer satisfaction, streamline communication, and build lasting relationships.

AI Chatbots and Virtual Assistants

AI-driven chatbots are revolutionizing customer support. They allow companies to offer 24/7 assistance, answering queries, resolving issues, and guiding customers through processes such as purchasing or troubleshooting. For mid-market companies, AI chatbots offer an affordable way to improve customer service without the need to hire a large customer support team. These chatbots can handle a variety of tasks, such as

addressing frequently asked questions, providing personalized recommendations, and even processing transactions.

Personalized Recommendations

AI is also being used to deliver personalized experiences for customers. Through machine learning algorithms, AI can analyze customer data and recommend products, services, or content based on past behaviors and preferences. This level of personalization can significantly increase conversion rates and customer loyalty. For instance, mid-market retailers can implement AI-powered recommendation engines on their e-commerce websites, similar to those used by Amazon or Netflix, to suggest items based on previous purchases or browsing history.

In her Hubspot Blog article “AI Chatbots: My Top 23 Picks for 2025”, Jenny Bergen Clark provides great depth and insight into the AI Chatbot market.

AI in Sales and Marketing

Mid-market companies are increasingly turning to AI to optimize their sales and marketing efforts. AI tools enable businesses to gain valuable insights from customer data, automate repetitive tasks, and improve lead generation. This allows businesses to scale their marketing campaigns without the need for a significant increase in budget or staff.

Predictive Analytics

Predictive analytics is one of the most valuable AI applications in sales and marketing. By analyzing historical data, AI can predict future trends, customer behavior, and even identify high-value leads. Mid-market companies can use predictive analytics to refine their marketing strategies, target the right customers, and optimize resource allocation. For example, a mid-market B2B company can use AI to identify which prospects are most likely to convert and tailor their outreach efforts accordingly.

Marketing Automation

AI-powered marketing automation platforms are helping mid-market companies manage their campaigns more effectively. These platforms allow businesses to automate tasks such as email marketing, social media posts, and content scheduling. By automating these processes, businesses can free up time for their marketing teams to focus on more strategic activities. Furthermore, AI can optimize marketing campaigns in real-time by analyzing performance data and adjusting the messaging or targeting based on the results.

Angela Rollins, a freelance writer and former eCommerce marketeer, published a comprehensive article in Buffer.com entitled, “28 AI Marketing Tools to Save Time and Boost Performance”. This is a good place to start in familiarizing with the AI Tools to assist with marketing your organization.

AI in Operational Efficiency

Operational efficiency is crucial for mid-market companies that are looking to scale without incurring significant costs. AI is being used to streamline business operations, reduce inefficiencies, and optimize resource management. AI-driven tools can automate manual processes, analyze operational data, and improve decision-making in ways that were previously impossible.

Supply Chain Optimization

AI is transforming supply chain management by enabling better forecasting, demand planning, and inventory management. With the ability to process vast amounts of data in real time, AI can help companies predict demand fluctuations and adjust inventory levels accordingly. For example, AI-powered tools can identify patterns in consumer behavior and predict when certain products are likely to be in high demand. This helps mid-market companies optimize their supply chains, reduce waste, and avoid stockouts.

Process Automation

Robotic process automation (RPA) is another AI application that is enhancing operational efficiency. RPA uses AI to automate repetitive, rule-based tasks that are traditionally done by humans. This can include data entry, invoice processing, or customer onboarding. By automating these tasks, mid-market companies can reduce human error, speed up workflows, and cut operational costs. This enables employees to focus on more value-added tasks, such as strategy and innovation.

AI in Human Resources and Talent Management

Managing talent effectively is a critical factor for any business’s growth. AI is helping mid-market companies optimize their human resource (HR) functions, from recruiting to employee engagement and retention. AI-powered tools are enabling businesses to attract top talent, streamline the hiring process, and improve employee satisfaction.

Recruitment and Talent Acquisition

AI is transforming the recruitment process by automating candidate sourcing, screening, and assessment. AI tools can scan resumes and applications to identify the best-fit candidates for specific roles, based on qualifications, experience, and other criteria. This helps HR teams save time and reduce bias in the hiring process. Additionally, AI-driven chatbots can engage with candidates during the application process, answering questions, scheduling interviews, and even conducting preliminary interviews.

Employee Engagement and Retention

AI can also be used to enhance employee engagement and retention. By analyzing employee data and feedback, AI tools can identify trends and potential issues, such as disengagement or dissatisfaction. Companies can then take proactive steps to address these concerns before they lead to turnover. AI can also help businesses identify high-potential employees and provide personalized learning and development opportunities to nurture their skills and career growth.

Learn more about AI tools for Human Resources by visiting Bernard Marr’s article published in forbes.com entitled, “16 Essential Generative AI Tools Transforming HR In 2025”.

AI in Data Analytics and Business Intelligence

Data is one of the most valuable assets for mid-market companies, but it can also be overwhelming. With the right AI tools, businesses can extract actionable insights from their data to drive better decision-making and uncover new growth opportunities.

Advanced Analytics and Reporting

AI-powered analytics platforms allow businesses to process large volumes of data and generate reports in real time. These platforms can identify trends, correlations, and anomalies that may not be immediately apparent to human analysts. For mid-market companies, this level of advanced analytics can provide a competitive edge, helping them identify emerging market opportunities, assess risks, and optimize pricing strategies.

Business Intelligence Tools

AI-driven business intelligence (BI) tools are helping mid-market companies improve strategic decision-making. These tools can integrate data from various sources (such as sales, marketing, and finance) to create a unified view of the business. AI then analyzes this data to provide actionable insights, such as identifying which products are performing well or which markets show the most promise. By leveraging AI-powered BI tools, mid-market companies can make data-driven decisions that promote growth and profitability.

To learn more about the top Business Intelligence tools for AI, visit an article written by Donald Farmer of Treehive Strategy and published in techtarget.com entitled, “20 top business intelligence tools to know about in 2025”.

AI for Innovation and Product Development

Innovation is key to staying competitive in today’s market, and AI is providing mid-market companies with the tools they need to accelerate product development and improve existing offerings. By using AI for research and development (R&D), companies can create smarter, more advanced products that meet customer demands and adapt to changing market conditions.

AI-Driven Product Design

AI is enabling businesses to create innovative products by analyzing customer preferences, market trends, and performance data. With machine learning, businesses can simulate product designs, test prototypes, and make real-time adjustments to improve functionality and appeal. For mid-market companies, AI can help accelerate the product development cycle, reduce costs, and increase the likelihood of success in the market.

Improving Existing Products

AI can also be used to enhance existing products by providing real-time feedback from customers. Companies can use AI to analyze user reviews, social media comments, and support tickets to identify areas for improvement. This helps businesses improve the quality of their products and better meet customer expectations.

Conclusion

AI is no longer just the domain of large enterprises. Mid-market companies are embracing AI to drive growth, enhance competitiveness, and improve operational efficiency. From improving customer engagement and marketing efforts to streamlining operations and fostering innovation, AI is opening up new possibilities for mid-market businesses. As AI technologies continue to evolve, those companies that leverage them effectively will be well-positioned to thrive in an increasingly competitive landscape. By embracing AI, mid-market companies can not only enhance their existing capabilities but also unlock new opportunities for growth and expansion. The future is bright for those who embrace the transformative power of AI, and as technology becomes more accessible, the potential for innovation and growth is limitless.

The post How Mid-Market Companies Are Using AI to Grow Their Business appeared first on .

1. Omnichannel Shopping Experience

The pandemic accelerated the shift to omnichannel retailing, and this trend is expected to reach new heights in 2024. Consumers now expect a seamless shopping experience that integrates online and offline channels. Retailers are investing heavily in technology that allows for better inventory management and data integration across platforms.

For example, retailers are utilizing mobile apps that enable customers to check product availability in-store or order online for in-store pickup. This convenience not only enhances the shopping experience but also drives foot traffic to brick-and-mortar locations, which are striving to reclaim their significance in a digital-first world.

Best Practices:

• Implement real-time inventory updates across platforms.
• Offer flexible payment options, including buy-now-pay-later services.
• Enhance the in-store experience with technology like augmented reality (AR) to help customers visualize products.

2. Personalization and AI

In 2024, personalization will take center stage in retail strategies. Advances in artificial intelligence (AI) allow retailers to tailor shopping experiences to individual preferences, creating a more engaging customer journey. By analyzing shopping behaviors, retailers can offer personalized product recommendations, targeted promotions, and customized content. 

Furthermore, chatbots and virtual assistants are becoming standard tools for customer service, helping shoppers find what they need quickly and efficiently. This level of personalization not only increases customer satisfaction but also fosters loyalty. To learn more visit Ken Yanhs of TotalRetail.com article on 3 proven AI strategies that will boost your 2024 holiday retail sales.

Best Practices:

• Utilize customer data to create personalized marketing campaigns.
• Implement AI-driven chatbots for enhanced customer support.
• Encourage user-generated content to create a sense of community and engagement.

3. Sustainability and Ethical Shopping

Sustainability continues to be a major concern for consumers, and this trend will be even more pronounced during the 2024 holiday season. Shoppers are increasingly seeking brands that prioritize ethical practices, sustainable sourcing, and eco-friendly packaging.

Retailers are responding by adopting more transparent supply chains and offering products that align with consumers’ values. In addition to traditional retailers, second-hand and rental services are gaining traction, as consumers look for ways to shop sustainably without sacrificing quality.

Best Practices:

• Highlight sustainable products in marketing campaigns.
• Offer incentives for recycling or returning products.
• Partner with eco-friendly organizations to enhance brand credibility.

4. Social Commerce and Influencer Marketing

Social media platforms are transforming into vibrant marketplaces, and social commerce is a trend that will dominate the retail landscape in 2024. Consumers are increasingly shopping directly through social media apps, driven by the influence of content creators and influencers.

Retailers are leveraging partnerships with influencers to reach targeted audiences and promote their holiday offerings. By integrating shoppable posts, brands can create a frictionless shopping experience that encourages impulse buying, particularly among younger consumers.

Best Practices:

• Collaborate with micro-influencers for authentic engagement.
• Create shoppable content that highlights product benefits.
• Utilize user-generated content to build trust and community.

5. Experiential Retail

As competition intensifies, retailers are recognizing the importance of creating memorable shopping experiences. Experiential retail, where the focus is on engagement and entertainment rather than just transactions, will be a key trend this holiday season.

Pop-up shops, interactive displays, and in-store events are becoming more common as retailers seek to create a unique atmosphere that encourages customers to visit. These experiences not only drive sales but also build brand loyalty and enhance customer relationships. To learn more, see how LightSpeed has embraced Experiential Retail.

Best Practices:

• Host exclusive in-store events to attract customers.
• Incorporate immersive technology, like VR experiences, in physical stores.
• Create themed experiences that tie into the holiday spirit.

6. Focus on Health and Safety

While the pandemic has subsided, health and safety concerns remain at the forefront of many consumers’ minds. Retailers will continue to prioritize cleanliness and safety measures to instill confidence in shoppers during the holiday season.

This may include enhanced cleaning protocols, contactless payment options, and clearly communicated health policies. Transparency in these areas will be essential for retaining customer trust and ensuring a positive shopping experience.

Best Practices:

• Clearly communicate health and safety measures in-store and online.
• Offer contactless shopping options, such as curbside pickup.
• Train staff to handle health-related inquiries from customers.

7. Rise of Subscription Services

The subscription economy is thriving, and this trend is expected to influence retail strategies during the 2024 holiday season. More consumers are gravitating towards subscription models that offer convenience and curated experiences.

Whether its subscription boxes filled with personalized gifts or memberships that provide exclusive access to products and events, retailers are leveraging this trend to drive recurring revenue and enhance customer loyalty.

Best Practices:

• Develop subscription models that cater to specific customer segments.
• Offer limited-time holiday-themed subscriptions for seasonal appeal.
• Create a sense of exclusivity through member-only promotions.

8. Advanced Supply Chain Solutions

Supply chain challenges have dominated headlines in recent years, and retailers are taking proactive measures to mitigate these issues as they prepare for the holiday season. In 2024, we can expect to see significant investments in technology to enhance supply chain visibility and resilience.

From predictive analytics to blockchain technology, retailers are adopting innovative solutions to streamline operations, reduce lead times, and improve inventory management. This is crucial to meet the heightened demand that typically accompanies the holiday shopping season.

Best Practices:

• Invest in technology that provides real-time supply chain visibility.
• Establish strong relationships with suppliers to ensure flexibility.
• Monitor market trends to anticipate demand fluctuations.

Conclusion

As we look ahead to the 2024 holiday season, retailers must be agile and adaptable to navigate the ever-evolving landscape. By embracing trends such as omnichannel shopping, personalization, sustainability, social commerce, and experiential retail, businesses can position themselves for success. Ultimately, the key to thriving in this competitive environment will be understanding consumer preferences and leveraging technology to create a seamless, engaging, and safe shopping experience. Retailers who prioritize these aspects will not only meet the demands of the holiday season but also foster lasting relationships with their customers.

The post Retail Trends for the 2024 Holiday Season appeared first on .

Extended Black Friday Deals

One significant trend that has gained traction in recent years is the extension of Black Friday deals. Retailers are now stretching their promotions beyond the traditional one-day event, offering discounts and special offers throughout the entire week leading up to Black Friday. This approach not only accommodates early-bird shoppers but also helps distribute foot traffic, reducing the intensity of the shopping rush on the actual day.

Emphasis on Online Shopping

The ongoing digital transformation has accelerated the shift towards online shopping, and Black Friday is no exception. In 2023, retailers are expected to invest heavily in their online platforms, offering exclusive digital deals and optimizing their websites for a seamless shopping experience. As a result, consumers can expect a surge in online promotions, flash sales, and exclusive digital discounts.

Personalized Shopping Experiences

The ongoing digital transformation has accelerated the shift towards online shopping, and Black Friday is no exception. In 2023, retailers are expected to invest heavily in their online platforms, offering exclusive digital deals and optimizing their websites for a seamless shopping experience. As a result, consumers can expect a surge in online promotions, flash sales, and exclusive digital discounts

Social Media Influences Shopping Decisions

Social media continues to play a crucial role in shaping consumer behavior. Retailers are expected to capitalize on this by using platforms like Instagram, Facebook, and Twitter to promote their Black Friday deals. Social media influencers may also play a significant role in marketing products, with brands partnering with popular influencers to create buzz and drive sales during the holiday season.

Innovative Payment Options

Retailers are exploring new and convenient payment options to enhance the overall shopping experience. In 2023, expect to see an increase in contactless payments, digital wallets, and other innovative payment solutions. Retailers may also introduce exclusive discounts or promotions for customers using specific payment methods to encourage adoption.

Sustainability Shopping

As environmental concerns continue to gain prominence, consumers are becoming more conscious of their purchasing decisions. In response, retailers are incorporating sustainability into their Black Friday promotions. Expect to see eco-friendly product lines, promotions for recycling programs, and discounts for customers who choose environmentally friendly options.

Virtual Shopping Events

With the rise of virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR) technologies, retailers may experiment with virtual shopping events during Black Friday. Shoppers could virtually explore stores, interact with products, and participate in immersive shopping experiences from the comfort of their homes.

In conclusion, the Black Friday retail landscape in 2023 is set to be dynamic, with a blend of traditional in-store experiences and innovative online strategies. As consumers gear up for the holiday shopping season, they can expect a diverse range of deals, personalized shopping experiences, and an increased emphasis on sustainability. As technology continues to reshape the retail industry, Black Friday remains a key barometer of consumer preferences and a showcase for the evolving strategies of retailers in the digital age.

The post Retail Trends for the 2023 Holiday Season appeared first on .

In 2020, 148 million Americans celebrated Halloween with a record $92.12 of average spending per buyer. Even more, 34% of those Halloween purchases are made through eCommerce sites. That’s a lot of opportunities! Now is the perfect time to launch your holiday readiness plan and capitalize on all the tricks of the trade. Even if your store doesn’t sell costumes, candy, or Halloween décor, there are creative ways for brands of all kinds to participate in the bewitching fun by appealing to Halloween lovers. Don’t allow your business to fall flat in the Halloween game.

Knowing HOW your buyers are celebrating is key to marketing TO them. People are looking for joy, and what brings more joy than a holiday full of costumes, creativity, and candy?

How is Halloween spending split?

 When surveyed in 2020, consumers said they planned to spend money on:

• 65% planned to buy costumes

• A whopping 96% of respondents said they planned to spend money on the good stuff – candy!

• 75% expected to buy decorations

• 40% planned to spend money on Halloween greeting cards

Keeping these figures from last year in mind will give you a better idea of what to expect this year and how to market most aptly. Make it worth their while for customers to visit your eCommerce business and purchase your products and services.

By realizing exactly how loved this haunting holiday is, eCommerce business owners can stay ahead of the competition and appeal to their audience’s fright-loving side — and it would bring the most significant benefits to get started with your preparations now. Check last year’s sales and traffic numbers to get an idea of what to expect this year, and don’t let your business fall by the wayside as others capitalize on the Halloween spirit.

1. Halloweenize your shop!

Creep it real and decorate your homepage for the season. Create a fun Halloween video showcasing your shop’s spooky side, and include any promotional discounts or special items. Add a witchy welcome coupon pop-up with a catchy image or punny message to draw them in. You can also tap into nostalgia by using classic Halloween imagery. Remember, fall harvest items can do double duty for both Halloween and Thanksgiving. Be sure to promote both themes, and don’t remove fall items from your highlights before the end of November. Make sure to test your site on mobile, because over 60% of Halloween searches are coming from mobile devices.

2. Issue frightfully good flash sales

Advertise short flash sales every day to draw new and returning patrons alike. You could also provide “door prizes” like coupon codes or a free treat with purchase for stopping by – all in the name of Halloween! This would be a great opportunity to upsell and offer your patrons a spell-binding bargain!

3. Create an email campaign that will give your customers goosebumps

Email marketing has been proven to work devilishly well and has some of the highest ROIs of all marketing tactics. Ongoing interactions with your customers will help build necessary relationships and increase loyalty to your brand. Email marketing campaigns are pretty affordable and are often a great way to promote your business and stay connected.

4. Use social media to appeal to their “dark” side

It’s no secret that social media is a highly beneficial tool for any business. During the holidays, strategically created social media posts can bring lucrative results! Use a unique hashtag (like #halloween2021) to increase engagement and put your shop in front of audiences wanting to have a howling good time.

5. Utilize your shop suggestions by tweaking them to represent Halloween as well as the other upcoming holidays

With Halloween often regarded as the start of the holiday shopping season, offer a Christmas-themed add-on at checkout. This can plant the seed for future holiday purchases, potentially leading to a more significant profit margin. It may also get plan-ahead shoppers thinking about what else they could buy right now, especially if you’re running a sale or offering discounts.

6. Increase your shop’s upselling tactics

Increase your AOV by offering your patrons a spell-binding bargain, giving them more treat for their money, and making it worth their while to purchase more. An example of this would be giving out a small, Halloween-themed gift with a $XX purchase. As a result, your customers will see that you value them and likely keep you in mind for upcoming holidays.

Halloween is one of the best times of the year to delve into creativity and design ghoulishly fun experiences. It’s generally an inexpensive way for families and friends to have fun and keep traditions alive. Unfortunately, many eCommerce business owners can miss out on this spooky lucrative holiday that launches the holiday shopping season. So jump into the spooktacular season by giving your patrons a scary-good deal when they visit your shop!

Make Cash Flow Less Frightening with Payability

If your business needs cash flow to stock up on inventory, revamp your marketing efforts, or gain breathing space to pay the bills, Payability could be the perfect solution for you. Payability differs from the “normal” way of doing things and offers two simple solutions to help eCommerce owners with cash flow problems or who just need some extra cash on hand. Our answers for your eCommerce business include:

• Instant Advance

Get up to $250k to spend on inventory or marketing. The faster you grow your store, the lower the cost of your Instant Advance. You can get approved quickly and easily, with no credit checks. In addition, receive up to 2% cashback on every purchase when you spend with the Payability credit card.

• Instant Access

Get cash flow to grow your business! The amount of cash received is based on your marketplace sales history and performance. You also have the option of getting money from earnings sent to your bank account the very next day. There are no credit checks, payments are received every day, and you can receive up to 2% cashback with Payability Seller Card Visa!

• Payability Seller Card

This is the first card made exclusively for Marketplace sellers. It’s a physical Visa credit card to be used online and in-person, anywhere Visa is accepted. You no longer have to wait for time-consuming bank transfers. Instead, you can spend your Marketplace payout on your card as soon as it is available – even on weekends.

Check out testimonials from small business owners, just like you. Payability is accredited by the BBB and given an A+ rating. Unfortunately, eCommerce businesses commonly fail due to long-term cash flow issues. Allow Payability to help you have access to your funds when you need them most.

Conclusion

Halloween is generally an inexpensive way for families and friends to have fun and keep traditions alive. Many eCommerce business owners miss out on this lucrative and spooky holiday and fumble the perfect launch to the end-of-year holiday shopping season. This charming holiday allows everyone to delve into their imagination and share shockingly fun experiences. Jump into the spirit of Halloween by giving your patrons a frighteningly good time when they visit your shop.

Since many places are still imposing gathering restrictions, it’s an ideal time to be creative while observing one of America’s favorite holidays. As we near Halloween, and the beginning of the robust holiday shopping season, prepare your business now to take advantage of the seasonal craze. Poor cash flow can negatively affect your business growth, and Payability has solutions to help you with that. Understanding the impact of the holidays on your small business can get you ahead and keep your eCommerce shop from stumbling into an early grave.

The post Don’t Let Cashflow Issues Scare Away Fall Revenue appeared first on .

For most companies doing business online, chatbots are the go-to tool to infuse automation into the customer experience. We’re living in the era of the “NOW Customer” (the consumer who expects a rapid-fire, on-demand experience at every turn), so it’s no wonder that brands are grasping at bots to scale speedy customer support.

While chatbot software has its strengths, it can cause dangerous problems for businesses when used incorrectly or implemented in haste. On top of that, many chatbot software companies overpromise on just how “conversational” a bot can be, when studies prove again and again that customers hate useless chatbots but don’t mind at all when they’re integrated with helpful human assistance. 

The reality is that chatbots can do great things for the customer experience, but they can’t do it alone. 

What to expect in this article

In this article, we’ll provide insight on the two types of chatbots and the companies that provide chatbot software, including:

• Ada
• Answerbot
• Gorgias Automation
• Thankful.ai
• Solvvy
• Simplr 
• Zendesk

Additionally, we’ll outline the pros and cons of chatbot software and the questions every business decision-maker should ask themselves before investing in a bot-only customer service strategy.

In understanding the 2021/2022 chatbot software space, you can make an informed decision about how your company can add (or supplement existing) automation in a way that positively engages customers and drives revenue for the business. Win-win!

What is chatbot software?

Chatbot software is a technology or platform used to run an automated live chat service. It enables chatbots to stimulate conversation with human users on a business’s website, social media platforms and messaging apps These vertices provide true omnichannel shopping experiences; they’re also the preferred communication channels of Generation Z.

What are the different types of chatbots?

There are two types of chatbot automation: conversational autoresponse bots and self-service. Each type of chatbot serves its own purpose in a customer service strategy. An alternative to chatbot automation is a distributed network of human agents guided by AI technology, such as Simplr’s Human Cloud Network.

It’s important to understand what the different bots can (and can’t!) do before committing to a chatbot software provider. 

1. Conversational Autoresponders
   Conversational bots can be implemented via both email and chat with a goal of delivering fast responses to customers. They allow customers to ask free-text questions and elicit dialogue-based responses by analyzing the question and it’s intent. Thankful.ai and Gorgias are companies that provide this type of automation. 

2. Self-Service

Self-service chatbots can be implemented via chat and are always on to deliver immediate responses to customers. At a basic level, self-service bots provide one-touch responses to customer questions by directing them to a pre-loaded FAQ or link to a help article. Companies like Zendesk, Answerbot, and Solvvy provide this type of service.  Facebook Messenger was also an early adopter in this space.

More sophisticated self-service solutions strive to be conversational and use multi-step decision trees to guide customers towards a resolution as well as collect and aggregate important customer data. This functionality can be found with providers such as Ada and Amazon’s chatbot. 

What are the benefits of chatbot software?

There are three primary benefits that chatbot technology provides for a business: speed, availability, and resource efficiency.

1. Speed: chatbots are able to provide responses to customers quickly, with little to no wait time. This is a key factor (but not the only one) in winning over the NOW Customer and improving overall CX metrics. Chatbots work equally well whether a customer is on a mobile device or a desktop.
   
2. Availability: chatbots allow for 24/7 customer service, without staffing or planning. Self-service solutions allow customers to get answers to their questions without speaking directly to a representative, which some customers prefer (especially for post-sale inquiries around order status and return policies). 
   
3. Resource efficiency: chatbots reduce ticket volume that goes directly to internal agents. As a result, the need for brands to hire additional staff decreases. Bots can also be helpful for collecting information about an inquiry up front and, when set up correctly, are able to route that information to an agent. This saves them time and elicits a faster customer response. Additionally, they handle inquiries at a lower cost than representatives (this may not be appealing to brands that see CX as a revenue generator and not a cost center). 

What are the challenges with automation and chatbot software?

We’ve identified three critical weaknesses associated with automation and chatbots for 2022: low Actual Resolution Rate, poor customer experience, and setup and ongoing maintenance. Brands must understand these gaps when being sold chatbot software. 

1. Low Actual Resolution Rate:  most chatbots and automation solutions have significantly lower actual take rates and resolution rates, and higher escalation rates than they claim. Higher escalation rates also mean increased costs as inquiries that can’t be resolved by a bot require an internal agent to step in. 
   • The 2019 Forrester report on chatbots cautions that “…chatbots may need months of care and feeding before they’re able to handle a meaningful proportion of inbound inquiries ”
2. Poor customer experience: while many bots and automation solutions claim to be “conversational,” most if not all lack the ability to deliver truly personal, empathetic, one-to-one interactions that customers love and crave. That’s not good for resolutions or conversions! Most of us know that from interacting with chatbots in the past year! 
   • Forrester found that most chatbots and automation solutions “…make no attempt to infuse their messaging with AI and make it conversational.” This leaves customers feeling frustrated and often without an answer to their question.
3. Setup & ongoing maintenance: chatbots and automation solutions require a significant amount of cross-functional collaboration and investment into setup, maintenance, and tuning.  Brands must map out and set up flows and decision paths for any and all potential questions and scenarios they want their bot to handle in order for their bot to work. These initiatives can last several months and elicit high costs due to staff and continued upkeep and maintenance.

Alternative to chatbots: Human Cloud Network + NOW CX
On-demand, human-first technology is the latest in disruptive customer service, and a cornerstone of the NOW CX movement. Guided by artificial intelligence technology, humans are able to respond to a company’s digital inquiries around the clock. The technology-human blend ensures that brands maintain impeccable quality and resolution times… at scale. 

5 questions to ask yourself while evaluating chatbot and marketing botsoftware providers

Use the following questions to help guide your team through the chatbot software evaluation process. 

1.  How do you know whether or not customers who interact with your self-service bot are actually getting the customer satisfaction they expect from the answers?
2. Are you prepared to dedicate time and effort to maintaining the bots extensive knowledge base in order for it to run effectively?
3. Are you prioritizing customer effort when it comes to conversations with your brand?
4. What would be the impact on your customer experience if and when autoresponders are unable to accurately get customers the answers they need?
5. How much time are you willing to spend investing in setting up and fine tuning a solution?  How quickly do you need/expect to see value from a customer service solution? 

Find the automation that works for you

Selecting a chatbot software provider can be a daunting task. While automation solutions may provide great speed to response, and reduce costs by deflecting volume away from customer service representatives, they often miss the mark resulting in escalations to internal representatives, more friction in their experience, and higher overall customer effort. 

If you’re interested in outsourcing customer service to meet your growing CX needs or exploring chatbot alternatives that provide 24/7 human support, talk to Simplr. 

Sounds too good to be true? See how Simplr helped some of today’s most innovative brands including Happiest Baby, ANINE BING, and Princess Polly convert more customers and provide premium omnichannel experiences with round the clock live chat support by real humans.

About the Author

Julia Luce is the senior manager of content marketing at Simplr. As a champion for NOW CX, Julia helps brands navigate today’s customer experience landscape through trends reports, mystery shops, and interviews with leaders in the industry. Prior to joining Simplr, Julia worked as a freelance writer for professional and lifestyle outlets. She lives in Nashville, TN.

The post How to Pick the Best Chatbot Software for Your Business in 2022 appeared first on .

There are many strategies you can utilize to increase customer retention and lead development. This guide will discuss how to use targeted content to improve the relationship you have with your audience. You will also learn five steps you can take to win back lost customers.

What is Targeted Content?

Targeted content is content made for a niche audience based on where they are on the customer journey. The content should aid your audience, dealing with a pain point, or generating desire. Ultimately, the aim is to take them further down your marketing funnel and develop a relationship with your company.

Let’s say you’re looking to do some dropshipping, and you type the keywords ‘dropshipping ecommerce’ into Google.

You’ll see results from the Shift4shop blog.

That is an example of top-of-the-funnel targeted content.

The content is aimed at people who might be setting up an eCommerce store or already have one. That aligns with stages in the customer journey of our target audience. If we can turn a portion of the people reading the content into leads, we can then provide them with more targeted content that takes them further down the marketing funnel.

You can use this same approach of providing relevant content to your audience at key stages in the marketing funnel to increase customer retention.

Here are your five steps to becoming a targeted content king.

How To Bring Back Customers Using Targeted Content

Learning from your mistakes is an inevitable part of life. If you’re struggling with customer retention, understanding both the problem and how to resolve the issue is fundamental to winning them back. Follow the five steps outlined to improve your customer retention.

1. Use data to guide your strategy.

How well do you know your customers? I mean, understand them? Figuring out your customers’ wants and needs is crucial to the process of retaining them and learning what type of targeted content to use next. 

Intelligence-gathering is your best way to extract this information. You need to unravel your customer’s preferences and dislikes. One of the most effective ways of sourcing this data is through RFM metrics. RFM stands for recency, frequency, and monetary:

• Recency: How recently did a customer visit your website or complete a purchase, for example.
• Frequency: How often did the customer complete the actions you’re tracking (giving a total figure over a period of time).
• Monetary: The amount the customer spent on your products/ services. 

Putting your customers into a spreadsheet and giving them a score out of 5 based on these three metrics can give them an overall RFM score. Ideally, you’ll have a 5-5-5 (top scores in each metric). 

Source: The Good

Pooling this data gives you a measurable track of how much customers engage with your business. You can then start to group your customers based on their spending habits.

The table above demonstrates how your RFM scores can be collated and analyzed. We’ll talk a bit about how you should use this data later.

The better the system you have in place for gathering data, the more insights you will gain about your customers. For example, you can discover things like customer lifetime value and identify common trends that occur before a customer churns. You can then establish a system to deliver targeted content to people who exhibit these warning signs.

2. Determine why your customers leave.

Customers may leave your business for many reasons. There are four main reasons why a customer would leave your business. They are:

• They were only interested in purchasing a single product. They are satisfied customers, and you can’t provide anything else to them.
• The customer was dissatisfied with the product you delivered. They don’t plan to purchase from you again.
• They were dissatisfied with the customer experience. They don’t plan to purchase from you again.
• They found an alternative company that they feel provides a better service or product.

Now, there’s not much you can do about that first point.

For example, if I bought a car today, I’d be out of the market for a new car for another 5-10 years – unless I crash, of course.

Targeted content won’t make me want to buy a new car, immediately. However, providing things like free servicing and other incentives over the lifetime of me owning the car might bring me back to the dealership when I want to make a new purchase.

You can see some of the limitations and opportunities of targeted content in that example.

There are various ways to gather data about why your customers leave. One of the best ways to know why your customer left is by surveying them. Surveys are great at collecting customer’s opinions on your service. 

Sometimes, it can be difficult to get enough people to participate in a survey, so incentivizing their completion can help. You should also conduct interviews with regular customers. Getting feedback from them can help you understand what you’re doing right.

Having access to these insights is great as well. You can use them to create targeted content that addresses why people who stopped buying from you should become customers again, for example. Or you might identify a problem. For instance, some loyal costumes might tell you that they are frustrated with the user experience on your site. If you know this, you can make the necessary adjustments for your ecommerce website. 

3. Come up with a customer retention plan.

Okay, so you should now have better insights into why your customers are leaving. You should also have a list of warning signs to watch out for. It’s time to turn the tide on lost customers!

With the data you’ve collected, you now need to achieve two things:

1. Get those sales soaring again by offering products or services that customers are most likely to purchase based on their spending habits.
2. Get customers back in numbers – you can achieve this by generating a new marketing strategy that encompasses everything you’ve learned from your surveys and the new insights you have encountered.

You need to identify key weaknesses in your business model that arose from the data you gathered. For example, perhaps your retail brand offered a certain product line that didn’t appeal to your customer base.

Maybe poor logistics were a reason for lost customers? Few things are as frustrating as a negative shipping experience. So, implement same-day shipping if you can to keep customers happy.

Alongside fixing the obvious problems, you need to develop a retention plan that engages people who show warning signs of losing interest in your company. That is where understanding the signs of customer churn, and your ability to provide targeted content is critical.

4. Remind your dissatisfied customer of what they’re losing

Now it’s time to create your targeted content. But before we get into that, you should decide how to send the content.

You have several options. Email and retargeting ads are the two best options. Your website, of course, is also a good home for your targeted content. Though, you need to get those people to your website to consume the content.

You can use the data you gathered from the RFM analysis to set up when to launch automated email and retargeting campaigns. For example, sending a sequence of emails promoting a product at a discount might make a former customer consider purchasing through your store.

In addition to that, it’s worth sharing with former customers steps you have taken to improve service. That might include things like the offer of free one day shipping to all customers. Or, a more generous returns policy.

5. Provide incentives 

Everybody loves a freebie, right? 

Incentivizing your customers through discounts, coupons, flash sales, giveaways, and competitions is a guaranteed way of winning back their attention. 

Be clear about what the customer is going to receive by signing up or re-joining. Have a clear CTA. Don’t forget to refer back to your RFM analysis and data to pin down exactly what type of incentives will work best.

But how exactly should you reach them with your incentives? Again, you can use the platforms I mentioned earlier. Win-back email marketing is particularly popular.

Running promotions, for example around popular eCommerce dates like Black Friday, is another way to gain the attention of former customers. Of course, you don’t need to wait till Black Friday to run these types of campaigns.

Wrapping Up

Customers are the engine that drives all businesses forward. No customers equal no sales, and ultimately no business. Losing customers is a horrible experience, but it doesn’t have to be terminal. Through sensible decisions, listening to your customers via surveys, using clever marketing campaigns and the correct data, you can save the sinking ship by using targeted content effectively.

This guide shared a step-by-step process you can apply to share targeted content with your audience. Start by reviewing data about your customers to identify trends, and speaking to your customers to see what you are doing right and where you have problems. Once you’ve conducted your research, you need to come up with a customer retention strategy.

About the Author

Jimmy Rodriguez is the COO of Shift4Shop, a completely free, enterprise-grade ecommerce solution. He’s dedicated to helping internet retailers succeed online by developing digital marketing strategies and optimized shopping experiences that drive conversions and improve business performance.

The post How to Win Back Lost Customers using Targeted Content appeared first on .

This, coupled with the fact that in today’s digital world people, expect results almost instantly, means that consumers have come to expect a certain level of service from e-Commerce businesses.

Plus, the ability to order online and receive goods quickly can influence buyer’s decisions. It can also boost sales and create a loyal customer base.

This is why it is very much in the interest of any e-Commerce business to perfect the shipping and fulfilment process. And that’s where we come in.

In this guide, we’re going to look at six important things you should know about e-Commerce shipping and fulfilment to help your business succeed this year. 

1. You should always be clear about fulfilment and returns

Did you know that your shipping strategy can be utilized as a marketing tool? This is why you should always be open and honest about your fulfilment and returns policy.

As such, your order fulfilment policies and information should be easy for users to find. Plus, any beneficial information should be front and center of your website to attract the most attention.

For example, if you’re offering free shipping or next day delivery, make sure this is one of the first things a visitor to your website sees, as this can influence their buying decisions.

You also need to make sure that buyers know their rights when it comes to returns. If they can’t find your returns policy, this could lead to more abandoned carts as people don’t feel comfortable making a purchase that they might not be able to send back.

2. Free shipping can boost sales or cost you customers

Lots of consumers have come to expect free shipping, and if you don’t offer this, you might find you lose out on sales.

Of course, you can set a limit on spending before free delivery is an option. For example, customers must spend over $50 to qualify for free delivery.

But just be sure that this is an option because studies have found that one in four (25%) would be willing to spend more to qualify for free shipping. Therefore, boosting your sales!

However, if you’re able to, you should offer free delivery as much as possible. That’s providing that it won’t come at a cost to your business.

3. Flat rate shipping can also be beneficial 

Flat rate shipping is when you apply one cost to any product purchase regardless of its weight, size, value, etc.

This can be the next best thing to free shipping as it gives customers an upfront figure for shipping, and they always know what to expect from your brand. This means there are no hidden costs that could cause them to abandon their cart at the last minute.

Although this is not as popular as free shipping, a lot of consumers do see the benefits of this option if they plan to buy bigger items. As such, this could be a better option for wholesalers or companies who ship large items like furniture.

4. The right courier service can make or break your business

Unless you’re still running a small operation, it’s likely that packaging up your goods and popping to the post office is no longer an option. As such, you need to find a courier service that gives you the best possible service for your budget.

Get this wrong, and you could lose customers, but get this right, and you can boost your sales, brand, and reputation.

A good courier and shipping service will ensure that all your packages get to customers in a timely manner and in perfect condition. This is why it’s so important that you find the right partner.

So, you need to take some time when doing your research. You need to look at local and national courier service providers, weigh up costs, look at what services they offer (next day delivery, for example) and  then determine which is going to be best for you and your customers.

You can always switch couriers at a later date as your operations and business grow.

5. You should offer delivery updates where possible

Another thing that today’s consumers have come to expect is regular updates on their goods. Think about it; you can literally track your Uber driver as they come to pick you up and you can watch your Domino’s pizza being made, boxed, and sent out in real-time. Therefore, e-Commerce shouldn’t be any different.

This is another reason it’s so important to choose the right courier service provider. Many now offer live or regular updates and a tracking reference number that allows customers to keep an eye on their parcels and find out when they will be delivered.

At the very least, you need to be sending out a text message or email to confirm when a package has been shipped. This stops consumers from becoming frustrated, unaware of where their parcel is and when they can expect it to arrive.

6. Packaging also plays an important role in shipping and fulfilment

Finally, it’s important that you understand how your packaging plays a role in your order fulfilment.

Have you ever seen unboxing videos on YouTube, Instagram, or Tik Tok? If not, these are basically videos where people open and unbox parcels they have received from businesses and review their goods. And this includes the packaging.

In fact, a study from the U.S. found that 72% of consumers confessed their purchasing decisions are influenced by the packaging design. Not only this, but 61% of consumers are more likely to make a repeat purchase if a product came in premium packaging.

So, as you can see, the packaging and presentation of your products can be just as important as the goods themselves. Therefore, you should not neglect this aspect of your shipping and fulfilment strategy.

Choose attractive packaging and perhaps even branded bags or boxes if you have the budget. You can also go that extra mile and add nice little touches such as tissue paper, hand-written notes, eco-friendly packaging, freebies, etc.

All of this can really add to the consumer experience.

About The Author

Stuart Cooke is the Blog Editor at NI Parcels, a courier comparison service that helps businesses find the right shipping solutions for them.

The post 6 Things You Need To Know About e-Commerce Shipping and Fulfilment appeared first on .

Loyalty Programs – Now via Blockchain Technology

Loyalty programs where people collect points that can exchange for products and services are an excellent way for retail businesses to keep their customers engaged. But unfortunately, these programs get targeted by fraudsters pretty often. One way to reduce the intrusions is to record the contractual agreements in a distributed ledger, a.k.a., blockchain. In a nutshell, it means that every transaction has public “witnesses” since the database gets simultaneously shared between various institutions, websites, etc. Plus, each transaction in the database gets time-stamped. All that makes it easier to secure the transactions. 

But what about blockchain technology’s advantages to regular consumers? Most people give up loyalty programs because it takes too much time to collect enough points for a reward. Luckily, blockchain enables users to redeem their reward points immediately because it streamlines the trade-offs across several programs and retailers.

Accepting Payments in Crypto

Already in 2014, Overstock, an American online retailer, began taking Bitcoin as payment. Flash forward to 2021, and both big and small retailers are experimenting with various cryptocurrency payments. However, because of the high volatility of cryptocurrencies (the price can suddenly go up or drop significantly), most retailers are sticking with traditional payment methods. But a forward-thinking entrepreneur can see the enormous untapped potential here. Accommodating people who are comfortable using blockchain technology and cryptocurrency can open up additional lucrative revenue streams. So if you’re willing to experiment, it’s pretty simple to start accepting virtual money in your business. All you need to do is find a service that provides a “pay with Bitcoin” button to your checkout page. Coinbase, Coingate, and CoinsBank are some of the most reputable gateways. 

Tracking the Supply Chain via Blockchain

Blockchain in retail businesses is used most often in tracking products in the supply chain. Transparency of the supply chain is essential to modern consumers, regardless of the niche of products. In 2021, everybody’s concerned about where their products come from and whether the manufacturing follows ethical principles. If you can not provide information about the origin of your items, your customers will very likely get a similar product from your competitor. Plus, in the world of luxury goods, a transparent supply chain serves as proof that the product is not counterfeit. So what’s the easiest way to get started with tracking your products via blockchain technology of the future? You can try out the Amazon managed Blockchain. It’s a service that enables you to start building your blockchain network without having to think about its overhead. And the cool thing is that as you increase the number of applications in the network, Amazon scales the network automatically. 

Blockchain Is Making Shopping Plans More Convenient to Consumers

Every consumer values convenience. And the blockchain technology world with smart contracts and an added layer of security is perfect for pleasing the ever-growing demands of shoppers. Here’s an example: let’s say someone is looking for Christmas presents for a whole family. Blockchain technology companies can help the person set up a project via smart contracts. Each gift-wish would be a separate element in the project, and retailers could submit their offers for each gift. Once the consumer picks the products, smart contracts would manage all the details about payments and shipment. After making the purchases, the customer could just lay back and wait for the packages to arrive. Just imagine the competitive edge you would gain by providing your clients with such projects.

Product Contracts With Blockchain

Smart contracts are also helpful in raising the efficiency among suppliers. You can use them to set up product contracts that establish milestones with payment promises for fulfilling a step in the supply chain. Why is that kind of arrangement good? Because it gives the suppliers a good reason to speed up their delivery. At the same time, they need to keep a high-quality standard. All that allows retailers to reduce some of their supply chain costs and increase the overall profits. 

What Exactly Are Smart Contracts 

By now, you’re probably wondering, what are the smart contracts? You can think of them as a software program that can activate specific events automatically. For example, winning in no deposit slots win real money online casinos could set off an instant payout. Plus, smart contracts that use blockchain to validate agreements specify who can take action on a particular sort of data. For example, it would make sense that only the receiver can report a serial number mismatch. The sender can not do that.

Blockchain Protects Against Hackers 

The businesses in retail handle a lot of money every day and have become frequent targets to hackers. Cybercriminals may try to steal money from companies, but it’s even worse when they get their hands on a client’s sensitive data. Such occasions damage the reputation of the company. As a result, the company can lose many of its clients, and the revenues may drop. In worse cases, a data breach could drive an organization out of business. But thanks to blockchain technology’s ability to guard and maintain cybersecurity, we can feel safer again. It makes security breaches impossible because data gets distributed across a network of computers. The records’ accuracy gets verified frequently, so any attempts to hack the system will be detected and stopped immediately.

Conclusion

Bitcoin can help you overcome many challenges in retail businesses. The novel technology can boost your loyalty programs, get you additional clients who would enjoy paying in cryptocurrencies, protect you against hackers, and much more. And the best part is that wherever we employ various blockchain solutions, it has the potential to speed up the business processes and increase your revenue. So start integrating blockchain into your business this year. There are enormous amounts of opportunities in the crypto world. Trust us: if you look back on it 20 years from now, it will seem like an excellent decision. Blockchain is the future for retail businesses. 

What are some blockchain technology risks people should know? Or is the distributed ledger completely hacker-proof? Share your thoughts in the comments.

About the Author

Chris Delgado is an online entrepreneur and a crypto-enthusiast. He loves the transparency blockchain solutions offer to business processes and plans to develop a blockchain-based platform for his next eCommerce shop.

The post Using Blockchain in Retail: Here’s How to Do It appeared first on .

1. Shopify Capital 

You could start your financing search by logging into your Shopify account and looking for an offer from Shopify Capital, which provides Shopify users with merchant cash advances and business loans up to $1 Million. 

Shopify Capital is currently designed as an invite-only loan program, which means you can only apply if you get a pre-qualified offer. While their eligibility requirements are not shared publicly, their decisions are based on your Shopify business history. At an absolute minimum, you need to use Shopify’s point-of-sale platform or website hosting services and have a good Shopify track record.

If you get a lending offer and decide to apply, their application process requires minimal paperwork, has no credit checks, and promises a quick turnaround. According to their website, you could receive funding within days of accepting an offer.

As far as payment goes, they deduct a certain amount from your sales every day. The amount is based on a fixed percentage rate, which means payments are higher on busy days and lower on slow days.

Why use Shopify Capital: You have a good offer in your Shopify account, do most of your business on Shopify, and want to invest in growth.

2. Payability Instant Advance 

Another great option for your Shopify store’s growth is a Payability Instant Advance, which advances you 75%-150% of your monthly sales, up to $250,000. Payability is an independent financing company designed specifically for eCommerce and marketplace sellers who want to bridge cash flow gaps and take their eCommerce businesses to the next level. 

Payability can be used alongside or in the place of Shopify Capital. Unlike Shopify Capital, you can apply directly to Payability and talk to a real person about your application and offer. What’s more, if you sell on other platforms such as Amazon, Walmart, or Newegg, you can connect those accounts and get a funding decision based on your entire eCommerce portfolio – not just one of the channels you sell on. The process requires absolutely no credit checks — plus, you could get your advance in as fast as 24 hours.

Unlike other options that hold you to the full fee no matter how soon it’s paid back, you’ll get a payment rebate for every week your Instant Advance is paid back early. Pair your Instant Advance with Payability Instant Access to get your Amazon and other marketplace payouts the next day, every day.

Why use Payability: Payability is best for eCommerce businesses selling on Shopify and/or online marketplaces such as Amazon. It’s great for multichannel eCommerce businesses looking to get financing based on all of the channels they sell on. Or those looking for an alternative or supplement to Shopify Capital, Amazon Lending, or traditional financing. 

3. Traditional Bank Loans

Traditional banks offer high-dollar business loans with long repayment terms and low interest rates. They’re certainly an attractive option for small businesses. However, they have a very long turnaround — we’re talking several weeks or even months — because the application and underwriting process is outdated and requires a lot of paperwork. Not to mention only the most established and successful SMBs get approved as approval rates are low for small businesses. Banks tend to view most SMBs as too small or too risky to fund, especially if most of your business is online. 

If you apply for a bank loan, you’ll likely be asked for bank statements, other financial records, years of tax returns, a business plan, and more. They also put a lot of emphasis on your personal credit as a business owner, so keep that in mind. They will likely ask you to also put up collateral such as your house that will be forfeited to the bank in the event that you can’t repay the loan. In general, banks are risk-averse organizations and tend to approve highly successful businesses that have a storefront or other physical location. As a result, approval rates for small and online businesses are low. 

Why use traditional bank loans: Traditional bank loans are worth considering if you have a well-established business, stellar personal credit, and are planning way ahead for growth. 

4. Credit Cards and Lines of Credit 

Credit cards and lines of credit function similarly. For example, they allow you to make investments as you need to, pay only for what you use, and replenish your limit/amount as you make payments. The primary difference is that credit cards are just that — credit — while lines of credit give you access to actual cash. Depending on the provider, you might have to pay an annual or monthly fee to keep an account open. 

The application process also depends on the provider. In general, you can get credit card approvals the same day you apply, while lines of credit (especially from traditional banks) can take longer. Your credit will be pulled and will impact your interest rate. 

If used responsibly, a credit card will allow you to make purchases free of charge. In other words, pay your balance in full and on time every month, and you won’t have to worry about compounding interest. 

Why use credit cards or lines of credit: Credit cards are popular for early-stage businesses that are building up cash reserves. Lines of credit are helpful for those looking for a “rainy day” fund — i.e. cash they can lean on if there’s an unexpected expense or investment opportunity.

5. Equity Financing 

Equity financing — or venture capital (VC) — is especially popular for large DTC brands looking to scale even more. By definition, it is the process of raising capital through the sale of equity. In other words, you raise money from VCs and, in exchange, give them partial ownership in your company. Because you give them partial ownership, you are not expected to pay them back or pay interest. However, you do have to give over some control of your business to them.

Most VCs want to see that you have an impressive team, a minimum viable product, and a defined customer. You’ll need to put together a pitch deck and presentation that gives an overview of your business — the product you’re selling, the market opportunity, your business model and financials, funding needs, and leadership. 

Think of the T.V. show Shark Tank: retail and eCommerce businesses pitch VCs to invest a certain amount in their products in exchange for a certain amount of ownership. You can propose the amount and ownership percentage, but they might have something else in mind.

Why use equity financing: You’ve built a large and well-known eCommerce brand with the potential to scale exponentially as most VCs expect a return of 10x-15x their initial investment. You are okay giving up a part of your business in exchange for what the VC brings to the table.  

The right financing for your Shopify store

Only you can decide what the right option is for your Shopify store. Hopefully this guide has helped you narrow things down. At the end of the day, you need to consider how much you need, how soon you need it, what you need it for, and how you feel about keeping or sharing control over your business’s long-term growth. For more on your financing options, discover the top ways eCommerce businesses can get funded and the difference between a loan and a cash advance.

About the Author

Victoria Sullivan is a Marketing Manager at Payability. She has over eight years of social media, copywriting and marketing experience. Prior to joining the Payability team, Victoria developed social media content and strategies for top technology brands such as Skype and Samsung. She holds a degree in Advertising from Syracuse University’s S.I. Newhouse School of Public Communications. She can often be found in a yoga class or working on her fashion blog.

The post Top Funding Options for Shopify Stores appeared first on .

Unless you’ve done enormous amounts of market research, chances are you don’t know for certain which platform or channel can reach the largest segment of your audience. And even if you have done that research, your best customers are likely separated across multiple different communication channels and social platforms.

So what’s the best way to reach all of them? For most businesses, your best bet is to have a well-thought-out social media multichannel strategy.

If you’re like most business owners, you probably use social media marketing already. And if you have more than one channel of communication with your audience—Facebook advertising and email marketing, for example—then you already use multichannel marketing.

But you might not be using either one to their full extent. This article will show you what you ought to know about social media in multichannel marketing. Keep reading to learn more.

Understanding Multichannel Marketing

Multichannel marketing isn’t a topic that comes up often, but it’s something that most businesses use. Simply put, a multichannel marketing plan involves multiple ways of connecting with your audience.

There are many unique social media advantages, but social media by itself isn’t usually a complete strategy. A powerful marketing plan will involve several channels through which you impact customers. These might include social media, email, print mail, PPC advertising, and so on.

Most businesses already use more than one channel to reach their audience, but they may not be doing it consciously. It’s important to think about all of your marketing efforts as parts of a whole. That way you can monitor the impact you’re having more easily and make smart changes over time.

It’s very common that someone will create a Facebook page when they start a business. For some people, it’s one of the first things they do.

Others take a more old-fashioned approach to business, like placing an ad in a local paper or magazine or passing around flyers.

Any of these methods can work. It depends on the audience you’re trying to reach. But to be most effective, a marketing strategy needs to combine multiple channels of communication.

Social Media’s Role in Multichannel Marketing

Now that you better understand what multichannel marketing is, let’s see how social media plays a role in a good multichannel strategy. Here are three unique ways that social media can empower and elevate your marketing plan.

Impact Customers Wherever They Are

There’s a reason social media in business is so popular. Although there are many tried-and-true ways to reach out to potential customers, social media sites may provide the single most flexible method.

This is partly because there are so many social networks for people to hang out on and so many people with active accounts. No matter who your audience is, you can most likely find them somewhere online.

If your target audience is forward-thinking Millennials and Zoomers, there’s Instagram and TikTok. If you’re targeting people who have unique interests that they’re passionate about and who spend a lot of time online, try Reddit. And you can reach almost anyone using Facebook.

No matter what your business does, social media allows you to find your ideal customers anywhere.

Get Seen More Often on Mobile Devices

If you’ve been paying attention, you’ve probably seen how popular phones and tablets have become. For many people, their smartphone has all but replaced their home computer.

Unfortunately, it can seem harder to get people’s attention when they’re on their phones. Less screen real estate means fewer opportunities to make an impact through advertising. Casual browsing means people exhibit shorter attention spans and get distracted easily.

However, there’s one category that has been enormously benefited by the smartphone trend: social media.

People may spend less time on websites in general when they’re on their phones, but they spend a lot of time on social media apps. If you can advertise there or get your content to appear organically, your business can rise to the surface more often on mobile devices.

Communicate With Audiences Effectively

If you’ve recently begun studying social media marketing strategy, you might think it’s all about publishing good content.

This is only partly true. The real purpose of social media is open communication. That means you can’t talk at your followers—you need to be talking with them.

You probably provide ways for your customers to email you, and you may even provide a business phone number. But nothing is more convenient for customers who want to get in touch than an active social media presence.

People aren’t likely to contact you directly unless they have a real problem, like a defective product. They’re more likely to interact with your brand (and provide helpful information about your market) through social media.

Get Help With Social Media Multichannel Strategy

Could you use some help with your social media multichannel strategy?

It’s not uncommon for business owners to feel overwhelmed with the number of things they have to do. Social media isn’t something that can be automated—you have to connect authentically with your target customers, and that takes time. And when social media is just one part of your multichannel strategy, there’s even more you have to get done.

Fortunately, you don’t have to go at it alone. Reach out to BlueTuskr today to find out how we can supercharge your multichannel marketing efforts.

About the Author:

Andrew Maff is the Founder of BlueTuskr, a full-service marketing company for e-commerce sellers. With over 13 years of experience, he has proved himself to be a leader in the field.

Andrew’s entrepreneurial knowledge and success allow him to excel in his industry as well as helping others grow theirs. His knowledge in branding, social media, SEO, web design, graphic design, email marketing, and more, providing exceptional results consistently.

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/andrewmaff/

The post Marketing Using a Social Media Multichannel Strategy appeared first on .

To help you find the right FinTech solutions for your eCommerce business, we put together the following FinTech guide. It outlines what FinTech is, why it’s helpful, and how you can leverage it to take your online business to the next level.

What is FinTech?

FinTech refers to the products and services that use technology to disrupt traditional financial services. We use FinTech all the time in our daily lives — from online banking and mobile check deposits, to sending money to friends and family via apps like Venmo or Zelle, to being able to purchase just about anything online. 

At the end of the day, FinTech companies use technology, software, mobile devices, and/or cloud services to make traditional financial services faster and more flexible. This includes banking, investing, payments, financing, and more.

Why FinTech?

Traditional financial services involve a lot of manual processes. Before the advent of technology, if you had a check to deposit, you had to bring it to the bank. If you needed to pay someone, you did so via cash or check. If you needed a loan, you went to a bank to fill out an application, provide necessary paperwork, then waited for a decision. 

Traditional financial institutions are risk averse by nature with systems specifically designed to keep their customers’ assets safe and their own profits healthy. Many of those systems are still in place today. Let’s take small business financing as an example. 

Today, if a small business approached their bank for a business loan, they’d be required to submit reams of paperwork, including bank statements, business financials, tax returns, business plans, proof of ownership, and more. They’d likely have to have a site visit from a bank rep. And they’d have to wait weeks or months to hear if their application is approved or not. Then, if approved, there’s the wait for actual funding. Needless to say, the underwriting process is extremely long and involves a lot of manual work for both the applicant and the bank. 

For small businesses, they don’t have weeks or months to wait for a lending decision. For banks, their resources are better spent on applications from larger businesses seeking loans for $1 million or more — not an amount that small businesses seek, which is generally under $250,000. As a result, approval rates for small businesses are low. Especially when those businesses are online or based in eCommerce.

It’s no surprise then that technology-driven solutions have emerged — and continue to emerge — to streamline how businesses (and consumers) get financing and manage other aspects of their finances. In fact, there are so many solutions these days for online sellers alone. Continue to the next section for five of them.

Top FinTech Products for Your eCommerce Store

Now that you see the value in FinTech, how can you actually leverage it for your eCommerce business? Start by looking at these five FinTech solutions for online sellers:

1. Consumer Financing

A more recent FinTech solution is consumer point-of-sale financing through companies like AfterPay, Affirm and Klarna. These offers are embedded into your product listings and made available to customers at checkout, in case they want to buy now, but pay later. 

Point-of-sale financing allows customers to get an item when they normally would while also paying for it over a longer period of time. While credit cards offer the same benefit, these consumer financing companies provide a bit more flexibility. For example, there is no hard credit pull and, for some, no interest. What’s more, decisions are made in real-time and, if approved, customers just continue the checkout process as usual. 

So what’s the cost to you? If you offer consumer financing, you’ll get paid in full right away for each sale. Similar to credit cards, you’ll have to pay transaction fees, which are generally around 2-5% per transaction. 

2. Digital Banking

All traditional banks allow you to manage banking online, deposit checks from your mobile device, and transfer money digitally as needed. 

That said, they often come with a lot of fees. This is because traditional banks have a lot of infrastructure (just think about how many bank branches there are across the U.S.) and they need to cover their own costs. 

As a result, traditional business bank accounts typically come with annual or monthly maintenance fees, minimum balance requirements and transaction limits that, if not met, result in more fees. 

The alternative? Online-only business banks like Rho, which don’t have the same type of infrastructure as banks. As a result, they’re able to offer the same services — online banking, mobile check deposits, digital payments, etc. — with minimal to no fees. What’s more, some even offer high interest on your balance, so you can actually earn money.

3. Instant Advance from Payability 

As an eCommerce seller, you likely experience cash flow issues while waiting for your marketplace payouts — which makes investing in growth difficult. Without reliable cash flow, you can’t buy inventory as you need it, launch marketing campaigns, etc. Fortunately, there are FinTech solutions designed to help eCommerce sellers overcome their cash flow issues and finally be able to elevate their business’s growth.

One such solution is Instant Advance from Payability. With Instant Advance, you could get up $250,000 in as fast as 24 hours. It’s not a loan — it’s a discounted purchase of your future receivables — so there’s no credit check involved or compounding interest. Payability looks at your sales history across all the channels you sell on, including Amazon, Walmart, Shopify, Newegg, eBay (managed payments only), and more. You could be approved and get funded within one business day. 

Payability also offers daily, real-time marketplace payouts on Amazon, Walmart, Newegg, and more through Instant Access. 

Discover how Instant Access can protect you from the repercussions of an Amazon account level reserve. 

4. Channel-Specific Financing 

Depending on the channel(s) you sell on, you might have access to a channel’s own financing solutions. For example, Amazon Lending and Shopify Capital exist to help top-tier sellers on their respective platforms get financing. 

Both of these options are invite-only, so you can only apply if you see an offer in your account. Applications are online and involve minimal to no paperwork, decisions and funding take a matter of days, and repayments are made via auto-deductions from your platform payouts. The decisions themselves are based on your selling history on their respective platform alone. 

Here’s a little more about what their offers might actually look like:

• Amazon Lending: If you’re a high volume seller on Amazon, you might get an offer from Amazon Lending for a loan up to $750,000 or a business line of credit from Marcus, with which Amazon Lending recently partnered.
• Shopify Capital: Shopify Capital offers loans and merchant cash advances up to $1 million.

Other FinTech platforms that offer financing include point-of-sale apps like Square and Stripe, which take your sales activity into account when assessing your creditworthiness.

5. Blockchain

Blcokchain is a newer technology that refers to a special kind of database most commonly used to keep records of transactions, such as a money transfer, a contract, or a shipment. 

As a public ledger of sorts, it stores data in blocks that are then chained together in chronological order. The data that gets stored is the “block” that is then “chained” to the block preceding it. All information is time-stamped, permanent, and viewable by anyone, which helps ensure its integrity and transparency.

In eCommerce, blockchain can help you track your supply chain, manage inventory, keep costs down, and more. For example, you could trace a product’s journey from manufacturing, to warehousing, to a customer. To learn more, here is a list of other blockchain benefits for eCommerce sellers.

Next Steps

Review your current business processes to see if anything can be improved with a FinTech provider, be it your sales conversions, business banking, financing options, or record keeping. And don’t forget to check out Payability’s financing solutions, designed specifically for eCommerce sellers like you.

About the Author

The post Why FinTech and eCommerce are the Perfect Match appeared first on .

Shopify sellers shouldn’t feel limited to selling through one storefront. Instead, you can use multiple storefronts to diversify your brand.

However, managing multiple Shopify stores comes with its own set of challenges. To some merchants, the idea of managing two unique stores sounds overwhelming and difficult.

We don’t want you to feel that way! It shouldn’t keep you from expanding your business.

In this post, we’ll explain why you should sell on multiple stores, the challenges of doing so, and best practices to be successful.

Why You Should Sell on Multiple Shopify Stores

Selling on multiple Shopify stores isn’t for everyone. For some, it might make sense to only sell through a single storefront.

But, there are merchants who could benefit from selling on multiple stores and should consider it. It can help you expand your business and better serve your customers.

Here are a few reasons why merchants would sell across multiple Shopify stores:

Sell Internationally / Localized Marketing

Merchants who sell across the globe can benefit from having more than one online store. Separate stores allow you to tailor each site to that region’s unique differences and needs, which can also be referred to as localized marketing. Depending on the market, you’ll want to change the language, currency, products, and even website design based on the selling location.

Example: Treat each region as a different market. You’ll want to personalize for each market by using the best tactics for that specific audience. Check out how Nike tailors their site for different regions: nike.com for US and nike.com for France.

Managing Off-Price or Outlet Brands

Some luxury sellers create off-price or outlet brands as another way to grow their business. They use these off-price versions of their namesake brands to appeal to a different audience. This opens their brand to more consumers with different price ranges. While this strategy is tricky, it has worked for some brands.

Example: Take a look at Nordstrom and Nordstrom Rack. Nordstrom Rack is the off-price retail division of Nordstrom. How you appeal to a high-end consumer versus a price-sensitive one is very different. You wouldn’t want to mix those messages on just one site, which could severely devalue your brand. Nordstrom solves this problem by operating two separate sites for each.

Selling to Different Buyer Groups

Different buyer groups could mean adult and children or even the difference between B2B and B2C. Either way, sometimes it makes sense to use different sites for each buyer group you want to appeal to. This approach works bests when you to sell different products to each group.

Example: Consider Fabletics. They started out selling affordable athletic apparel to women through a monthly subscription service. They then added fabkids, which uses the same monthly service, but the kids’ clothes are everyday wear, not athletic. Instead of one site, they use two different sites dedicated to each brand.

Just because you fall into one of these scenarios doesn’t mean you have to use more than one storefront. But, it’s probably at least worth considering the benefits of it.

Challenges with Managing Multiple Online Stores

While setting up multiple shops on Shopify can be fast and simple, the actual management of them can be difficult. With separate online stores, you’ll have separate accounts, orders, items, and inventory data to worry about. You’ll need to be prepared to deal with problems like these:

• Orders: You’ll have to manage orders out of each site separately. This gets complicated when dealing with fulfillment and return processing.
• Inventory: If you sell some products on both sites, you’ll have to update inventory as customers buy and return items to both sites.
• Products: Product data becomes messy as you structure it differently across multiple sites.
• System Integration: Integrating with your other systems like an ERP, or POS system becomes more complicated.

Having multiple storefronts means multiple sets of sales data to manage. Keeping all of it straight is hard, but essential in successfully managing your business.

How do you keep a 360-degree view of your customers across all your stores? How do you decimate inventory when the same items are sold on two different stores?

You don’t want to isolate data from your different stores, either. You won’t be able to manage for long if you do. Instead, you should focus on centralizing your critical data and using business processes that can be used across all sales channels.

Before you start out on this venture though, know what challenges you’re taking on. Only use multiple stores if you require it. If you decide that it is the best strategy for your business, plan out how you’ll need to manage the complexities mentioned above.

Best Practices for Managing Multiple Shopify Online Stores

While it can be tricky to manage multiple Shopify shops, the fear of doing it shouldn’t stop you from growing your business! Follow these best-practices to make it easier to manage a multi-store strategy.

1. Optimize Each Site Specifically

If your Shopify stores represent different brands or target different customers, then the product information, copy, and design should reflect those differences.

Think about what different keywords each target market is looking for. You’ll want to use the language that your customers are using. You can utilize A/B testing software to test variations of copy to see what converts more customers.

Check out our post about Shopify SEO Best Practices.

2. Centralize Order Management

One of the challenges of managing multiple stores is fulfilling orders from your separate sites. If you centralize where you fulfill orders though, you can more easily manage orders across all of your sites. You’ll want to keep fulfillment, returns, customer care, and drop shipping processes consistent.

The best way to do is to push order data to one, centralized system that’s capable of managing orders across all online sites. You can use a dedicated order managemetn system and then integrate it with Shopify to automate processes like fulfillment.

Master Product Data in a Product Information System (PIM)

Odds are that your product information is also structured differently across your multiple Shopify stores. It takes extra work and time to re-structure or product information for each site

If not handled properly, product information management becomes a real pain for merchants. Data ends up messy and inaccurate. You won’t be able to rely on Shopify’s import products features to get the job done for you either. See how Shopify’s import product features often come up short for merchants.

Instead, merchants need a place to centralize or essentially “master” all their product data. From this single location, you can then clean and standardize your data to publish it to your different Shopify stores as needed.

This single location is called a Product Information Management (PIM) application. Read about more reasons why merchants need a PIM.

Update Inventory in Real-time

It’s crucial that your inventory updates in real-time when you’re selling through multiple customer touch points, especially if you’re selling the same products on different storefronts. Real-time inventory updates ensure that you never oversell your items.

The best way to achieve real-time inventory is to centralize where you manage inventory. This ensures that you track inventory counts no matter where it sells from.

Save yourself the hassle of telling customers that you can’t ship a product to them because you don’t actually have it.

Consider eCommerce System Integration Software

When considering many of these best practices, you’ll see that most of them come down to centralizing where you manage your data, whether it’s your orders, inventory, items, or customers. Centralizing your data allows you to easily manage all your Shopify stores using the same processes.

A system integration platform, like what nChannel provides, is built just for online merchants like yourself. It doesn’t matter where your data is coming from or where it’s going, a data integration platform manages the flow of it so you have complete control.

With a solution like this in place, you can scale your business to multiple Shopify shops and even more sales channels like marketplaces and brick & mortar stores.

Learn about more challenges of managing multiple Shopify stores and how you can avoid them.

What to Do Next

Setting up multiple storefronts is no easy task, but you can do it successfully!  Just keep our best practices in mind.

If you’re ready to consider system integration between Shopify and your other systems like a ERP, POS, or 3PL, read more about nChannel’s pre-built integration conenctor for Shopify.

The post Shopify Multiple Stores: How to Overcome Common Challenges appeared first on .

Amazon is the #1 marketplace in North America. In 2020 alone, Amazon accounted itself accounted for nearly a third of eCommerce in the US.

Most of Amazon’s success is because of their third-party sellers. In fact, around 50% of their sold items are from third-party businesses. And in 2018, nearly three-quarters of Amazon business had between just one and five employees.

The best part? It’s extremely easy to set up an account and sell your first item. I’ve even done it myself.

Follow my step-by-step the process to sell your first items through Amazon FBA.

What is Amazon FBA and why should I use it?

Amazon is the reason why most consumers expect fast and free shipping. With their pioneering Amazon Prime program, members can receive free and guaranteed one-day and two-day delivery for Prime eligible products.

So, wouldn’t it be great if you could also offer fast and free shipping on the items you sell? Good news, you can!

That’s the reason you use Amazon FBA. With Amazon FBA, you simply ship your items to an Amazon warehouse and they take care of the rest for you. So, if you ship them one box with 25 items you want to sell, Amazon will pick, pack and ship each of those items for you as they’re sold.

For many, Amazon FBA is a smart and cost-effective way to ship your items. While you pay a fee for this service, you’re providing an excellent customer service that leads to happy customers and repeat purchases.

Read more about how Amazon FBA works and its benefits.

How to Sell on Amazon for Beginners Using FBA (Fulfillment by Amazon)

These are the exact steps I took to sell my first few items on Amazon using using FBA.

Step 1: How to Create an Amazon Seller Account

First, you need to create an Amazon account if you don’t already have one. Go to this page here to create one.

Next, you can register your new Amazon account as a seller account.

Be sure to read the “Before Your Register” section on the webpage. It provides info about the two types of Amazon Seller accounts, Professional and Individual.

Don’t know which account type to use? The answer is simple: if you’re going to sell more than 40 items a month, use a Professional account; otherwise, select an Individual account.

Why is 40 items the cut off point? Amazon will charge you $0.99 per item when selling on an Individual account. So, if you’re going to sell 40 items a month, you might as well pay for the $40 a month Professional account.

In my case, I was only selling a few items, so I chose an Individual account.

Once you choose your account type, you’ll be asked to login or create an Amazon account using your preferred email. From then on you will need to provide:

1. Business Name and Address
2. Agree to Seller agreement
3. Mobile or Telephone Number
4. Billing Method/Deposit – Chargeable Credit Card for Professional Account
5. Tax information – If signing up for Professional Account

For your seller information, you’ll need to provide your name and address, as well as a “Display name”. This will be the name buyers see next to the item you’re selling. It can be anything you want, but remember it’s public. I chose “BilboBaggins50” because I was selling some old Lord of the Rings video games.

Next, you must verify your identity through a phone call or text message.

Lastly, enter your credit card and bank information for deposits. You’ll need access to your 9-digit routing and bank account number.

Your account is now created! Now, you should be greeted with a home screen that looks fairly empty.

Step 2: How to List Your Items on Amazon

Once you have your account, you need to list the items you want to sell.

For some people, we may be skipping a crucial step – choosing what items to sell. However, for this tutorial, I’m going to assume you’ve already done this. If you don’t know what to sell first, simply find some items around your house you want to get rid of (that’s what I did).

To add your first product, you want to go to “Inventory” in the top of your screen and click “Add a Product”.

Once you click “Add a Product” you will be prompted to search for your product. I searched by barcode, however you can also search by the product name. Unless you’re selling an item you manufactured (which I’m assuming you’re not), you shouldn’t need to create a new product.

Note: Each product sold on Amazon has its own unique identifier called an Amazon ASIN. It’s important to match your product with an existing ASIN or create a new one if you manufacture your own product. You can be penalized for creating a new ASIN for a product that already exists.

Once you select your product, you’ll be taken to a screen to enter important product information. There are three main things you must enter.

1. The price you want to sell your item for
2. What condition your item is in
3. Whether you want Amazon to ship the item or you want to ship it yourself

Read more about Amazon product listing optimization best practices.

For pricing, you choose what you feel comfortable selling your item at. Personally, I searched for the item on Amazon, looked at the used items that were eligible for free shipping, and priced my item slightly lower than the lowest price available. I wanted to make sure that I sold my games quickly.

For the condition, be as honest and descriptive as you can. All you are required to enter for the condition is a selection of “Acceptable”, “Good”, etc. However, you’ll be much more likely to sell it if you offer an additional description. Is your game missing the manual, but has the cover? Mention it. Is the book a library book you bought? Add this info too.

Don’t list an item at a better condition than it is. You won’t get away with it. If a customer expects a “like-new” book, they won’t accept one with tears and highlighting and they’ll request a refund. If you aren’t honest, customers will leave negative reviews, which will make it almost impossible for you to sell in the future.

Lastly, you want to make sure you select “I want Amazon to ship and provide customer service for my items if they sell.” This is essentially the “I want to use FBA option”.

If you made sure to select that check box, and this is your first time selling on Amazon using FBA, Amazon will send you to a registration screen. Simply read and accept the terms of service here.

Step 3: How to Convert Your Items to Fulfillment by Amazon Items

I know what you’re thinking, “Why do I need to convert my items to FBA items if I just selected them to be fulfilled by Amazon?”. This just gives you the option to use Amazon FBA. You don’t have to use FBA for every item you sell. There are some items that can’t be shipped through Amazon FBA either. Therefore, you need to go into your account and manually select which items you want to fulfill through Amazon FBA.

To do this, go to the “Inventory” tab in your Seller Central homepage and click “Manage Inventory”. From here you’ll want to select the “Actions” drop down for each produce and select “Change to Fulfilled by Amazon”.

Please note: Once converted, your listings will be temporarily removed from Amazon.com until the inventory has been received at Amazon’s fulfillment center. So, you must finish the entire process to list and sell your items through Amazon FBA.

Once you change your inventory to Fulfilled by Amazon, you’ll be asked about two preferences:

1. FBA Label Service
2. Stickerless, Commingled Inventory

If you’re selling new items, you can use stickerless, commingled inventory. This means that Amazon will commingle your inventory with other sellers’ matching units. If someone orders from you, Amazon might ship a matching unit that is actually from a different seller, but in warehouse closer to the customer. This allows Amazon to ship items faster for better customer service.

(If you’re choosing commingled inventory, please be aware of the risks. If another seller sells counterfeit products, they could be shipped in lieu of your authentic products before Amazon notices. Read more here.)

In my case, I accepted this because I was not selling anything new.

Of the two, FBA Label Service was much more important to me. With their Label Service, Amazon puts a label (think white product sticker) on your items for you, instead of you doing it yourself.

I accepted the label service because I didn’t want to print out my own stickers. It was only 20 cents per item to have Amazon label my items. That being said, if you want to keep your margins high, you may consider printing your own stickers and labeling your products.

Once you select your options, you’ll be prompted to either “Convert Only” or “Convert & Send Inventory”. If you’re only selling one item, go ahead and select “Convert & Send Inventory”. If not, select “Convert Only” so we can add more items before we set up shipping.

Your item should now appear in your “Amazon-Fulfilled Inventory” under “Manage FBA Inventory” after viewing main “Inventory” tab in Seller Central.

Step 4: How To Create an Amazon FBA Shipping Plan

If you selected “Convert & Send Inventory” or if you have just added your second item, you will be prompted to create a shipping plan. For this you’ll need your Ship from address (most likely your house address) and your packing type.

There are two packing types: “Individual products” and “Case-packed products”. Most likely you’ll be selecting “Individual products”. Only select “Case-packed products” if you’re sending a box with all the same exact type of item in it. For example, a box of 20 Anchorman DVDs.

Once you set up a shipping plan, you will be prompted to add your items. Assuming this is the second item you’ve added, you should see two items. Select both.

Once you’ve created a shipping plan, you can add all the items you wish to sell. Simply go through the same process you went through for the first two items, however, when you get to the end select “Add to an existing shipping plan” rather than “Create a new shipping plan”.

Step 5: How to Ship Your Products to Amazon for FBA

Now that you have all your items in your shipping plan, it’s time to finally ship your items. To do this go to “Inventory” -> “Manage FBA Shipments” and then click “Continue with shipping plan”.

From here enter how many units of each item you’re sending. Then if your item requires prep (most don’t) select whether you or Amazon will prep them. Lastly, select whether you or Amazon will label the product.

Once you approve your shipment, you can purchase shipping from Amazon. You just need to know how much your package weighs. You can either put it on a bathroom scale, or (as I did) just estimate based on the items inside the package.

Once you print out your labels, stick them on your package and they’re ready to mail! Just drop them off at your local carrier like UPS.

Step 6: How to Sell Your First Item on Amazon

This is the easy part. Once you ship your package off to Amazon and they receive it, your items will be available for purchase.

Now, you sit and wait for your items to be sold.

If you are selling a more popular item, the wait isn’t that long. In my case, I listed 8 items, and they all sold within 15 days.

Pro tip – video games sell fast!

What to Do Next

Congratulations! Hopefully you’ve either sold your first item or have at least listed your first item on Amazon.

If you haven’t made the plunge yet, but are still curious about Amazon FBA, check out our blog posts top tips for selling on Amazon, how to win the Amazon buy box, and what Amazon selling mistakes to avoid. Or, click on the image below for a free eBook.

As your business grows, learn how to connect Amazon and Amazon FBA to the rest of your business systems like an order management system!

The post How to Sell on Amazon for Beginners Using FBA: A Step by Step Guide appeared first on .

B2B eCommerce is estimated to reach 20.9 trillion by 2027. Similar to B2C, eCommerce trends for B2B also increased over 2020 amid the COVID-19 pandemic. There’s been a higher demand for online products than ever before. 

Here are the B2B ecommerce trends that are driving these numbers. You’ll want to take note of how these trends will affect your B2B business and the overall industry.

eCommerce as Main Revenue Source

While B2B sellers have sold online for over a decade, it hasn’t always been a main revene source. Today’s forward-thinking leaders though are building sophisticated online experiences as part of a digital-first strategy to meet the changing habits of B2B buyers. 

• 80% of B2B buyers will be Millennials by 2023.
• 48% of companies now conduct 50-74% of all corporate purchases online.
• Further, 23% of companies do 75% or more of their purchasing online.

Today’s younger, digital-savvy buyers prefer to search and shop online, just like they would for personal purchases. Most leaders are realizing the potential of eCommerce to be their main revenue driver.

Rise and Dominance of B2B Marketplaces 

Just like B2C, B2B merchants can’t ignore the role and importance of online marketplaces. 

33% of B2B buyers turn to Amazon Business or Google to begin their purchasing journey, compared to 32% for a supplier’s website or portal. 

Amazon Business itself has also reported significant increase in performance. Amazon’s B2B marketplace increased 2019’s gross sales by 60% over 2018, 2.9x faster than total sales for Amazon. Currently, their B2B marketplace serves 55 Fortune 100 companies, more than 50 of the largest 100 hospitals, 40 of the local governments serving the 100 biggest populations, and 80% of the 100 largest educational institutions.  

B2B buyers are turning to marketplaces like Amazon for large product catalogs, low prices, and fast shipping. Today’s sellers have to learn how to leverage marketplaces in the right way to build their brand and presence online. Read more about selling on Amazon versus your own webstore. 

And, Amazon Business isn’t the only marketplace out there. See this list of top B2B marketplaces. 

Self-service Tools Add Value 

68% of B2B buyers prefer to do business online versus with a salesperson. Modern buyers want the convenience, speed, accuracy, and personalization that self-service webstores, mobile apps, and online marketplaces like Amazon Business offer. 

Self-service means taking time-intensive sales and streamlining them, offering tools for account management and online ordering like: 

Account Management

• Updating shipping/billing addresses
• Editing payment information
• Tracking order progress
• Add/remove users and their purchasing permissions 

Order Portal

• Streamlined product catalogs
• Advanced order screen to manage cart and add items in bulk 
• Recently order list / reorder buttons 
• Speeder checkout from saved payment info in account settings  

Read more about how to make your B2B eCommerce site more accessible for self-service. 

Some businesses have hesitated from self service tools fearing that customers will be more adrift without salesperson support, But, your buyers want full control online and don’t always need handholding from a salesperson.

Remember eCommerce doesn’t replace sales teams. In fact, your site can become a critical tool salespeople use to drive more and larger orders. It can result in more cost-effective sales, and increase your bottom line. 

Personalization 

B2B merchants can leverage personalization techniques to get the right products and information in front of any given user. This can make the online order experience more efficient and rewarding both for your customers and business. 

How to Personalize Your B2B eCommerce Site  

75% of consumers are more likely to buy from retailers that provide services that recognize them, offer relevant recommendations, and remember them. 

These types of personalization techniques are what sets your online experience apart from others. It’s what turns one-time buyers into loyal customers, which drives revenue and business value over the long run.

• Search — Help buyers find the exact products they need. 
• Catalog segmentation — Only showing certain products to certain buyers
• Pricing customization — Show pricing based on volume, customer type, or order size
• Value-add Content — When needed, show marketing one-pagers, product specification sheets and more
• Recommend Products — Show the right companion products based on purchase history
• Payment Options — Increase conversion rates by offering different payment terms such as Net Terms

Leveraging Content Marketing Strategies 

74% of B2B buyers report searching at least half of their work purchases online. And, on average, they do 12 searches prior to engaging a specific’s brand’s site. 

So how do you connect buyers with your products early in their discovery and search progress? Content marketing.  

Content marketing is the strategic marketing approach focused on creating and distributing valuable, relevant, and consistent content to attract and retain a clearly defined audience – and, ultimately, to drive profitable customer action. 

Its purpose is to provide content (your website, blog post posts, product pages, etc) that help buyers find your products and make a purchasing decision. By aligning your content with your buyer’s purchasing journey, you can remove any friction points in their buying process. 

More than 60% of consumers expect brands to give them the information they need when they need it, but less than half feel that brands deliver.

Leading B2B companies are leveraging content marketing strategies to attract and retain more customers. Read more about what B2B content marketing is and why it’s important. 

Native B2B eCommerce vs Repurposing B2C 

An integral part of any eCommerce initiative is the technology behind it. And over the last several years there’s been noticeable improvements in the eCommerce platforms capable of handling complex B2B requirements. 

B2C platforms like BigCommerce and Magento have added B2B-specific capabilities and plug-ins to tailor the platform to those needs. But, there’s also been a rise in platforms built just for B2B like Zoey Commerce, OroCommerce, and EvolutionX with native B2B features. 

More merchants are turning to native B2B platforms though for their flexibility, customization, and robust capabilities especially for product catalog data. Read more about the benefits of using purpose-built B2B eCommerce software over repurposed B2C. 

Content-driven Headless Commerce 

While the idea of headless software is not new, headless commerce is becoming a more pragmatic strategy for the average merchant. It decouples the front-end and backend technology for your website. In other words, the presentation layer that handles your content and product (or head) is separated from the technology that allows customers to checkout and pay. In the evolving eCommerce industry, headless commerce might be the best way to adapt to your content when new trends come along like social, video and voice shopping.

Headless commerce is also attractive for the complex requirements of B2B sellers. It gives you flexibility and control over where you extend commerce functionality like multiple websites, mobile apps, the Internet of Things (IoT), or any other customer touchpoints. You can also integrate these front-end experiences into your other backend applications such as ERPs, PIMs, OMS and POS. Headless commerce can be used to create unique experiences for all your different customer types. 

Read more about the benefits of headless commerce for today’s fast-paced eCommerce environment. 

Technology Integration Top Priority 

While many merchants are undergoing digital transformations, it doesn’t mean that you’re guaranteed success. In fact, many merchants are still only scratching the service of their eCommerce capabilities. 

So what’s holding leaders back? For one, integration of their eCommerce tools.

52% of leaders said that their main challenge stopping them from adopting B2B eCommerce tools is integration with existing and legacy technologies. Other challenges include finding the right partners, developing decision criteria, and calculating the ROI of their solutions. 

Technology integration is what enables data movement between multiple backend systems (ERP, supplier databases, PIMS, and more) and customer-facing applications like your eCommerce platform. It’s what enables you to automate core processes and omnichannel customer experiences like: 

• Automate order fulfillment for next-day delivery 
• Route orders to suppliers based on efficiency and cost 
• Display real-time inventory availability online
• Keep product and pricing data updated online
• Syncing customer data to backend systems

To do eCommerce right, B2B merchants need to integrate their existing (and often legacy) technologies that currently run their business— which is something that nChannel does. 

Read more about how to deliver omnichannel customer experiences in B2B eCommerce through integration and other best practices. 

Stay Ahead of the Competition

Well, there you have it! These are the top B2B eCommerce trends we see happening in the industry. To stay ahead of the competition, you must evaluate your business and see how well you’re adapting to trends like these.

To keep learning more about B2B best practices for selling online, check out these other articles:

• Your Roadmap to Start a Successful B2B eCommerce Initiative
• 7 Tips To Supercharge Your B2B eCommerce Site
• How to Choose the Best B2B eCommerce Platform for Your Business
• Get Your B2B Sales Team On Board for Your eCommerce Migration
• How to Navigate B2B eCommerce: Go-to-Guide for Manufacturers and Distributors Selling Online

You can also find all our B2B-related articles here. 

The post B2B eCommerce Trends: What Trends B2B Sellers Need to Know About appeared first on .

Consumers are comparing their shipping options ahead of purchasing. They’re asking, “Can I find a better deal somewhere else?” 

And it’s not enough to just win the sale at check out— you also have to deliver as promised. A negative shipping experience can have irreparable damage. 83% of consumers are less likely to re-purchase from a retailer after a negative delivery or shipping experience. And, about a third of consumers will leave a bad review or post on social media about it.

But, a lot of sellers still struggle  to meet consumer delivery expectations. 95% of companies have experienced delays or bottlenecks in their order fulfillment operations in the last year [2019]. 45% faced issues with order picking and processing, while 37% struggled with inventory management.

This past year has put a lot of pressure on supply chains, exposing serious weaknesses. Most thought they had years though to fix these shortcomings in preparation for a shift to eCommerce, but the pandemic forced 10 years of growth in just 3 months. 

Going forward, it’s clear that your supply chain operations can be a differentiator— creating value for your business and your customers. However, you need to digitally-enable your supply chain to meet today’s customer expectations and lower overall costs. 

Benefits of Digitally-enabled Supply Chains 

To address their most pressing fulfillment and distribution challenges, warehouse operators are:

• Working towards enhancing their process capabilities (45%)
• Making staffing changes (27%)
• Implementing or upgrading of order fulfillment software applications—including warehouse execution systems or WES (27%)
• Implementing or upgrading of order fulfillment technologies (24%)
• Using automated goods-to-person picking technologies (20%).

In other words, they’re investing in new technologies and digital processes to adapt their supply chains. But like any digital transformation, it’s more than just implementing a few systems. Instead, it’s a new mindset. It’s implementing technology that works in harmony alongside human individuals and new (or existing) processes. 

When done right though, here’s the main benefits of a digitally-enabled supply chain that can differentiate your brand: 

1. Same-day and Next-day Delivery

42% of warehouse operators say eCommerce’s biggest impact is dealing with customer expectations around same day/next-day delivery. 

Consumers are increasingly raising expectations on fast shipping times. A few years ago 4 to 5 day was acceptable. Now, it’s either same-day, next-day, or two-day free shipping. 

Nearly a third of consumers now say they feel frustrated when a company doesn’t offer same-day delivery. And, 74% say that after receiving same-day delivery, it made them more likely to purchase from that retailer again.  

But, you can’t offer same-day or next-day delivery without automated workflows and strategically located inventory. You need a tight integration between your eCommerce platform and order management systems to sync new orders in time to your warehouse to pick and pack for next-day delivery. 

2. Omnichannel Fulfillment 

To get their products faster, consumers are open to different shipping options like Buy Online, Pick Up Instore (BOPIS), including curb-side delivery or traveling to an alternative pick up location with extended hours. 

68% of consumers have made multiple purchases with BOPIS. Their main reasons for using it are: saving on shipping costs (48%), speed (39%) and convenience (28%).

BOPIS requires integrating your eCommerce and brick-and-mortar operations for a smooth experience. Read more about how to improve your BOPIS offering. 

3. Real-time Inventory Visibility

Advanced operations rely on a single, global view of inventory and orders across your entire supply chain (including external partners). This global view allows you to know where inventory is at any given moment. It enables displaying  accurate product availability across channels for customers, which can lead to increased purchases. 

Real-time inventory visibility also enables you to opportunistically move inventory through your network as needed. You can send inventory to stores with high sales, avoid stock outs before they happen, and keep an optimized amount of inventory on hand to lower overall costs. 

4. Fulfillment Partner Visibility and Control 

In order to compete, many sellers are outsourcing parts of their supply chains to partners like 3PLs. But traditional order management systems made it difficult to work with external partners—  their data and processes were in a black box. When an order was stuck in “to be fulfilled” status, you didn’t know when it happened or how long it’ll be there.

A digitally-enabled supply chain though relies on cloud-based infrastructure and web-service based integrations to optimize and automate processes. It allows you to treat all parts of your order fulfillment process as if they’re happening in the same organization—even if you work with multiple partners. Digital tools can give you real-time visibility (and control). 

Learn more about how to integrate your eCommerce store with your ERP or 3PL for maximum efficiency. 

5. Improve Services, Lower Costs

As all commerce shifts to online, a natural consequence is rising costs of shipping and delivery. Most sellers are paying higher costs for transportation, warehousing, inventory storage, and packaging and material expenses. 

Digitally-enabling your supply chain processes and technology can help lower costs like:

• Automatically choosing fulfillment carriers by factoring in location and delivery costs
• Dynamically route orders to the most efficient supplier 
• Eliminate costly mistakes like late or wrong shipments
• Split orders to multiple fulfillment locations 
• Accurately forecast demand to keep the right amount of inventory on-hand to avoid extra costs 
• Reconcile shipping information, purchase orders, and payment terms (three-way match)

6. Build Resilience in Your Supply Chain 

While the 2020 pandemic was an unexpected challenge, there will always be disruptions in your supply chain. They can be from natural disasters, transportation failures, product quality problems, price fluctuations, or even cyber attacks. 

But the adoption of the right technology, processes, and infrastructure can help future-proof your business. You can diversify your suppliers, create redundancy for critical parts, and adopt risk evaluation tools. The goal is to build resilience in your supply chain so you can face any future challenges with confidence. 

Long-time Seller Pulls Ahead with Revamped Fulfillment Operations

 After 50 years in business, EasyCare knew they needed to make a change in their fulfillment operations. Initially, they did all their own warehouse management. But, they never felt efficient enough compared to the market leaders like Amazon. They realized operating their own logistics wasn’t worth their own financial costs or time to perfect. 

They take the following steps to digitally-enable their fulfillment process: 

• Outsourced to a 3PL partner Warehouse-Pro that was strategically located near their HQ and main customer based
• Implemented shipping software ShipStation to handle order tagging and automated workflows
• Integrated their ERP Sage 100 and ShipStation platform with nChannel. The new integration automated an order placed on the web to the product being picked and shipped from the warehouse. 

The result? New orders (with all the right order detail) make it their warehouse within minutes of being placed online. This gives Warehouse-Pro plenty of time to ship as many orders as possible as same-day. 

You can read their full story of how they use a 3PL to ship more orders same-day and handle returns like experts.

More Retail Supply Chain Management Resources 

Forward-thinking sellers of all sizes are finding ways to digitally transform their supply chains and get ahead in their industry. They’re looking to transform their people, processes, technology and infrastructure to create value for their business and customers. 

But, digital transformations don’t happen overnight. And every business and its supply chain is unique. There’s not a one-fit-for-all plan for success. It will take experimentation and effort to find what works best for your own business. 

Keep reading about how to improve your supply chain management: 

• What is Retail Supply Chain Management and Why Is It Important?
• Improve Customer Experience with Distributed Order Management (DOM)
• Reverse Logistics: Where Online Retailers Should Make Improvements
• Vendor-managed Inventory Benefits and Advantages 

The post Why Your Retail Supply Chain Needs a Digital Transformation appeared first on .

It’s not always easy to find the eCommerce research you’re looking for. We took the time for you to find and compile some of the best eCommerce statistics on the web.

Check out 100 statistics about mobile, marketplaces, shipping, personalization, and more! Use our resource as the one place to find lots of data points to use for whatever purpose you need.

eCommerce Stats

The North American e-commerce market is worth just under $912 billion and is growing at a rate of 13% a year. [3]

The average North American e-shopper spends around $3,500 a year online and e-commerce sales already account for 14% of all retail sales. [3]

US retailers shut 5,994 stores in the first half of 2019 alone, more than in the whole of 2018. [3]

62% of consumers are more comfortable making in-store purchases with digital or contactless payments. [1]

87% of shoppers begin their hunt in digital channels. [4]

64% of shoppers agree or strongly agree that retailers don’t truly know them. [4]

81% belong to one of two shopper segments: Value-driven consumers (41%) who want good value and Purpose-driven consumers (40%) who seek products and services aligned with their values. [12]

Retailers estimate personalization can unlock $2.95 trillion this decade. [15]

Voice commerce will top $40 billion in the U.S. by 2022. [15]

COVID-19 eCommerce Stats

10 years of eCommerce growth happened in just 3 months at the height of the pandemic. [19] 

75% of US consumers have tried different stores, websites, or brands during the COVID-19 crisis. [19]

60% of these consumers expect to integrate the new brands and stores in their post-COVID-19 lives. [19]

Consumers spent $861.12 billion online with U.S. merchants in 2020, up an incredible 44.0% year over year. [20]

COVID-19-related boosts in online shopping resulted in an additional $174.87 billion in ecommerce revenue in 2020. [20]

The top 100 retailers (minus Amazon) had a striking 74.1% share of ecommerce growth in 2020, up significantly from a 49.4% share in 2019. [20]

Almost 75% of U.S. businesses have experienced supply chain disruption as a result of the COVID-19 outbreak. [21]

Between January 2020 and August 2020, B2B orders placed through ecommerce solutions increased by 44%. [25]

Marketplace Stats

Half of all global ecommerce sales occur on marketplaces. [15]

Nearly $2 trillion are spent annually on the top 100 marketplaces. [15]

Leading global marketplaces 2019 by GMV: Taobao (538B), Tmall (472B), Amazon (339B), JD.com (295B), and eBay (90B). [15]

Amazon dominates the North American market, with 49.1% of eCommerce sales. [3]

Two-thirds (68%) of consumer goods leaders believe customers are more loyal to Amazon than to individual brands. [4] 

70% of Amazon searches do not include a brand name. [15]

Nearly 90% of Amazon product views result from search, not branded ads or merchandising. [15]

Online Curated and Subscription Service Stats

The subscription economy grows more than 300% in the last seven years. [16] 

Overall, subscription businesses grew revenues about 5 times faster than S&P 500 company revenues and U.S. retail sales from 2012 to 2018. [16]

75% of DTC businesses will offer subscriptions by 2023. [15]

15% of online shoppers receive products on a recurring basis today. [15]

54% of online shoppers have subscribed to a subscription box service. [22]

Top reasons for subscribing to service: personalized experience (28%), convenience (24%), value for money (23%). [22]

Mobile Stats

Mobile accounts for 92% of eCommerce order growth. [4]

In 2019 m-commerce comprised over a quarter of total eCommerce – more than doubling since 2015. [11]

US [mobile purchasing] volume is poised to increase from $128.4 billion in 2019 to $418.9 billion through 2024. [11]

Sustainability and Supporting Independent Businesses 

54% of younger consumers who purchase from independent retailers discover brands via social media compared to 43% of middle aged consumers 35-54 and 25% of older consumers 55+. [1]

62% of younger consumers prefer to shop for sustainable and green products compared to 53% of middle aged consumers and 44% for older consumers. [1]

Among millennials and Gen Zers, for instance, 55% are more likely to make a purchase if it’s accompanied by a charitable donation, while 42% of Gen Xers and 31% of baby boomers and traditionalists (the generation before) are influenced by this option. [4]

50% of consumers look for independently owned businesses to support. [1]

57% of consumers are willing to shop at new brands or stores for the first time, demonstrating openness to supporting lesser-known, independent businesses. [1]

Nearly six in 10 consumers surveyed are willing to change their shopping habits to reduce environmental impact. [12]

And for those who say it is very/extremely important, over 70 percent would pay a premium of 35 percent, on average, for brands that are sustainable and environmentally responsible. [12]

 73 percent indicate that traceability of products is important to them. [12]

When it comes to purchasing pre-owned, repaired, or renewed products, 70 percent of respondents have tried or would like to try such practices, and 84 percent of those who have tried them plan to continue to do so. [12]

 Nearly eight in 10 Gen Z and Millennials have purchased or want to purchase pre-owned products. [12]

As for renting products, nearly 60 percent of those surveyed have tried it or would like to, and 77 percent of those who already do plan on doing it again. [12]

Loyalty Program Stats

78% of consumers in the U.S. say a loyalty program encourages them to buy more from brands. [15]

Companies with strong loyalty marketing programs grow revenues 2.5 times faster than their competitors and generate 100-400% higher returns to shareholders. [23]

Members of top-performing loyalty programs are 77% more likely to choose your brand over the competition. [23]

A 5% increase in customer retention increases profits by 25% to 95%. [23]

64% of companies say their loyalty program is the best way to connect with customers. [23]

Loyal customers spend 67% more than their peers. [23]

eCommerce Shipping, Fulfillment, and Returns Stats

37% of consumers agree that shipping speed influences their purchasing decisions more than it did a year ago. [2]

83% are less likely to re-purchase from a retailer after a negative delivery or shipping experience. [2] 

70% say that a negative delivery or shipping experience negatively impacts their impression of the retailer rather than the carrier — even if it’s a result of the carrier’s error. [2] 

1 in 3 consumers leave bad reviews or post on social media about a poor delivery experience. [2] 

93% agree that when a retailer acknowledges or rectifies a poor delivery experience, they’re more likely to shop with that brand again in the future. [2] 

96% agree that fast and honest updates regarding a shipping issue make them less likely to be upset about shipping delays or have a lasting negative perception of the brand. [2]

54% say a retailer’s overall return policy is a major consideration when purchasing online. [2]

Nearly six in 10 of consumers are now willing to switch to a competitor with quicker and cheaper shipping. [4]

The total cost of returns worldwide recently topped $1 trillion. [15]

Packaging / Unboxing

35% of consumers report they view unboxing videos. [13]

55% of those who watch unboxing videos claim the video convinced them to purchase the product. [13]

40% of consumers will share an image of your packaging on social media if it was unique or branded. [13]

50% of shoppers will recommend your product if it came in gift-like or branded packaging. [13]

BOPIS

68% of US consumers have made multiple click-and-collect (Buy Online, Pick Up In Store) purchases. [17]

50% of shoppers said that they’ve decided where to buy online based on whether they could pick their orders up in-store. [17]

Reasons for using BOPIS: saving on shipping costs (48%), speed (39%) and convenience (28%). [17]

85% of shoppers say that they’ve made an additional in-store purchase while picking up an online order, and 15% say that they do so “somewhat frequently.” [17]

Access to “deals or savings on future purchases” is the biggest incentive that shoppers say would cause them to use BOPIS more often, cited by 45% of consumers. [17]

More shoppers are satisfied with mobile than with desktop BOPIS shopping experiences. [18]

Customers are more likely to use the store’s BOPIS service again when items are marked online as available for pickup. [18]

When BOPIS orders are ready in two hours or less, shoppers were more likely to use the service again. [18]

90% of brick-and-mortar retailers will offer BOPIS by 2021. [18]

Supply Chain Statistics

Most warehouse operators are putting their energies into improving order accuracy (97% say this is a moderate or high concern), meeting customers’ needs (97%), speeding up order fulfillment times (89%), and dealing with multiple order fulfillment channels (85%). [14]

68% of companies are paying more for freight transportation than they did in 2018. [14]

57% say they’re paying higher warehousing and distribution inventory costs, while 57% say packaging and materials expenses have risen since 2018. [14]

To address their most pressing fulfillment and distribution challenges, warehouse operators are: working towards enhancing their process capabilities (45%), staffing changes (27%); implementation or upgrading of order fulfillment software applications—including warehouse execution systems or WES (27%); the implementation or upgrading of order fulfillment technologies (24%); and the use of automated goods-to-person picking technologies (20%). [14]

47% of warehouse operators say eCommerce’s biggest impact has been the need to fulfill orders faster and at a lower cost. 42% say it’s dealing with customer expectations around same day/next-day delivery, while 25% point to the need to reduce order processing errors (while improving accuracy) as their primary eCommerce-related challenges. [14]

95% of companies have experienced delays or bottlenecks in their order fulfillment operations in the last year. 45% face issues with order picking and processing, while 37% struggle with inventory management. [14]

There has been $ 1.2 billion in U.S. venture-capital deals in logistics-focused robotics and automation companies since 2015. [14]

In the first half of 2020, ecommerce spurred a blistering 51% increase in large fulfillment center demand. [15]

Demand for 3PLs is set to nearly double to $408 billion in the first half of this decade. [15]

B2B eCommerce Stats

65% of B2B brands plan to invest more in ecommerce. Most B2B leaders expect digital sales to make up over 50% of their business in the next two years. [25]

73% of Millennials are involved in the purchase decision-making. [7]

80% of all B2B buyers will be Millennials by 2023. [24]

33% of B2B buyers turn to Amazon business or Google to being their purchasing journey. [8]

74% of B2B buyers report researching at least half of their work purchases online. [9]

On average, B2B buyers do 12 searches prior to engaging a specific’s brand’s site. [24]

96% of B2B buyers prefer to do business with manufacturers and distributors online. [6]

Amazon Business’s gross sale grew 2.9 faster than total sales for Amazon. [10]

B2B eCommerce is predicted to reach $1.8 trillion and account for 17% of all B2B sales in the U.S. by 2023. [24]

Since they buy in bulk, an average order value of a B2B transaction is around $491, opposed to $147 for B2C. [24]

B2B websites report average conversion rates at 10%, while B2C experiences are around 3%. [24]

Digital Marketing Stats

On average, brands use 39 different systems to manage consumer data. [4]

88% of retail and consumer goods marketers say data helps improve their overall marketing program by allowing them to personalize touchpoints. [4]

AI drives 26% higher average order value. [5]

Less than half (49%) of retail and consumer goods marketers report having a completely unified view of customer data sources. 

Overall ad spend is forecast to decline 20% in 2020, digital ad spend is estimated to increase 13%. [15]

In late 2020 paid search spiked 17% and paid social advertising increased 24%. [15]

62% of brands rely on cookies to recognize and target users across channels. [15]

Personalized email campaigns can drive 18 times more revenue. [15]

Sources and Citation Info

Just a reminder, none of these statistics in this blog post are based on nChannel research. We just did the dirty work of finding and compiling the most compelling stats about eCommerce. We hope it can serve as a convenient resource for your own needs.

Feel free to link to this post, but for any formal or academic purposes, please cite the original source of data. Below you’ll find where we found the statistics. Check out these sites for even more data about your specific interests.

1. Shopify: Future of Commerce 2021
2. ShipStation: Last Touch, Lasting Impact 2021
3. PPRO: North America
4. Salesforce: eCommerce Trends that are Shaping the Way Businesses Sell Online
5. Salesforce: New Data: The Biggest Marketing Trends in Retail and Consumer Goods, According to Nearly 900 Leaders
6. Redstage: State of B2B eCommerce Report
7. Merit: B2B Report on Millennials
8. Digital Commerce 360: How B2B Companies Must Deal with Younger Online Buyers
9. Forrester: Make Your B2B Business A Digital Business
10. Digital Commerce 360: Amazon Business Grows Faster than Amazon Itself
11. Business Insider: Rise of M-Commerce: Mobile Ecommerce Shopping Stats & Trends in 2021
12. IBM: Meet the 2020 Consumers Driving Change 
13. Medium: 8 Surprising Stats about Packaging You Need to Know
14. Modern Materials Handling: 2020 eCommerce Challenges, Trends and Solutions
15. Shopify Plus: The Future of eCommerce in 2021
16. Businesswire: The Subscription Economy Grows More Than 300% In The Last Seven Years
17. Business Insider: Almost 70% of US Consumers Use BOPIS
18. DigitalCommerce360: BOPIS is the next wave of ecommerce. Are you ready?
19. McKinsey: The Quickening
20. DigitalCommerce360: US ecommerce grows 44.0% in 2020
21. Supply Chain Dive: 44% of supply chain pros have no plan for China supply disruption
22. Invesp: The Rise of eCommerce Subscription Model And Services – Statistics and Trends
23. Incentive Solutions: Important Loyalty Program Statistics for 2020
24. nChannel: 10 Advantages of B2B eCommerce
25. Salesfource: B2B Commerce Trends You Weren’t Expecting (but Will Impact Your Business)

The post eCommerce Statistics: 100 Stats and Trends about Online Shopping appeared first on .

Today’s consumers want to interact and buy from your brand across different offline and online channels. No matter where they buy, they want that experience to be friction-less and intuitive. Consumers will even pick a favorable experience over shopping for the lowest price or top-quality product. 

This puts a lot of pressure on merchants to create a seamless experience. You have to be strategic and thoughtful to ensure your systems and processes support customer expectations. 

When it comes to order management and delivery, many retailers are turning to distributed order management (DOM) to achieve just that. The challenge? Distributed order management is a dynamic change from traditional order management. It can be difficult for merchants to make the necessary changes to support. 

But, those who do it right can gain a competitive advantage and better serve their customers. 

What is Distributed Order Management (DOM)?

Simply put, distributed order management (DOM) is optimizing the systems and processes during the sales order lifecycle to efficiently deliver orders on time to customers. It includes processes like: 

• Drop shipping orders to integrated suppliers
• Utilizing 3PL providers to outsource parts of your supply chain 
• Splitting orders to optimize fulfillment costs and delivery times
• Defining workflows that handle different types of orders different ways
• Having inventory visibility throughout the entire supply chain, even through third parties

To achieve this, you need two things: (1) a single, global view of inventory and orders across your entire supply chain and (2) the ability to orchestrate and automate several key functions from order routing and splitting to inventory forecasting and management. 

However you do it, DOM is all about improving your customer experience. 

DOM = Customer Experience 

When your order lifecycle is optimized, your customers gain a better experience. You can offer experiences like:

• Displaying accurate product availability across channels
• In-store associates can find and ship out-of-stock items in-store to a customer’s home
• Faster, accurate order deliveries at a lower cost
• More fulfillment options like “buy online, pickup in store”
• Better replenishment of inventory to avoid stock-outs
• Easy and fast online returns process 

The result? Increase in sales and better customer retention rates. 

Distributed Order Management Vs. Traditional Order Fulfillment

Compared to traditional order management practices, distributed order management is more dynamic. It uses cloud-based infrastructure and web service-based integrations to optimize and automate processes. It allows you to treat all parts of your order fulfillment process as if they’re happening in the same organization, even though they aren’t. 

With traditional order management systems, your processes can be static and your suppliers are a black box. When an order is stuck in “to be fulfilled” status, you don’t know when it happens or how long it’ll be there. 

But, with real-time information and visibility, DOM solves common fulfillment problems and improves:

• Accurate fulfillment of drop shipped items
• Optimized shipping costs by using ship-to addresses and real-time shipping quotes 
• Ability of suppliers to actually fulfill your stores in smaller, more frequent batches
• Purchasing from the most affordable supplier always

With DOM, there’s no more guessing or wondering about the efficiency of your supply chain or the status of an individual order for your customers. 

Investing in Distributed Order Management Software

While distributed order management started as a trend a few years back, it’s now a necessity to keep up with customer expectations. Otherwise, your technology and processes can hold you back from growth. 

To get started with DOM, it takes upgrading your traditional inventory and order management software to cloud-based and flexible systems with features like:

• Automation: You need to be able to automate complex processes between retail systems, suppliers, and more.
• Real-time Visibility: A single, global view of your entire operations 
• Customization: Be able to control and design your workflows around the unique experience you want for your customers. 
• Integration: You want to connect multiple endpoint systems (both your own and supply chain partners) for an easy and reliable way to share data for real-time visibility. 
• Scalability: Does the software meet my needs NOW and where we’re heading in the future?

As you evaluate DOM systems, look at your current processes. Figure out what you do well and what you don’t. You should know what your pain points are. Think about what type of customer experience you want to provide.

Once you understand your needs, you’ll be ready to start looking at software options that specialize in distributed order management capabilities. Some options are:

• NetSuite
• Microsoft Dynamics 365
• SAP Hybris
• Manhattan Associates
• Kibo Order Management
• IBM Sterling 
• Skubana

For systems like NetSuite and Microsoft Dynamics 365, you can use nChannel to help integrate them with your eCommerce, POS, or 3PL platforms to share data in real-time across your entire supply chain. 

More DOM Resources

Distributed order management is a big idea. Check out these other resources to learn more about DOM.

• Vendor-Managed Inventory Benefits & Advantages
• Everything You Need to Know about Partial Shipment
• Gartner’s Reviews and Ratings of DOM Systems
• Distributed Order Management as a Competitive Advantage
• What is Retail Supply Chain Management and Why Is It Important?

The post What is Distributed Order Management (DOM) and Why Does It Matter for Retailers? appeared first on .

According to ShipStation’s latest Last Touch report, 83% of consumers are less likely to re-purchase from a retailer after a negative delivery or shipping experience. 

With more customers shopping online than ever before, it is even more important to ensure your products are being shipped effectively and in a timely manner. Sometimes that means outsourcing and hiring a 3PL, or Third Party Logistics provider. 3PL’s are a great way to scale your business because they take part or all of your shipping processes in their own warehouse so you can focus on other business operations.  

Finding the right 3PL is extremely important since they are your customer’s last touch with your brand, which can ultimately make or break their satisfaction. There are many things to consider when searching for a 3PL to meet your needs.

So, here’s 6 easy questions you can ask to ensure your 3PL will be the perfect logistics partners for your eCommerce brand.

1. Does the 3PL specialize in your product vertical?

Fulfillment providers that have worked with customers in the same industry are usually privy to the packaging and shipping needs of your products. For products with stringent shipping protocols like hazardous materials or refrigerated/frozen components, finding a fulfillment partner with experience in those specialties is crucial.

2. Where are their warehouses located?

Customer expectations around delivery speeds has changed drastically over the last few years, so finding a 3PL with warehouses near your customers is beneficial to your business. Not only will they be able to get products to your customers faster, but it will also save you money.

3. Do they work with shipping carriers you already use?

It is helpful to use a fulfillment provider that already works with the carriers you do since they will know the policies and procedures needed to ship to your customers. In addition, it minimizes any possible disruption to the customer experience.

4. What is the 3PL’s inbound process?

Each fulfillment provider has their own method of receiving inbound products. Some 3PLs require strict scheduling and pre-labeling of products, while others may be more flexible. Finding a provider that has similar inbound procedures can help ensure you don’t create more work for yourself.

5. What is the pricing structure, and does it fit with your growth strategy?

There are many different pricing methods 3PLs use for their clients. For instance, they may charge per fulfillment or a lump sum for warehouse square footage. It is recommended to speak with multiple providers to see which pricing model works best for your current and future needs.

6. What are YOUR pain points?

The parts of your fulfillment process that are causing the most trouble are a great place to start when looking for a 3PL. 

Pro Tip: from ShipStation: When looking for the right 3PL, it vastly helps to project shipping volumes for the next three to six months. Some metrics that you might want to consider are number of SKUs, daily order volume, customer locations, and weights of shipments.

Using Online Order Fulfillment to Increase Sales

Unfortunately, a lot of online sellers struggle with fulfillment, causing their business to suffer from their bottom line to customer satisfaction. Choosing the right 3PL partner can be a first step to managing a logistics networks that sets you apart and delights your customers.

Don’t take it from us – read about how nChannel / ShipStation customer EasyCare leveraged a 3PL partner and integrated technology to institute same-day shipping to increase their sales and customer satisfaction. You’ll see their step-by-step process of how they chose the right 3PL partner.

Here’s more helpful resources to help you improve your fulfillment processes:

• United by Blue Founder/CEO Brian Linton Talks Fulfillment, Brand and Handling Growth
• Best Shipping Software for eCommerce
• How to Ship Your Products

About the Author

Jennifer Rubin is a Partner Marketing Manager at ShipStation in Austin, TX. She has worked with partners in the ecommerce industry for years, with the primary goal of helping merchants build and grow their businesses.

 ShipStation is the leading web-based shipping solution that helps ecommerce retailers import, organize, and ship orders quickly and easily—wherever you sell, however you ship.businesses.

The post Looking for a 3PL? Ask These 6 Questions to Find The Perfect Partner appeared first on .

If you don’t use ASINs correctly, you can violate Amazon’s selling terms and even lose your eligibility to sell on the platform! 

So, what’s an ASIN number and how do you use it?

What is an ASIN number?

ASIN stands for Amazon Standard Identification Number. 

It’s a unique identifier of 10 letters and/or numbers for a product that’s assigned by Amazon.com. It’s primarily used for product-identification within their product catalog of billions of items. 

For books, the ASIN is the same as the ISBN number. For all other products, a new ASIN is created when an item is uploaded to Amazon’s catalog. 

Note: ASINs are only guaranteed to be unique within a marketplace. That means different national Amazon sites may use different ASINs for the same product.

Why Amazon ASINs are Important to Amazon and its Sellers

Why are ASINs so important? Because its used to reference catalog data, track inventory for products, and index catalog pages for search and browsing on Amazon.com

The ASIN number is the foundation of Amazon’s product catalog structure, which allows for: 

• Shoppers to search by drilling down through multiple categories.
• Shoppers can search for a specific product by its ASIN 
• Amazon to deliver accurate and relevant product searches every time.

It’s vital then that sellers identify and use the correct ASIN for their products. Otherwise, Amazon won’t be able to organize and search your products for an optimized shopping experience. 

If you want to list any product on Amazon, you must match your product to an existing ASIN number or create a new one.

How Can I Find My Amazon ASIN Number?

You can locate an Amazon ASIN number for your product in a few different places: 

1. A product’s web address on Amazon
2. A product’s details on Amazon 
3. A third-party software tool built for ASIN lookups.

The fastest way is to look in your browser’s address bar for the product you’re looking to sell. The Amazon ASIN will be after the product’s name and “dp”, as highlighted below. 

In this example, the ASIN is “B015UKRNGS”

The second place you can find the ASIN is in the product details, near the bottom of the product’s page.

You can also use software tools to find ASIN number lookups. If you have thousands of products, you wouldn’t want to search web addresses for each item individually. Instead, you can use an online tool to do a bulk upload of your product identifiers that returns each ASIN number.

Amazon SIN Lookup Tools: 

• ASINTOOL
• Synccentric

Of course, these types of tools will cost you. Whether or not you need one will depend on the number of items you have and how often you list new products to Amazon.

Note: It’s prohibited to create a new ASIN for a product that already exists on Amazon. Doing so can result in your selling privileges being temporarily suspended or permanently removed. It’s important to check if your item is already on Amazon!

What is Amazon’s Product Variation Policy?

While searching and adding ASINs, Amazon sellers often deal with product variations, or parent-child relationships. Variations allow shoppers to compare and buy products based on different attributes like size, color, or other characteristics. 

Here’s how variations look to an Amazon shopper:

For variant products, there will be one parent ASIN number. However, Amazon has several rules about how to list variations. There are also several prohibited practices to prevent sellers from misusing variations and fundamentally changing children products and how they relate to their parent ASIN number.

Read more about Amazon Variation Relationships policies

How to Create New and Unique Amazon ASINs: Using GTINs, UPCs, ISBNS, and EANs

If you’re adding a new item to Amazon, you must create a new ASIN for it to be included in the catalog. Manufacturers often have to add new ASINs for their products.

To create a new ASIN, Amazon provides an “Add a Product” tool. If your item already exists, you’ll match the correct ASIN. If it’s a new product, then you’ll create a new ASIN. Once your product page is up, then you can sell your items.

Be aware that if you add a new ASIN, other sellers can also now use this ASIN number to sell the same items.

If you’re creating a new ASIN, you’ll need to know your product’s GTINs, or Global Trade Item Numbers. The most common GTINs used are UPCs, ISBNs, and EANs. These types of product codes are generally found near the barcode on the package of your product. Amazon uses these universal product identifiers to create and match their own unique ASIN codes.

• ISBN (International Standard Book Number): 10 digits or 13 digits
• UPC (Universal Product Code): 12 digits
• EAN (European Article Number): 13 digits
• GTIN-14 (Global Trade Item Number): 14 digits

If you don’t already know your GTIN, you can request it from the manufacturer of your product. But, if you manufactured the item yourself, you’ll need to register your product through the GS1 US for UPCs, or US ISBN Agency for ISBNs (for US sellers).

ASIN Creation Limit

Amazon does limit the number of new listings sellers can create in a week based on sales history, listing creation history, and other factors. As you increase your sales, your capacity to create new listings will also increase. If you’re a new seller, you should prioritize the products you are listing to increase your sales quickly.  

Read more about Amazon’s ASIN creation limits.

The Benefit of Creating New ASIN Numbers

Amazon continues to grow their extensive product catalog across hundreds of categories. However, that also means that Amazon has become an extremely competitive marketplace to sell on.

If you get to create a new Amazon ASIN, this indicates that you’re the only seller for the product. You won’t have to compete with any other sellers directly. This is a great strategy to help you win the Amazon buy box, which is a sure way to increase sales.

As you look to list new products on Amazon, keep in mind how competitive that item is. Are there already multiple sellers offering it or are you creating a new ASIN for it?

What is Reverse ASIN lookup?

ASINs also help you track your competitors on Amazon. By looking up your competitor’s ASINs, you can gain critical information about their products, such as organic ranking, advertising ranking, and search volumes for the keywords they’re using in PPC campaigns. 

To do a reverse ASIN lookup, you’ll need a software tool like: 

• Viral Launch 
• AMZScout
• JungleScout

And, you can reverse lookup your own ASINs! This gives you insight into your own performance. 

Identifying your Amazon ASIN number is the first step in listing your products on Amazon. It’s important you understand the process to match or create your ASIN so your items are searchable for customers.

To learn more about selling on Amazon, check out these other popular articles:

• How to Sell on Amazon for Beginners Using FBA: A Step by Step Guide
• Amazon Buy Box: How Amazon Sellers Can Win the Buy Box
• Are Fulfillment by Amazon (FBA) Fees Worth the Cost?
• 10 Amazon Selling Tips All Sellers Need to Know
• Top 5 mistakes to Avoid When Selling on Amazon
• Amazon Product Listing Optimization Best Practices

Download our guide that details everything you need to know about Fulfillment by Amazon. Click the link below!

The post Amazon ASIN: What is an ASIN number? appeared first on .

While it’s clear that B2B buyers want to make purchases online, many manufacturers, distributors and others have been slow to adopt eCommerce initiatives. 

Part of the problem is that shifting to an online sales model isn’t any easy transition. It can require an entire overhaul in how you conduct business. And, without the right mindset and strategy, your digital transformation might not be fully realized. 

To help get you started, our quick guide focuses on five key areas that are key to any successful eCommerce initiative. 

• Getting buy-in from stakeholders 
• Appointing an eCommerce leader
• Choosing the right eCommerce platform and partner
• Integrating your systems 
• Focusing on an end-to-end customer experience

And, when done right, it will fuel your sales and future-proof your business. If you still need convincing, check out our 10 Advantages of B2B eCommerce Selling. 

The time is now to build and execute an eCommerce initiative. Because the longer you wait, the harder it’ll be to catch up.  

1. Getting Buy-in from Key Stakeholders

Before you start any eCommerce initiative, you have to ask and answer a simple question.

Do all your major stakeholders believe selling online is the way to increase revenue, create efficiencies for you and your customers and is an investment in the future of your business?

And, one of the most common reasons B2B organizations fail at it is because they lacked total buy-in from their organization from the start.

A digital transformation isn’t easy and doesn’t happen overnight. It will affect every department in some way. So, it’s critical that all involved are on-board of why you’re doing it and what the possibilities are. 

Otherwise, you won’t be on the same page or working towards the same goals, which puts your project at risk for failure or never materializing into an experience that matters for your customers. 

At this point, a key stakeholder to include is your sales teams. At first, they might object out of fear of becoming obsolete, or diminished credit (or pay) for sales. 

The truth? When educated on eCommerce, a website can be used to their advantage to sell larger order to more customers in less time. Follow these techniques to ensure your sales team is ready for a digital transformation. 

2. Appointing a Dedicated eCommerce Resource

When planning for your project, you should have a dedicated decision-maker to oversee the project and its progress. 

Too often leaders underestimate a project and brush it off “as just a new website.” And, they don’t dedicate enough resources to it. 

But, a digital transformation is way more than that. To transform to an online sales model, you’ll need to implement and change your technology, processes, and training your employees for it. You’ll also work with multiple partners and vendors to make your vision a reality. 

This type of transformation will require someone’s full attention to oversee, manage, and ensure your project stays on track. 

Further, an eCommerce initiative is a long-term investment for your business. It’s not something you implement once and then never think much about again. You’ll continue to grow your eCommerce team over time to ensure your site continues to evolve with your needs. 

3. Choosing Your eCommerce Platform and Partner 

One of the initial, big decisions to make is what eCommerce platform to use. This is a critical piece of infrastructure that determines the type of intuitive experiences you can build. 

Luckily, there’s now all types of platforms available that can support B2B operations well. You can build custom, leverage a B2B SaaS platform, or repurpose a B2C-first platform. 

As you compare platforms, the main areas you want to focus on are: 

• Functionality: What’s your must-have capabilities to meet your buyer needs? B2B operations are complex and the platform needs to support them. 
• Responsive Design: It’s now table stakes for your site to render well across different devices like smartphones and tablets. 
• Self-Service: Buyers should have control to manage their account as they need. 
• Customer-specific pricing: Having the ability to list pricing and product selection by customer
• Payment options: Having flexible payment options that B2B buyers are used to like partial payment or purchasing against a terms account
• Product data: The ability to organize, connect, and list your complex catalogs as rich product listings is crucial. 
• Integration: How well is the platform able to integrate into your other critical systems like an ERP or supplier databases

An eCommerce partner like an agency can help you choose the right platform based on your strategy and their expertise. Then, they’ll help you implement and customize the platform. 

Use this guide to help you understand and research different eCommerce platforms for B2B. 

4. Integrating Your Systems 

How will online orders impact your accounting and operational processes? How will you fulfill online orders through a backend system like an ERP?

Your eCommerce platform will be a new critical endpoint in your technology ecosystem — adding to your ERP/accounting, order management, warehouse management, POS, 3PL or supplier databases. 

Each of these systems holds important data for your organization and must be shared among the rest of them. Data automation between your system is what what leads to critical processes like: 

• Publishing product listings online
• Displaying accurate inventory availability
• Enabling customer-specific pricing online 
• Create accounts for buyers
• Automating order processing and fulfillment for efficiency 
• Providing order and shipment details for a buyers account online 
• Sending timely marketing emails 

Automation is how you ensure a seamless buying experience from start to finish. And, automation is achieved through system integration. 

It’s best practice to consider your integration needs while you’re choosing and implementing your eCommerce platform. It’ll guide how your platform is set up and ensures you’re ready to handle your must-have processes from the start. 

Read about how B2B seller Godecker’s used integration to increase customer satisfaction as they grew their web presence. 

5. Focusing on Customer Experience 

Lastly, it’s important to never lose sight of your buyer needs or expectations throughout your eCommerce project. Your decision making (both strategically and technically) should always focus on what’s best for the buyer. 

A good customer experience comes down to anticipating your buyer’s needs and then any friction points that might come up. 

How do they research products? How do they compare products and brands? How do they want to pay online? How do you quickly and accurately fulfill their order? What’s the easiest way to complete a repurchase or check order status?

As you answer those questions, you’ll start to understand how your website should support their purchasing journey. All of these parts of your website and content will play a part in the experience:

• Site navigation / site search
• Check out process
• Account management 
• Product listings
• Product reviews 
• Landing pages (from paid ads or other marketing channels)
• Email marketing
• Return policies 

Mapping out your buyer’s journey is part of your overall content marketing strategy, which can you read more extensively about here: B2B Content Marketing Guide.

Here’s some examples of B2B companies getting user experience right: 7 Innovative B2B eCommerce Sites

Are you ready for a digital transformation? 

The B2B landscape is changing. Your buyers’ needs are evolving. Either you rise to meet their expectations, or face getting left behind. 

And, while undertaking such a project seems overwhelming, you can be successful through the right preparation and strategy. You just need to get started!

The post Your Roadmap to Start a Successful B2B eCommerce Initiative appeared first on .

Providing a good delivery experience can determine whether a customer buys from you again or not.  

According to ShipStation’s latest report, 83% of consumers are less likely to re-purchase from a retailer after a negative delivery or shipping experience. 

Unfortunately, a lot of online sellers struggle with delivery, causing their business to suffer. But, building and managing your own logistics network is challenging, as it’s expensive and time-consuming. 

To meet customer expectations and protect their bottom lines, merchants are partnering with 3PLs to outsource their fulfillment needs. In the years to come, 3PLs will be critical to competing online and growing your business.  

Shopify Plus reported that demand for 3PLs is set to nearly double to $408 billion in the first half of this decade. 

So, what is a 3PL exactly? What role can they play in your business? And, how to do pick the right one to partner with? 

What is a 3PL?

A third-party logistics (3PL) provider is an outsourced partner that takes ownership of all or part of your order fulfillment processes. Once you get a new online order, you send it to a 3PL to pick, pack, and ship. In most cases, they also remain invisible to your customers and you can brand the packaging. 

3PLs can help with warehouse management, pick and packing, shipping your goods, handling returns, inventory reporting, forecasting, and more. Common 3PL providers are: 

• Amazon FBA
• ShipBob
• Kuehne + Nagel
• Rakuten Super Logistics
• Red Stag Fulfillment 

However, there’s all sorts of different 3PLs and they can specialize by industry, location, or just a certain fulfillment process. Many retailers partner with 3PLs that align with their niche. 

Why Would You Require a 3PL?

Globally, 64% of consumers want their orders shipped for free. And, 67% of U.S. consumers expect either same-, next-, or two-day delivery. Further, 72% of global consumers want brands to use sustainable packaging. 

The point? Today’s consumers have high shipping demands. And, they’re inclined to shop around and spend their money with those who meet them. 

The problem? Most online sellers can’t easily and readily build comprehensive logistic networks that meet those high demands. Implementing programs like same-day shipping require automated workflows and tech, efficient picking and packing services, and strategically located warehouses near customers. Further, only high-volume shippers receive cost-savings that make investing in your own infrastructure worthwhile. 

When a seller is on their own, they usually rely on cobbling together processes, software, and people, which ends up being expensive and time-consuming (without producing the desired results, either). As you scale and expand to new channels, it can be tough to keep up with your order volume and maintain your deliver standards.

This leaves sellers in a tough spot. On one hand, you can offer expensive or slow shipping, but you’ll probably lose a lot of sales. You could also offer fast and free shipping, but risk draining your profits if you’re not diligent about tracking costs. Or, you could end up eroding customer trust if you over promise and don’t deliver. 

nChannel customer, EasyCare, faced a similar experience when trying to implement same-day shipping for their customers.

Initially, they did all their own warehouse management. After 50 years in business though, they never felt efficient enough compared to the market and leaders like Amazon. They realized operating their own logistics wasn’t worth the financial costs or time to perfect. 

By outsourcing to a 3PL like Warehouse-Pro, they got time back to focus on their core business operations like creating products, marketing, and supporting customers. They also consistently delivered as promised and saw a decrease in customer service tickets of customers asking where their order was. 

You can read their full story of how they use a 3PL to ship more orders same-day and handle returns like experts. 

How 3PL Services Are Changing the Retail Landscape

You (like many others) probably don’t specialize in logistics, and don’t want to either. But, you also need a strong supply chain to compete online and meet your customer’s expectations. That’s where 3PLs can help your business. 

Access Advanced Capabilities 

Most sellers turn to 3PLs for their basic capabilities of storing inventory, pick and packing orders, and handling returns. When partnering with the right 3PL though, they can also become a true extension of your team. You can work with them to handle your unique shipping requirements like:

• Industry or product-specific terminology on packing slips and shipping materials
• Shipping products with hazardous materials 
• Shipping international
• Handling returns guarantees 
• Offering sustainable packaging 
• Maintaining your customer experience protocols 
• Integrating into your other systems like eCommerce, ERP, or POS

Cost-savings

As mentioned, it takes a high-volume of orders to see shipping discounts. 3PLs can leverage relationships and volume discounts that retailers could not otherwise achieve alone.With access to these cost savings and more, you can calculate an easy ROI of partnering with 3PL. 

Here’s a few ways a 3PL  can save your business money: 

• Eliminate costly mistakes like shipping to the wrong address
• Remove costs for investing warehouses, technology, and transportation
• Reduce staff’s time policing and fulfilling orders at every step in the process

Further, think about how a 3PL can help increase your sales. 

• Convert more visitors on the website with fast and free shipping
• Decrease negative reviews that hinder future sales 
• Invest in other areas of your business like your product quality and marketing 
• Have the confidence to expand new sales channels and handle fulfillment without issues

Customer Experience (and Gaining a Competitive Edge)

37% of consumers agree that shipping speed influences their purchasing decisions more than it did a year ago.

Being able to offer fast and free shipping can ensure a customer converts on your website. And, delivering as promised can also ensure they stick around to make another purchase. 

A 3PL can eliminate shipping to wrong addresses, stockouts, delayed shipments, etc. You can decrease the number of customer service tickets asking when their order shipped or why the tracking info hasn’t updated. You can also turn frustrating processes like handling returns into seamless and easy transactions. 

In a competitive online space, a 3PL can help your shipping processes stand out for the right reasons. 

How to Partner with a 3PL

Beyond the likes of Amazon FBA and Rakuten, there are all sorts of 3PLs available to you. As you evaluate different options, be sure to consider: 

• Specialization: Have they worked in your industry before? Do your products require any special handling or instructions?
• Location: Are warehouses in strategic locations close to your customers? This can save you money, and ensure orders are delivered on-time. 
• Pricing: Is the pricing model transparent? How do your costs change as you grow or during busy seasons? 
• Carrier Rates: What are their rates with carriers? Are they better than yours? 
• Transportation: What type of delivery services do they offer? Can they ship internationally? 
• Service Level Agreements: What happens if they don’t ship on time? Do you get a refund?
• Reporting: What type of forecasting or reporting do they offer?
• Integration: Can you integrate their systems into your ERP, eCommerce, or POS platform? 
• Branding: Can you brand your packages?

As you work with a 3PL, remember that they will remain hidden to your customers. If a package isn’t delivered on time, the customer will blame you, not your 3PL partner. So, it’s important to be diligent when choosing who to partner with and trust with your customer experience. 

More resources about shipping for eCommerce: 

• Best Shipping Software for eCommerce
• United by Blue Founder/CEO Brian Linton Talks Fulfillment, Brand and Handling Growth
• Q&A: The Future of Cross-Border Commerce and International Shipping Experience
• How to Ship Your Products
• 3rd Party Fulfillment Services: Fulfillment by Amazon (FBA) Alternatives
• Are Returns Killing Your Online Store’s Profitability?

Want to learn more about Amazon’s FBA? Check out this guide that tells you everything you need to know when deciding to use Amazon FBA or not.

The post What Is a 3PL and Why Are They Important to Retailers? appeared first on .

If you run an eCommerce store, data-driven decisions are the best way to improve conversion rates, bring in more sales, and propel your business to new heights.

But how can you get the data you use to make your decisions?

Unlike the owner of a retailer store, for example, you can’t just watch customers and see where they linger – and the items or sections of your store that they ignore. 

So what should you do? 

Google Analytics is a great place to start. It gives you the tools you need to analyze how your site traffic behaves. And, it’s FREE! As a result, it has become the de facto web analytics platform.

And if you use Magento for your eCommerce store, you should definitely use Google Analytics – it’s easy to integrate, offers excellent features, and is totally free.

In this updated guide we’ll take a look at why Google Analytics is such a great tool for eCommerce entrepreneurs and how to integrate it into your Magento storefront. 

Why Should I Use Google Analytics in My Magento Store? 

Because it’s the best way to track user behavior, gather insights about activity on your website, and make data-driven decisions to improve your overall website design. 

If you don’t have some kind of analytics software running on your website, you may not even know basic information like how many people visit your website, your bounce rate, click-through rates, and other metrics.

You’re essentially driving blindfolded. At night. With no headlights. 

Bestselling author, speaker and management consultant, Geoffrey Moore sums it up: “Without big data, you are blind and deaf and in the middle of a freeway.” 

But with Google Analytics, you’ll be able to build a strong foundation of data that you can use to make better decisions for your Magento store. You can measure the success of advertising campaigns, A/B test different pages, improve page loading speed – the possibilities are endless.

How to Integrate Magento with Google Analytics 

In 2021, the best (and easiest) way to integrate Magento with Google Analytics is by using the native Google Analytics integration offered by the Magento 2 platform. 

There are two simple steps you’ll need to complete to integrate Magento with Google Analytics.

Step 1: Sign up for Google Analytics

If you haven’t already done so, you’ll need to head to Google Analytics to set up an account and get a Google Analytics Account Number. You’ll need this to integrate Google Analytics into Magento. 

Step 2: Connect to Magento

Next, you’ll need to log into the Admin console for your Magento store. 

1. Click on the Admin sidebar, then select Stores > Settings > Configuration.
   
2. On the left-hand panel, expand the Sales section. Next, choose Google API from the settings that appear.
   
3. Click the Expand button to expand the Google Analytics section of the panel.
   
4. Set the Enable setting to “Yes,” and enter your Google Analytics Account Number in the provided text field.
   
5. Click Save Config to save your new configuration settings. That’s it! You’re done! 

Optionally, you can also set Content Experiments to “Yes” if you would like to use Google’s tools to A/B test pages and run other performance tests. This is not required.

“Without big data, you are blind and deaf and in the middle of a freeway.”

– Geoffrey Moore

What Can I Do With Google Analytics After I Integrate it with My Magento Store? 

A better question is “what can’t you do?” Because you can do just about anything you can imagine with Google Analytics. Its basic functions let you get an at-a-glance overview of key metrics: 

• Your total number of website visitors
• Average time spent on your website and on specific pages
• Geographic locations of visitors
• Views of individual pages
• The path that visitors take through your site (including the different pages they click to end up at a particular page) 

And that’s just the beginning. Google Analytics is an extremely powerful tool and is very versatile and flexible. Once you become more familiar with it, you can:

• Assess individual page performance to check on loading times and see how they affect bounce rates/conversion rates.
• See which pages are generating the most value (sales) on your store.
• Track the progress of email marketing campaigns and Google AdWords campaigns.
• Break down your website visitors by age, interests, gender, location, and other demographic information.

How to Get Started with Google Analytics

If you want more information about Google Analytics, Google Analytics Academy is a great place to start. This free resource from Google will take you through the basics of how Analytics works, how to generate reports, and even how to track the success of specific marketing campaigns. It’s a great place to get started.

Check out these helpful articles to help improve your Magento site:

• 14 Questions to Ask Before Hiring an eCommerce Agency
• Magento 1 End of Life: How to Meet PCI Compliance
• 3 Ways to Integrate Magento and NetSuite

About the Author

Ben Chafetz is the CEO of 121eCommerce, a Magento-only shop and Adobe’s 2020 Emerging Partner of the Year for Magento Commerce. 

Coming from the client side, Ben has a unique perspective and what works and what doesn’t for eCommerce merchants. After growing an eCommerce business from $500,000 in yearly revenue to $80 million, Ben founded 121eCommerce in 2014. Since then, the company has grown from a fledgling group of five to a robust team of nearly 50 employees.

Ben has over two decades of eCommerce experience and has worked on Magento since its inception in 2007. He is a regular speaker on Magento and eCommerce. He has two dogs and six children.

The post The Best Way to Integrate Magento with Google Analytics appeared first on .

Cloud and Software as a Service (SaaS) are two terms you see all the time now. When evaluating different technology options to run your business, you’ll see descriptions like cloud-based, hosted, SaaS, IaaS, or PaaS.

It’s important to understand these terms because their differences affect how you interact with the different technology you use every day.

So, what do these different terms actually mean?

What is Cloud Computing?

Cloud computing (or referred to as cloud or cloud-based) and SaaS (Software as a Service) are closely related, but different terms. We’ll explain that more in-depth later. First, we’ll define each. 

Cloud-based software is no longer emerging and disruptive technology. It’s mainstream and you use it every day whether you know it or not. 

Cloud-based business applications range from organizational software like Trello and Slack to ERPs like NetSuite and email providers like Mailchimp. See the Top 100 cloud list for familiar software names. 

Gartner forecasted that worldwide end-user spending on public cloud services to grow 18.4% in 2021 to total $304.9 billion, up from $257.5 billion in 2020.

So, what is the cloud? The cloud can be thought of as the internet.

If you’re using cloud-based software, you can use the internet (the cloud) to access that software whenever and wherever you are. You just need an internet connection and the ability to log into the system via a web browser. You can be on a desktop computer, phone, or PC. You can be at the office, home, or at the airport. It doesn’t matter, as long as you have WiFi.

In technical terms, cloud computing is the on-demand availability of computer system resources like servers, storage, databases, networking, etc.. It makes data centers available to many users over the internet. 

Cloud Computing vs Traditional IT 

Before cloud computing, companies would need their own computer servers or hardware on premise to use software applications. You would have to physically install a CD on your personal computer to use the software. 

The problem is that maintaining your own hardware can be expensive and time-consuming. And, it can limit who uses the software since you have to install it locally.

From an IT perspective, cloud computing is a game changer. Teams no longer must own and operate their own hardware and software assets. In other words, they don’t need deep expertise to set up, maintain, and secure their resources.

Instead, they work with a cloud service provider, or a third-party who hosts your software on remote servers where they store and process your data. These servers are housed in data centers all over the world. Cloud computing can help save IT services costs because the provider is maintaining and sharing computer systems services across multiple organizations. And, teams can access their cloud services over the internet, wherever they are.  

Gartner stated the proportion of IT spending that is shifting to cloud will accelerate in the aftermath of the COVID-19 crisis, with cloud projected to make up 14.2% of the total global enterprise IT spending market in 2024, up from 9.1% in 2020.

In other words, cloud computing is powering every industry. It optimizes IT costs, supports remote workforces, and ensures mobility and collaboration among team members. 

Cloud Software Benefits and Examples

There are many benefits to cloud computing. You don’t have to host, maintain, upgrade, or worry about data security of the servers for your software applications. You have access to your data in real-time, whenever you need it. Costs are usually lower because you just pay to rent space on the hosted servers and you can scale resources as you need.

Major cloud service providers include:

• Amazon Web Services (AWS) – Amazon’s global compute, storage, database, analytics, application, and deployment services.
• Google Cloud Platform – Google’s core infrastructure, data analytics, and machine learning.
• Microsoft Azure – Open, flexible, enterprise-grade cloud computing platform
• IBM Cloud — Open and secure public cloud for businesses that includes hybrid cloud platform, advanced data and AI capabilities.
• Oracle Cloud Infrastructure (OCI) — Offers servers, storages, networks, applications, and services 

With cloud computing, you’re responsible for maintaining whatever applications you run on the third-party’s (i.e. Amazon AWS)  servers. The third-party maintains the physical servers and operating system.

To learn more about cloud computing, Microsoft also offers a helpful breakdown. 

So, where does SaaS come in with cloud computing?

What Is Software as a Service (SaaS)?

Software as a Service is a software delivery model in which a cloud-based software application is licensed to a user. The application is accessed via the internet, meaning the user doesn’t install and maintain the software locally.

The application itself runs on the SaaS provider’s servers, making them responsible for the security, performance, and maintenance of it.

Typically, SaaS applications are licensed on a subscription basis. You pay a monthly fee based on level of service and number of users needed. In this way, a SaaS provider delivers and maintains their application to you over the internet, as a service.

SaaS Benefits and Examples

SaaS software has many known benefits. Just like cloud computing, it’s a cost-effective way to have real-time access to software whenever. Multiple users from 10 – 10,000 can have access to the same software. And, as the user you don’t have to worry about server maintenance.

Popular business SaaS applications are:

• Salesforce – A popular CRM that can be accessed through the internet
• Quickbooks Online – Access your accounting records from anywhere in the world
• Zoom – Log in via your web browser to start virtual conferences. 
• Slack — Communication tool for groups,

You might also come across different terms such as IaaS and PaaS, which stand for Infrastructure as a Service and Platform as a Service respectively. They also involve cloud computing, but offer different capabilities as a service.

So, you can think of SaaS as a branch (or part) of cloud computing. It’s a license for access to a specific software application that you access via the internet.

Cloud vs SaaS

You can see that cloud computing and SaaS are closely related, but different terms.

With cloud computing, a user is able to customize and manage any software application on a server that is hosted remotely by a third-party like AWS. You are given access to your data on those servers via the internet.

With SaaS, you pay a subscription to access an already developed, cloud-based software application via the internet. You don’t have the responsibility of maintaining the software. One drawback of SaaS software is that you can lose some control over the management and customization of the application.

nChannel is a good example of both a cloud computing and SaaS application. nChannel provides a cloud-based integration software that connects retail systems like eCommerce, ERP and POS systems to sync data between them for merchants like orders, inventory, product information, and tracking/shipping. 

How we deliver this cloud application to our customers is a SaaS model.

We built and own the nChannel application and give our customers access to it via the internet. nChannel maintains, manages, secures, and processes our customers’ data that is kept on remote servers in the “cloud.” We don’t maintain the physical servers themselves. We just maintain the application that is run on them.

To access our cloud-based software, our customers pay a monthly subscription. Multiple users can use it and access it via the internet.

As you can see, cloud computing and SaaS work together to bring easy-to-access, cost-effective software applications to all types of users.

Now that you understand what cloud and SaaS mean, check out these other articles:

• What is a Cloud ERP? See It’s Benefits.
• Advantages and Disadvantages of SaaS eCommerce Platforms
• Cloud POS Systems: Reviews and Comparisons of the Top 3 Systems
• Reality Check: Is the cloud REALLY that risky?
• Benefits and Advantages of Cloud Computing

The post Cloud Vs SaaS: What’s the Difference? appeared first on .

While vendor-managed inventory (VMI) is not a new concept, it’s still not widely adopted by merchants. Yet, when executed correctly, a vendor-managed inventory strategy can bring huge benefits to your business (think cost savings and better customer experience). 

In this post, learn what exactly VMI is, it’s benefits, and how you can implement a VMI program for any size business.

What is Vendor-Managed Inventory?

Put simply, vendor-managed inventory is a process where the supplier (or whoever you get your inventory from) takes full responsibility for your inventory instead of you. When done right, it can be an effective strategy to lower costs and prevent unintentional stock outs. VMI is what made Walmart the behemoth it is today and why their stores always have items on their shelves. 

Another way to think about VMI is comparing them to auto-fulfillment programs for everyday items like printers. Nowadays when you buy a printer, you can enroll in programs that automatically ship you more ink when you need it. By allowing the printer manufacturer have access to your printer’s data, they can accurately send you ink before you run out. Paying the low monthly fee can save you money in the long run. It also saves you the headache of managing your ink levels diligently and buying more ink right when you need it

How Traditional Inventory Management Works

Let’s say you’re a retailer who sells widgets that are manufactured by ABC Widget Co. In a traditional business model, you’ll forecast your sales, then order enough widgets from ABC to fulfill the sales you forecasted.

This traditional inventory management model is challenging in a few ways:

• The accuracy of your forecast is limited, so you risk buying too much or too little stock.
• You purchase and own the inventory, regardless of whether you sell it.
• You have limited visibility into whether your manufacturer can even fulfill your order once you send it. 

All retailers know that excess inventory is a liability, but it’s also common that you can’t sell what you don’t have. Traditional inventory management usually leads you to purchase excess inventory to pad yourself against stock-outs. You literally have to decide what’s less bad for your business: running out of inventory or wasting money on carrying too much.

Further, traditional inventory management puts all the responsibility on the merchant to handle this critical part of your business. If you don’t have the right skillset to handle it (and most don’t), it can be overwhelming and frustrating to deal with. 

Traditional Inventory Management vs Vendor-Managed Inventory

Vendor-managed inventory relationships attempt to solve these problems by sharing the burden of inventory management between the buyer and the seller. (In our example, the manufacturer is the seller and the retailer is the buyer.)

The goal of a VMI relationship is to ensure the retailer only buys what they’ll sell. By maintaining a close contact with the supplier, including sharing data through technology, the retailers can purchase stock in smaller batches, only when they need it. 

Most importantly, the responsibility of inventory management is shifted to the seller (the manufacturer), who then sends inventory to buyers based on real-time demand, not through purchase orders. 

With VMI, Instead of forecasting sales and buying widgets based on an estimate, the retailer relies on ABC Widget Co. (the manufacturer) to handle everything. With access to the retailer’s inventory counts, the manufacturer can maintain the retailer’s stock, making frequent, smaller shipments of product.

Typically the VMI process is facilitated with technology. In the past, that technology has been EDI (electronic data interchange), a standardized messaging protocol that allows the systems of both the buyer and seller to communicate directly.

(Remember, the retailer needs to be in frequent contact with the manufacturer to maintain enough stock to sell, without over-buying.)

Today’s vendor-managed inventory solutions though use more modern communication standards like APIs (application programming interfaces) and XML (extensible markup language), but that’s going down a technical rabbit hole that we needn’t go down right now.

Vendor-Managed Inventory Benefits

The best part of VMI? Everyone involved can benefit!

Benefits to the Customer

At the end of every supply chain is a customer (often a consumer, sometimes a business) who actually uses the product. While they don’t have control over the supply chain per se, they do play a powerful role at the end of it. If they don’t buy a product, no one up the chain makes money.

It’s important to understand how vendor-managed inventory benefits the customer, because at the end of the day, if they aren’t winning, no one is.

1. Improved Customer Experience

The obvious benefit of vendor-managed inventory is avoiding stock outs, which can be one of the most frustrating experiences for consumers. There’s nothing worse than telling a customer that you don’t have inventory to sell or ship to them. 

Ensuring you have that inventory in stock creates a better experience for your customer. When the customer needs to rely on you for something, you’re there to oblige. Positive customer experiences encourage repeat purchases and brand advocacy.

Happy customers make happy retailers.

2. Transparency 

When a customer buys a product today, they care where it came from. Where was it built? Was it built using sustainable processes and products? Does the manufacturer pay a living wage to all employees?

These aren’t the kinds of questions retailers had to be ready to field just a decade or two ago. Fortunately, a vendor-managed inventory solution can help modern retailers be more transparent about where their products came from and how they’re made. 

This is really just a spin on better customer experience. Customers want to trust the brands they buy. Today, they’re even willing to pay more for quality products and open production. The customer views a closer relationship with a retailer and the rest of the supply chain as a benefit. And, they will reward you with loyalty and repeat purchases.

Benefits to the Retailer or Distributor

The retailer (or whoever distributes the inventory) might benefit the most from a VMI approach. 

1. Always Have Stock Ready to Sell 

Retailers are constantly walking a tight-rope: excess inventory versus missing sales due to stockouts. They depend on forecasting methodologies that are sometimes no better than educated guesses. 

When the vendor has close, frequent visibility into the retailer’s stock though, it can push smaller deliveries before you run out of stock. This tight relationship significantly reduces the risk of stockouts and missed selling opportunities.

According to IHL Group, Worldwide cost of inventory distortion (including shrinkage, stockouts, and overstock) is an estimated $1.1 Trillion.

Think back to the printer ink auto-fulfillment program mentioned above. We all know the frustration of running out of ink RIGHT when you’re in the middle of printing something important. The biggest selling point of signing up for the program is to avoid those moments.  

2. Increased Inventory Turn (Less Inventory) + Take Advantage of Other Opportunities 

With VMI, the retailer/distributor doesn’t need to hold as much inventory to ensure they can fulfill orders or sales. This means they reduce the financial liabilities of inventory and improve the closely managed inventory turnover ratio (sales ÷ average inventory).

Buying and holding Inventory costs you money. When cash is used to purchase inventory (that may never sell), that cash can’t be used to operate the business or invest in other growth opportunities. Every retailer wants to hold as little inventory as possible without running out, and that’s a tough balancing act.

With VMI, the vendor pushes inventory down to the retailer based on real-time demand. It distributes the inventory risk, so it is shared between the buyer and seller. It gets the retailer as close as possible to buying exactly the amount of inventory that will ACTUALLY sell.

Benefits to the Manufacturer

All the way at the top of the supply chain, the manufacturer also benefits from this relationship.

1. Improved Forecasting Ability

Think about how difficult it is for a manufacturer to forecast how much product to make. The ultimate driver should be how many consumers (or end customers) will buy, but the manufacturer is often separated by the customer by a few degrees–by layers of retailers and distributors.

A vendor-managed inventory solution links the entire supply chain, effectively giving the manufacturer, at one end of the chain, direct visibility into the retailer’s sales data, at the other end. With actual customer sales data, manufacturers are able to more accurately predict how much product to manufacture.

This also keeps the retailers they sell to happy. When the retailer needs inventory, the manufacturer is prepared to meet demand.

2. More Accurate Ordering and Fulfillment

Order fulfillment can be a big liability for manufacturers. If they make the wrong thing, send the wrong thing, make too much of the wrong thing, etc., it costs the manufacturer money. In traditional supply chain relationships, ordering and fulfillment can be rife with errors.

The vendor-managed inventory relationship reduces the risk of errors in ordering and order fulfillment, mostly because it digitizes the processes. Systems talk to one another directly, even across company lines, preventing human mistakes.

Benefits to Everyone

Finally, there are benefits that are shared across all parties in the supply chain, from the top to the bottom.

1. More Stable Supply Chain

When something goes wrong in a link of a supply chain, the ripple effect can impact many different organizations. For example, if a manufacturer has to shift focus to fill an emergency order for one customer, how many other customers are they delaying? You may be sharing risk with other companies you aren’t even aware of.

When the entire supply chain is linked, VMI relationships can be a stabilizer. It reduces the risk of major disruptions that can affect all the different companies that are linked directly and indirectly through the supply chain.

2. Closer Partnerships

The VMI strategy requires organizations to link their business processes and their technology platforms more closely. Ultimately, that means they are linking their businesses together, creating closer business partnerships.

When companies pool their resources, their talented employees, and their energy, all in the pursuit of shared goals, everyone benefits. These partnerships can produce more innovative solutions for consumers (or end customers) at lower costs. Cooperative business is a win for everyone involved.

How to Implement a Vendor-Managed Inventory Strategy

If implementing VMI sounds like the right strategic direction for your business, you can start with a few actions.

1. Calculator Your ROI

First, try to calculate the value of VMI for your business. If you were able to reduce your inventory by 50%, how would that impact your business? If you were able to eliminate stock-outs, how much more revenue would you generate? Understanding the potential benefit to VMI will help you monitor the eventual ROI.

2. Talk with Your Vendors

Next, talk with your vendors about improving your relationship. Even before you have technology-integrated inventory relationships, you’ll want to work closely with them. Make sure you are both on the same page. Make sure your suppliers are ones you feel comfortable building a long term relationship with.

3. Get the Right Technology

Once you’re ready, you’ll also need to implement the right technology. While traditionally VMI solutions have been driven by EDI technology, there’s newer solutions available that can be easier and more powerful to use. 

To start, check out nChannel’s vendor-managed inventory solution. We can help integrate your systems so you can share your inventory and order data in real-time across your suppliers and manufacturers. 

The post Vendor-Managed Inventory Benefits & Advantages appeared first on .

Online shopping is disrupting traditional B2B selling. Digital-savvy buyers want the convenience, speed, accuracy, and personalization that eCommerce stores, mobile apps, and B2B marketplaces like Amazon Business offer.

In fact, 68% of B2B buyers prefer to do business online versus with a salesperson.

Leading B2B merchants are tackling eCommerce head-on, realizing that it’s essential for growing revenue and driving new customer acquisitions. Otherwise, you risk getting left behind by the competition. 

As the B2B industry undergoes a digital transformation, look at the top 10 advantages of eCommerce.

1. Size of B2B eCommerce

Did you know that the online opportunity for B2B sellers dwarfs that of B2C?

B2B eCommerce is predicted to reach $1.8 trillion and account for 17% of all B2B sales in the U.S. by 2023. The industry is twice as big as B2C. And just like B2C, more sales continue to shift from in-person to online.

Is this an opportunity you can afford to pass on?

Forrester also found that manufacturers and wholesalers are the two industries generating this massive market growth. Currently, too many of them rely on homegrown systems that are slowing them down. As B2B customers demand better buying experiences, merchants are trying to keep up with new technology and processes. 

2. B2B’s Bigger Order Values and Higher Conversion Rates

Compared to consumers, B2B buyers have higher average order values and they’re more likely to buy. 

Since they buy in bulk, an average order value of a B2B transaction is around $491, opposed to $147 for B2C.

And, conversion rates are higher. B2B websites report average conversion rates at 10%, while B2C experiences are around 3%. 

This shows that eCommerce can have a high ROI for B2B merchants who invest in it.

3. Millennials Want to Shop Online

Digital-savvy Millennial buyers are changing the game for B2B. 80% of all B2B buyers will be Millennials by 2023, and they want to research and buy online. 

74% of B2B buyers report searching at least half of their work purchases online. And, on average, they do 12 searches prior to engaging a specific’s brand’s site. 

As your potential buyers research and compare online, you have an opportunity to expand your reach to anyone looking to buy on the internet. 

4. Create B2C-like Buying Experiences 

The first B2B websites were simple “portals” used to replace customer service reps and allow existing customers to place reorders. Other sites were just online catalogs for browsing only. 

Today, B2B sites are providing shopping experiences that aren’t far off from what any consumer would expect. There’s simple site navigation, high-quality photos, simplified checkouts, and flexible payment options. In other words, they’re visually modern, easy to use, and focus on straightforward processes to increase conversions.

This shift has led many popular platforms like BigCommerce, Shopify Plus and Magento to add more B2B functionality to their platforms. This gives you the opportunity to upgrade your technology and buying experiences to meet the needs of online-savvy buyers. You can use proven practices from B2C, while still accommodating for the complexities of B2B purchasing like payment terms and customized pricing lists. 

Read more about how to choose the right B2B eCommerce platform for your business. 

5. Display Full Product Catalogs Online

A challenge of selling online for B2B merchants is managing your large product catalog. Luckily, there’s now accessible technology that allows you to easily display and handle your product information online with grace. 

When done right, it can be integral part of an effective online experience to help with: 

• Site navigation – Make it easy to navigate hundreds of product categories and choices
• Site search – Search and find products on your site
• Rich product listings – Help buyers compare the quality of products
• Product recommendations – Show relevant product suggestions for upsell opportunities

6. Integrate Systems and Automate Key Processes 

In the past, eCommerce platforms were built independent of legacy ERP or order management systems. This left B2B sellers scrambling when it came to order processing and tracking inventory. Your critical order data wasn’t synchronized between systems, leaving you with hours of manual data entry which can easily lead to costly mistakes like shipping the wrong quantity. 

Today, cloud-based eCommerce platforms have built-in order management systems or easily integrate with your back-end systems. Sellers can now sync order, inventory, and customer data across all their channels. 

With integrated software systems you can:

• Automate order fulfillment
• Display inventory availability in real-time
• Handle complex processes like partial delivery
• Efficiently ship from multiple warehouses
• Provide customers with real-time tracking updates 

B2B sellers can now promise fast, accurate, and transparent delivery to their customers.

7. Compete with Amazon Business 

33% B2B buyers said they turn to Amazon Business or Google to begin their purchasing journey, compared with 32% for a supplier’s website or portal. Of those buyers starting their B2B buying process online, 30% are making more purchases through Amazon Business. Just like consumers, B2B buyers are turning to B2B marketplaces for large product catalogs, low prices, and fast shipping.  

To compete for those customers, you either have to create an Amazon-like experience on your website or sell on Amazon itself. Read more about the pros and cons of selling on Amazon Business. 

8. Sell Direct to Consumers

Beyond B2B, you can use your online store to sell directly to consumers. Improved operational efficiencies and easier processes make it possible for you to market part of your catalog to consumers. You’ll be equipped to go beyond traditional B2B selling models and find new channels of growth. To do this, you’ll need to invest in strong digital marketing and online merchandising.

9. Provide Self-Service Account Management

B2B businesses can leverage modern eCommerce technology to put more power into the hands of their buyers. By providing strong self-service tools online, you can streamline time-intensive parts of the sales process. Your customers don’t have to interact with a sales rep for every small need or want. 

Self-service tools can help your buyers manage basic parts of their account online like: 

• Updating billing and shipping addresses
• Save and update payment forms
• Check order progress
• Add / remove account users
• Reorder buttons
• Streamline shopping experience

Read more about how to optimize your online experience for self-service.

10. Manage Suppliers More Efficiently

B2B manufacturers have to manage several supplier relationships at once. You have to know what your current inventory levels are, what your supplier inventory levels are, when you’re going to need to order again, and more. To handle this, you’re probably used to a lot of spreadsheets, phone calls, and faxed order forms.

You can make these processes more efficient by integrating digitally with your suppliers through your eCommerce platform. For example, through automation and workflows, you can trigger to buy more inventory when you’re close to a stock out. This can save you valuable time and money in the long run. 

What to Do Next: Download Our B2B eCommerce Guide

Whether you’re ready or not, eCommerce is transforming how the B2B industry buys and sells. If you want to get ahead of the curve, you need to take advantage of this opportunity now!

To help you start preparing your company for a digital transformation, download our free guide: How to Navigate B2B eCommerce: Go-to-Guide for Manufacturers and Distributors Selling Online. 

You can also check out these other helpful resources for B2B eCommerce: 

• Get Your B2B Sales Team On Board for Your eCommerce Migration

• B2B eCommerce Trends that Sellers Need to Know AboutB2B eCommerce Best Practices You Should Know
• 7 Tips To Supercharge Your B2B eCommerce Site

The post 10 Advantages of B2B eCommerce Selling appeared first on .

Unfortunately, dealing with evolving fraud tactics is frustrating and time-consuming. And, protecting yourself against potential risks can backfire. Sometimes merchants end up declining real orders and lose customers as a result. 

Nonetheless, any online seller needs the right processes and technology in place to safeguard their data. Otherwise, fraud can quickly drain your profits and ruin your brand reputation. 

Follow these 7 easy steps to protect your online store today, keeping your bottom line healthy and your customers happy. 

How eCommerce Fraud Happens

Here’s common tactics by online attackers and scammers: 

• Hijack customer’s account and make unauthorized purchases
• Use stolen credit card information to make fraudulent purchases 
• Abuse return policies 
• Make fraudulent chargeback claims like never receiving an item
• Some chargebacks are friendly and unintentional 

Once a fraudulent purchase happens, the buyer can open a dispute or request a chargeback on their credit or debit card. As the eCommerce seller, you’re on the hook to pay back the customer and their bank can impose a chargeback fee on you, which can range from $20 to $100 per chargeback. This doesn’t even include the lost money on the transaction fee, loss of inventory, time spent preparing the order, and more. 

Check out this helpful post from Chargeback Gurus of an in-depth look at what a chargeback actually costs you. 

You can see that the best prevention of fraud and chargebacks is to stop them from happening at all. 

7 Easy Steps to Reduce eCommerce Fraud

Attackers are constantly evolving their methods, so it’s important for merchants to stay on top of best practices to prevent all of it. 

1. Choose the Best eCommerce Software (and Keep It Up to Date)

Since fraud is a universal problem, many SaaS-based eCommerce software providers like BigCommerce and Shopify include basic fraud tools in their platforms. 

Look for features like these to know if a shopping cart has basic security covered:

• SSL Certificate: All pages, content, credit card, and transaction information is protected by the same level of security as banks.
• Payment Gateway Integration: Popular payment gateways will also have built-in fraud protection.
• PCI Compliance: Level-1 PCI compliant is the highest level 
• Automatic Security Updates: Gaps in security can also occur when you’re operating on out-of-date software, automatic updates ensure you always have their latest security patches.

If you’re using open source software like Magento or WooCommerce, be aware that you (or your tech partner) are totally responsible for many of the areas mentioned above. So, you’ll need to keep vigilant watch that your bases are always covered. 

Overall though, these built-in tools cover on the basics, there’s still more to do to protect your online store and customers. 

2. Stay PCI Compliant 

It’s mandatory for anyone selling online to be PCI compliant. This means that you meet the  comprehensive standards for processing, storing, and transmitting credit card information in a secure environment. It includes any cardholder data that is personally identifiable like your card’s account number, expiration date, name, address, social security number, and more. 

If you aren’t PCI Compliant, you can face monthly fines from $5,000 to $100,000 and are putting your customer data at serious risk. 

As mentioned above, your eCommerce provider might already take care of PCI compliance for you. This is a huge relief as there are many steps to achieving it. If you use open source software like Magento though, then you (or your tech partner) are totally responsible for it. 

Still on Magento 1? Users on Magento 1 are no longer considered PCI compliant. See what your options are now to keep your store secure. 

3. Use Credit Card Verification 

As mentioned above, common eCommerce fraud is when a hacker uses stolen credit card information, which then can lead to a chargeback by the cardholder. The best way to protect against this is putting measures in place to verify credit card information before an order can be processed. 

Address Verification System (AVS)

This ensures that the billing address used for the credit card matches the address on file at the credit card company. Hackers don’t always have matching addresses. 

Card Verification Value (CVV)

PCI Compliance rules prevent anyone from storing the CVV security code on credit cards along with its credit card number or owner’s name. This means that an non-matching CVV number with a credit card number is a great indicator of fraud. The hacker won’t have the CVV number unless he/she has the physical card in front of them. While this can still happen, it’s way less likely than an attacker working off card numbers he skimmed online. 

Most payment processing solutions should have features to require both AVS and CVV verification. Be sure to check yours today to see if it’s supported and turned on for your store.

4. Ask Customers to Use Strong Passwords

All users, including your customers, are accustomed to using strong passwords that are long and include capitalization and special characters. However, your customers won’t always follow best practices unless you force them too.

If you don’t already, update your policies to require strong passwords for your customer accounts. While it may be a tad annoying, you can remind them that you’re only prioritizing their security. 

Follow these guidelines for setting up your own password security and standards. 

6. Prevent Chargebacks

While real order disputes will happen, sometimes scammers can find loopholes in your policies and store information to initiate a fraudulent chargeback or just take advantage of you. To protect yourself from disputes and chargebacks, consider updating the following:

• Online tracking to prove a customer received an order if they try to say otherwise
• Clear return policies and require proof of item before issuing refund 
• Accurate product photos and descriptions to reduce “item not as described”
• Trained customer service to handle individual cases properly 

These are easy ways to minimize chargebacks or disputes and their costs. 

7. Get Fraud Prevention Software

To help merchants combat daily fraud issues, there’s a handful of industry-leading software solutions that help you monitor your orders daily for any issues or suspected fraud. 

Since your eCommerce store is always “open” for business, these solutions can save you a lot of time and detect fraud before your team processes the order. And, new tech innovations with machine learning and AI are making these solutions even more sophisticated at spotting trends and patterns for you. 

If you have the order volume to justify it, these solutions can be worth the investment.

• Signifyd
• ClearSale
• NoFraud

Monitor Your Online Orders Daily

Unfortunately, online fraud isn’t going away. So, it’s something you need to take seriously and monitor your orders daily for. If you put these best practices in place though, you’re putting your company one step ahead of scammers and hackers. 

The post 7 Easy Steps to Reduce eCommerce Fraud appeared first on .

To help you choose the right tools, we put together a list of the best eCommerce marketing tools to try for your online brand. 

Choosing the Right eCommerce Marketing Tools for Your Business

As you look into new marketing tools to use, consider the following for your business:

• Marketing goals — Are you more focused on driving traffic, increasing conversions, or upselling current customers? 
• Budget — How much can you invest right now?
• Technical capability — Do you need a user-friendly tool or a robust one that you could hire someone to help with?

Considering your needs upfront will ensure you select a tool that can immediately add value to your marketing efforts. 

1. Search Engine Optimization (SEO)

Any business online should know the basics of Search Engine Optimization, or SEO. It’s the practice of improving both the quantity and quality of web traffic to your site through organic search engine results. Unlike paid ads, you do not pay for this traffic either. 

The main purpose of SEO is for your site to rank high in Google’s (or any search engine) results for the keywords that matter to your business. The higher you rank, the more likely a user will click on your link and land on your site to make a purchase. 

On the first page alone, the first five organic results account for 67.6% of all the clicks. [Zero Limit Web]

When it comes to SEO, don’t overlook that the focus is to drive the RIGHT traffic to your site. If you sell leather purses only, you don’t want to attract customers looking for leather boots instead. 

Overall, SEO is hard work and an essential strategy for your business. You won’t improve overnight,  but it should be viewed as a valuable long term strategy. 

If you’re new to SEO, check out providers like Moz and Neil Patel for introductory guides to SEO.

You can also invest in SEO tools that will help you understand and improve your current SEO strategy: 

• SEMRush
• Moz
• Ubersuggest

2. Social Media

Social media is a must-have for most brands. It’s an important channel to create and foster a dialogue with your customers, whether it’s Facebook, Instagram, or Pinterest. 

An average of 3 hours per day is spent on social networks and messaging. [Globalwebindex]

But, remember that your brand doesn’t need to be on every social media platform. You only need to be where your customers are. If the majority of your customers don’t use Pinterest, then don’t have a profile there. Sometimes less can be more. Only put time and effort into the platforms that will make a difference for your brand. 

These are popular tools to help you manage, schedule, and track your posts across different social channels:

• Hootsuite
• Sprout Social
• Buffer

Beyond marketing, eCommerce platforms like Shopify have also added built-in social media buy buttons that turn these platforms into additional selling channels. Your posts can turn into simple and convenient for customers to make purchases, without even leaving the social channel itself.

3. Email Marketing 

Despite the hype around other channels like social media, email marketing could be the most important marketing tactic for your eCommerce brand. 

Roughly 80% of businesses rely on email as their primary channel for acquisition and retention. [Emsarys]

Why does email work so well? Because it’s built upon trust. A customer gave you their personal information such as an email address. Then, it’s up to you to build a relationship through their inbox that’s engaging and valuable for them. Email marketing can be everything from content sharing and product promotions to your transactional info that includes order info and shipping statuses. Either way, email is an important part of the customer experience with your brand. 

To get started with email marketing, read about tactics to help build your email list and creating email campaigns that convert for eCommerce. 

As you grow your email strategy, here are some of the best tools to help you create, manage, and automate your email marketing: 

• Klaviyo
• Omnisend
• Mailchimp

4. Paid Ads

Many eCommerce brands also turn to paid ads like Google Ads and Facebook Ads to help find and attract new customers. 

If you’re just starting out, ads can be a great way to connect your new brand with users searching for terms related to your products. And, you can use ads to target customers that are ready to buy now. 

Either way, always pay attention to your keywords so you’re only paying for relevant clicks and impressions. You don’t want to waste your money on someone who will never buy from you. 

While usually necessary, ads can be one of your biggest expenses. And, the cost of advertising is also increasing. 

Facebook CPM rates have grown 90 percent year-over-year for marketers. [A.list]

And because of that, many brands strategically try to not rely on ads as their main marketing channel. Instead, they focus on the long term strategy of improving their SEO and word of mouth referrals for new customers These are channels that you have full control over and will likely pay lower overall customer acquisition costs. 

Here are some of the tools to help you managing your paid ads across various platforms: 

• Google Ads
• Facebook Ads
• WordStream – PPC (paid ads) manager

5. Text Message Marketing 

Outside of  email, more brands are experimenting with SMS text messaging as ways to reach and market to customers. The idea is that more shoppers are browsing and shopping on their phones. So, you want to make it easy for them on their favorite devices to shop with you. 

47% of people say they’re likely to opt-in to receive texts from a brand they like. [Privy]

Text message marketing can help turn casual browsers on your site into repeat customers. Your shoppers can opt in to receive texts from you, so you can send shoppers back to abandoned carts or send coupon codes. 

Use text messaging to complement your email marketing efforts with these tools: 

• Privy’s SMS texting
• Omnisend

6. Loyalty Programs

An important part of online selling is retaining customers and motivating them to make multiple purchases with you. And, data shows that it can be cost-effective to market to existing customers over new customers. 

Acquiring a new customer can cost 5x more than retaining an existing customer. And, increasing customer retention by 5% can increase profits forms 25-95%. [OutboundEngine]

Fortunately, there’s all sorts of ways to engage with existing customers so they continue to interact and buy from your brand. You can use strategies like loyalty member programs, referral commissions, and more. 

To help you drive and manage eCommerce loyalty programs, check out tools like: 

• Smile.io
• Yotpo (Formerly Swell Rewards)

7. Analytics / Optimization

Any good marketing program needs to define their key performance metrics and track them. Analytics is your insights into user behavior and understanding the impact of your different marketing tactics. You’ll be answer to questions like: 

• Which marketing channels converts the best
• Which marketing channels have the best ROI
• Where your web traffic comes from (organic, social, or paid ads)
• What web page layouts do users prefer
• What web pages do users spend the most time on 
• How many users abandon their carts

With the right data in your hands, you can make informed decisions about your eCommerce marketing so you know what to improve and how. 

Top analytics tools for eCommerce marketers are:

• Google Analytics — Free web analytics tool to track web traffic and more
• Kissmetrics — Product and marketing analytics for websites and apps
• CrazyEgg — Heatmaps and A/B testing for website optimization
• Hotjar — Heatmaps and behavior analytics tools for optimization 

8. Design

Many brands need access to easy-to-use design tools to support their marketing efforts.  Fresh and modern graphic designs can help attract new customers and prove that you’re a trustworthy brand. You can use design on your website, emails, social media, and paid ads. 

Here’s some user-friendly tools to help elevate your graphic designs and brand image: 

• Canva
• Adobe Express

Aligning Your Marketing with Your Conversion Funnel

As you develop your marketing strategy for your online business, you should consider how each of your tactics and tools help you move your customers through your conversion funnel. 

What’s the conversion funnel? A conversion funnel represents the steps a potential customer takes to find your brand, make a purchase, and even refer you to their friend. Funnels are often broken down into these categories: 

• Top of the funnel (TOFU) is for generating awareness for your brand and products
• Middle of the funnel (MOFU) is the tactics you use to increase conversions 
• Bottom of the funnel (BOFU) is how you generate customers and ensure they’re happy

Here’s an example marketing funnel from PixelMe that demonstrates how different marketing tactics are used according to where customers are at in the funnel, or their purchasing journey. 

Thinking about your customer’s actions in relation to these steps allows you to map and match your marketing efforts to your customer’s current needs. In the long run, approaching your marketing with this mindset allows you to become more intentional. You’ll create more targeted marketing content that has a purpose whether it’s to foster brand awareness or convince someone to buy right now. 

How to Improve Your eCommerce Marketing 

As an eCommerce marketer, you’ll always experiment with new tactics and tools to grow your business. Check how some of other helpful resources to continue to improve your marketing performance:

• eCommerce Marketing: The Five People Your Team Needs
• Content First Approach Drives eCommerce Conversions
• How an eCommerce Content Marketing Strategy Can Increase Sales
• Your eCommerce Content Marketing Strategy Guide [Infographic]

The post 8 eCommerce Marketing Tools to Try appeared first on .

In 2019, Amazon reported that they delivered an estimated 3.5 billion packages globally. And, they expect to deliver 80% of their own packages by 2021. 

In some ways, Amazon has been making more headlines for their renowned fulfillment network over the marketplace itself. They continue to innovate to ensure packages end up on doorsteps as quickly as possible. 

As an Amazon seller, you might be asking yourself, “Should I be using FBA?”

This post explains how FBA works and what you need to consider before joining the program. Keep in mind, it’s not always the answer for everyone!

How Does FBA Work?

To keep it simple, FBA works like this: you sell it, then Amazon ships it.

The detailed process of Amazon’s renowned fulfillment process is:

1. You send your items to Amazon to be stored in their fulfillment centers.
2. After Amazon receives your inventory, you can monitor it through their tracking system.
3. A customer orders your items from Amazon (or another eCommerce platform).
4. Amazon picks and packs the sold items.
5. Amazon ships your items by method chosen by the customer and provides them tracking information.
6. They provide customer service and return management for items.

FBA is not just for orders placed on Amazon.com. You can also use it to fulfill orders from your own eCommerce site. For all your sales channels, Amazon stores your single composite inventory in its fulfillment centers and fulfills orders as they are placed.

As expected, Amazon charges different fees for use of their services. We’ll go into detail below about how to calculate your costs. 

Despite these fees, why would a seller want to use FBA?

Benefits of Using Fulfillment by Amazon (FBA)

Fulfillment is one of the toughest challenges for online sellers. There’s a lot of moving parts to consider and inefficiencies can lead to high costs and problems like shipping to the wrong address. 

Unfortunately, sellers don’t have much room to make mistakes either. 84% of consumers say that they won’t return to a brand after just one poor delivery experience.

That’s why many Amazon sellers turn to a program like FBA to handle fulfillment. You can meet customer expectations and lower your costs, among other key benefits. 

Win the Amazon Buy Box 

All sellers strive to win the Amazon Buy Box, which is the coveted selling spot guaranteed to win you more sales. It’s the first touchpoint a customer has with a product they’re looking for. 

It’s well-known that no one but Amazon knows the exact algorithm used to choose who wins the buy box. However, it is known that free and fast shipping is a deciding factor. It’s suggested that Amazon prefers to recommend sellers using Amazon FBA because they know that on-time delivery is guaranteed. 

Once you have the Amazon Buy Box, you don’t want to lose it to a stockout. Payability gets Amazon sellers paid the next-day, every day for their sales with their Instant Access program. They also offer Instant Advance where you can get 75-150% of your monthly Amazon sales upfront. Payability works well alongside or in the place of other financing options such as Amazon Lending. Plus, there are no credit checks and sellers can get approved in as little as 24 hours.

Earn Customer Trust 

With FBA, you’ll get your products in front of more customers who are looking for free shipping.  The “Fulfilled by Amazon Prime” symbol represents guaranteed delivery and its something that shoppers trust. 

How often have you chosen a product on Amazon over another because it offered Prime Free One-Day delivery? 

Lower Your Shipping Cost (Keep More Profit)

There’s a lot of factors that go into the price of shipping of an item. You have to consider the package’s DIM weight, size, destination, carrier agreements, fuel surcharges, and more. Even for small packages, these factors can add up. 

And despite these costs, customers still expect fast and free shipping. This leads to sellers offering free shipping, even when they can’t afford it. If you’re not careful, shipping costs can quickly shrink your margins, meaning you make less money. 

That’s why many sellers outsource to a program like FBA. The overall fees you pay them can be less expensive than trying to manage everything on your own. After all, you’re not a logistics expert. 

Customer Service

FBA users also have access to Amazon’s acclaimed customer service. Your customers can contact customer support via phone or email both day and night. You’ll know they’re receiving top notch customer service, and you won’t have to spend hours providing it. Instead, you can focus on managing other parts of your operations.

Return Management

When using FBA, your customers can process returns through Amazon’s Online Returns Center too. This allows them to conveniently return items when needed. You won’t have to worry about the difficulty of reverse logistics anymore. Returns are often an overwhelming task for online sellers, but important to an overall successful online experience.

Studies show that of the 60% of online shoppers that make at least one return or exchange per year, 95% will make another purchase if the return experience is positive.

Be aware that you are charged for a returns processing fee for this service.

Using FBA Beyond Amazon

FBA isn’t just for items sold on Amazon either. You can also use FBA for your own eCommerce site. Your customers can enjoy flexible shipping options like one-day, two-day, and standard delivery times.

Handling fulfillment across different channels can be difficult and expensive. Letting Amazon handle it for you ensures you’re giving customers the best experience possible. Whether you’re already selling on Amazon or not, you can keep your ordering and shipping process consistent across your channels.

Overall Customer Experience

Overall, FBA can significantly improve your customer experience. You’ll win them over by giving them multiple shipping options, fast delivery as promised, an easy return process, and trustworthy customer service from Amazon.

Seeing the “Fulfillment by Amazon Prime” logo next to your items can go a long way with customers.

Understanding the Costs of Using Fulfillment by Amazon (FBA)

While there are benefits to using FBA, you must consider the costs of this service to determine if it’s right for your business. Amazon charges its fees on a per-unit basis.

How to Calculate Your FBA Fees for Amazon.com Orders

To determine your costs, you take these steps: 

• Select whether your product is apparel or non-apparel
• Determine its product size tier (standard or oversize)
• Calculate its shipping weight

Here’s how you would calculate the fees for a book (based on 2020 FBA fulfillment fees): 

First, determine the item weight and dimension. In this case, let’s use: 

• Item weight: 10 oz
• Dimensions: 5.5 x 0.5 x 7.25 

Now, we can use Amazon’s chart for FBA fulfillment fees to calculate an estimate for the fees: 

1. Book is a non-apparel item
2. It’s product size tier is “small standard”
3. Shipping weight is 10 oz or less

This means that the fulfillment fee is $2.50. For comparison, a large standard size item over 3 lbs would cost $5.80.

Then, you add your monthly inventory storage fees. Standard-size inventory storage fees are $0.75 per cubic foot and increase to $2.40 per cubic foot from October to December. 

How to Calculate Your FBA Fees Multi-channel Orders

As mentioned, Amazon FBA can be used to ship products from your own website or sales channels. However, costs will be different than products sold on Amazon.com. 

Using the same book example from above, your fulfillment fee would be $5.69 (versus $2.50) to offer expedited, 2-day free shipping. It would cost $12.80 to offer priority next-day shipping. 

Additional FBA Costs to Consider

Fulfillment fees and storage costs are just your two main costs. There are additional fees for the following scenarios: 

• Labeling — Amazon applies barcode labels on a per-item fee
• Prep Service — Amazon preps your inventory for storage on a per-item fee
• Repackaging — Amazon repackages your returned items to be resold
• Long-term inventory storage — When products are stored in an Amazon warehouse longer than 365 days
• Unplanned services — If your inventory arrives at warehouse without proper preparation or labeling 
• Returns processing — Whenever a customer returns the product
• Removal order — If you ask Amazon to return or dispose of your inventory in a their fulfillment center
• Oversize items — Have special handling fees per shipment

As you can see, FBA costs can vary depending on your business and the type of items you sell. You will face additional fees if you have very large items, inventory with long-shelf lives, or want to use FBA just during the holiday season.

Resources for Estimating your Amazon FBA Fees

Because of the complexity in calculating and understanding your costs, Amazon does offer tools and resources to help you preview your fees as best as possible. Here’s the top pages to view: 

• Fulfillment Fees for FBA Orders
• Fulfillment Fees for Multi-channel Orders
• Monthly Inventory Storage Fees
• Full list of Fees

You can also turn to different calculators like Amazon’s own Fulfillment by Amazon Revenue Calculator (requires a professional seller account to use). This tool is great if you only have a few products to compare that you already sell on Amazon. It’s also possible to look for free FBA bulk calculators to check prices for lots of items at once.

Keep in mind that Amazon changes their fees almost yearly. You want to make sure that you’re always up to date and evaluate the costs. The latest 2020 Fulfillment by Amazon Fee changes are effective February 18, 2020.

Disadvantages of Using Fulfillment by Amazon

Even though Amazon is one of the most advanced fulfillment processes in the world, their FBA service still has a few, sometimes unrealized, disadvantages for sellers. Make sure you consider these difficulties before signing up for the service.

Commingling Merchandise

Amazon commingling combines qualifying products from different sellers for processing and shipment by Amazon. As a seller, it saves you time and effort you’d otherwise spend applying FBA approved labels to each of your items or paying Amazon to do it for you. It also allows Amazon to ship products from whichever of their nationwide facilities can get the item to the buyer the fastest, which is how they’re so efficient. 

Instead of providing labels, you just use an item’s barcode that pools your products with other sellers based on the product ID. Amazon can then strategically store and ship items of the same product ID by the location that ensures the fastest-shipping time.

For example, a buyer in Ohio selects a product from a seller in Colorado. If Amazon’s system finds an identical product offered by a seller in Indiana, whose product is in a closer fulfillment center, they’ll ship the Indiana seller’s item to the buyer. The Colorado seller still gets the sale of course. 

Since all the items are the same, what’s the potential problem?

Product quality control consequently becomes very difficult for sellers. Scenarios have been cited where sellers are forced to close shops, receive negative reviews, or even face legal actions when counterfeited or damaged items are received by customers in lieu of the genuine item the seller sent Amazon.

It wasn’t the seller’s fault, but they still faced the harsh consequences. To learn more about the process of commingling, read about the pros and cons of commingling for Amazon merchants.

Be aware: By default, your seller account is set to use the manufacturer barcode to track your inventory. So, your items will be commingled with items of the same products from other sellers who also use manufacturer barcodes. You must manually change your Amazon barcode preference if you don’t want to commingle your products.

Sales Tax Compliance

Another voiced issue of FBA is sales tax compliance. As a seller, you’re required to collect sales tax in states where you have sales tax nexus, which is when your business is tied to a state like storing inventory for sale. This means sellers are on the hook for sales tax in states where Amazon fulfillment centers store their inventory. 

Before, Amazon wasn’t always transparent with sellers of which warehouses their inventory was located. However, you can now find this information in your Amazon Fulfillment Reports in your seller account. It’s under Reports > Fulfillment > Inventory Event Detail. 

In the last few years, Amazon also now collects sales tax on the sellers’ behalf in most states with an Amazon fulfillment center. 

However, sellers still need to make sure they’re sales tax compliant in states that do not require Amazon to collect sales tax on a sellers’ behalf. You can check each state here and what it means for your Amazon Business.

Long-Term Storage Fees and Managing Inventory

As FBA grows, space within fulfillment centers becomes more valuable. It’s no surprise then that Amazon charges you more if your inventory sits longer than 365 days on their shelves or during peak seasons like holidays. 

If your items have long-shelf lives or if you usually have stale inventory, you’re paying a pretty penny for rent to just store items, especially if it’s not going to sell. It’s also hard to monitor when this inventory becomes too much of a burden on your bottom line. If you have thousands of items, it’s difficult to keep track of how much inventory you have and what you need to cut back on.

Preparing Items for Shipment

While Amazon takes care of the entire fulfillment process for you, they only do so once they have the inventory in their hands. Sellers can struggle with preparing and shipping their items to Amazon’s fulfillment centers.

You must forecast the items you think you’re going to sell and then must properly label and ship them to Amazon. It takes more time, planning, and costs to ship your products to the right warehouses. It’s even more difficult if you’re sending out thousands of products.

Alternatives to Amazon FBA

If you’re not sold on using FBA, there are alternatives worth taking the time to compare.

For an in-depth analysis of FBA alternatives, check out our article 3rd Party Fulfillment Services: Fulfillment by Amazon (FBA) Alternatives.

You can also consider solutions that automate different parts of your fulfillment process. By integrating your eCommerce, marketplaces, ERP, and 3PL providers like FBA, you can automate processes like order management, drop shipping, and returns management.

Is FBA Worth the Cost for Your Business?

Just because Fulfillment by Amazon is used by a lot of third-party sellers, it doesn’t mean it’s right for your business.

You must evaluate its main benefits such as 2-day shipping and easy returns versus its service fees. Sellers also must factor in some cited issues with commingling and sales tax compliance.

For some, it might be a tough choice whether to use FBA. If you do decide that FBA is right for you, learn more about how to integrate FBA more tightly with your other retail systems like your ERP, POS, and web stores.

The post Are Fulfillment by Amazon’s (FBA) Fees Worth the Cost? appeared first on .

Needing an easier way to process online orders, many sellers turn to shipping software solutions to help with daily tasks like coordinating carriers, printing labels, and managing their returns process. 

When Do You Need Shipping Software? 

These are all typical challenges that online sellers face when trying to keep with customer demand. Are you experiencing any of the following? 

• Growth: Can’t keep up with increase of online orders and getting them out the door
• High Costs: High shipping costs for you and your customers 
• Slow Delivery Times: Shipping processing is slow and taking too much time 
• Mistakes: Making mistakes like shipping to the wrong address 

All the signs point to that your business could use shipping software to speed up your processes and increase your sales. 

Advantages of Shipping Software

The main advantages of shipping solutions are:

• Obtain significant discounts from shipping carriers like USPS and UPS
• Import all online orders from different sales channels to a central location
• Speed up delivery with automated workflows to select carriers, print labels, and more
• Manage multiple carriers so you always ship with the best rate
• Handle returns 
• Keep track of inventory to avoid stockouts
• Customer marketing like shipping notification emails
• Analytics and reporting 

Comparing the Best Shipping Software for eCommerce

While there are many solutions available, we narrowed down our list to these top shipping solutions:

– ShipStation

– Shippo

– EasyShip

– ShippingEasy

– ShipWorks

Here’s a quick overview of how they stack up against one another. 

Software	Free Trial	Starting Price	Integrations	Customer Marketing	Support**	Mobile App
ShipStation	30-day	$9/mo for 50 shipments	150+
Shippo	No*	5 cents / label	35+			✘
EasyShip	30-day	Free for 100 shipments / mo	40+			✘
ShippingEasy	30-day	Free up to 50 shipments / mo	65+	(Add-on)		✘
ShipWorks	30-day	$49 / mo for 1,500 shipments	90+			✘
*Due to COVID-19, Shippo is offering their product free through 12/31/2020.
**Support: = email = chat = phone

As you compare solutions, it can be difficult to decipher which one is best. Many companies have a long list of features. You have to determine which features are must-have or just “filler.”

Fortunately, all these options offer free trials so you can take a test-run of the software before you commit to it. 

Top 5 Shipping Software for eCommerce

ShipStation

Best for U.S. Small to Mid-size Businesses

4.7 / 5 stars (698 reviews on Capterra)

Owned by Stamps.com, ShipStation is a leading shipping solution for eCommerce. They’re known for their user-friendly interface that allows users to import, organize, process, and ship from all their sales channels. You can access ShipStation from any web browser, and they’re the only provider with a mobile app. 

ShipStation is also known for their extensive integrations (150+ sales channels), 30+ carrier discounts, and sophisticated automation features for workflows and saved filters. With ShipStation, you can handle just about any aspect of your shipping needs like creating orders, printing labels, comparing rates, handling returns, and customizing your customer experience.

Learn more here.

If you need to integrate ShipStation with an ERP or other backend systems, you’ll work with a partner like nChannel. Learn more about how nChannel can sync your shipping data from ShipStation with your existing systems. 

Shippo 

Best Multi-carrier Shipping Software for Growing Businesses

4.8 / 5 stars (446 reviews on Capterra)

Founded in 2013, Shippo has over 10,000 customers who send millions of packages to and from 196 countries with their platform. Their company began as primarily a shipping API, before adding their own app and dashboard. Today, they’re a partner for eBay’s Guaranteed Delivery Program, and also integrate with a handful of the top online sales channels.

With Shippo, sellers can generate labels, validate shipping addresses, compare multiple carriers, and ship internationally. They also allow you to provide tracking updates for your customers. 

Due to COVID-19, Shippo is currently waiving all their software fees and offering their product free through 12/31/2020. 

EasyShip

Best Global Shipping Software

4.4 / 5 stars (102 reviews on Capterra)

Founded in 2014, Easyship allows online sellers to compare services, print labels, and monitor tracking and shipments. Sellers can compare more than 250+ shipping options and receive shipping discounts up to 70%. If you’re looking to scale globally, EasyShip can deliver to 220+ countries and handles local custom regulations and duty and tax charges for you. They also have a global fulfillment network that you can leverage. 

Also, EasyShip offers their Real-Time Shipping Rates plug-on, giving you the ability to show customers different shipping prices at checkout, so they can choose the best option for themselves. Easyship claims that their customers can increase conversions by 3x and revenue by 5x. 

View their full feature list. 

ShippingEasy 

Best for Small Businesses

4.8 / 5 stars (1053 reviews on Capterra)

Founded in 2011, ShippingEasy is a cloud-based shipping provider that allows online sellers to accurately and quickly ship their orders. You can sync, manage, process, and print shipping labels for your eCommerce and marketplace channels like Shopify, Amazon, eBay, and Etsy. 

Even on their free plan, sellers receive discounted USPS retail rates. All paid plans get access to USPS Commercial Rate and discounted UPS rates. 

Beyond printing labels, ShippingEasy also gives sellers the ability to create email marketing campaigns that include: tracking numbers, gaethering reviews, abandoned cart emails, and more. 

See their full list of features and pricing plans. 

ShipWorks 

Best for Mid-size Businesses and Warehouses

4.4 / 5 stars (30 reviews on Capterra)

Founded in 2000, ShipWorks is an ideal shipping solution for growing eCommerce businesses or warehouses. You can import orders from any of your sales channels or backend systems like an ERP/WMS and manage them from a centralized location. ShipWorks offers over 90 different integrations into their platform. They also have an Integration API so a developer could connect to any database or platform. 

ShipWorks stands out from the rest of their competitors with their customization of their workflows and templates. They also offer extensive shipping options including air, container, freight, ground, and parcel. 

As a veteran in the shipping space, ShipWorks is a window-based system that can be installed on multiple PCs. 

How to Choose the Best Shipping Platform 

Picking the best shipping platform for your business comes down to your unique needs. For each solution, pay attention to:

• Price for shipment volume
• What carriers you use and the discounts available
• Integrations into your existing systems 

Keep reading about how to improve your shipping processes: 

• How to Implement Same-day Shipping for eCommerce
• How to Ship Your Products
• Using Online Order Fulfillment to Increase Sales

The post Best Shipping Software for eCommerce Sellers appeared first on .

As your sales increase, your manual order processing can begin to break down. You take too long to enter data, you’re prone to critical errors like shipping to the wrong address, and you can’t easily track orders for customers.  

At this point, your online business is ready for an order management system (OMS), or software built to help you centralize your order processing across sales channels and fulfillment methods. It automates your workflows and helps you control your customer experience. 

However, there’s no shortage of order management software available today. To help you narrow down your choices, we compare the top 5 order management systems for you.

Tell-Tale Signs You Need an Order Management System (OMS)

Before you start researching software options, you should first identify if your need is big enough for an OMS. In other words, is implementing a new system worth your time and money? 

Do you struggle with any of the following? 

1. Processing more than 10 orders a day
2. Managing orders from multiple channels like a webstore, marketplace, and brick-and-mortar
3. Fulfilling orders with multiple suppliers or 3PL
4. Making critical errors like shipping the wrong product or to the wrong address 
5. Processing time takes days causing slower delivery times 
6. No visibility or reporting into current processes

These signs all point to the need of a better way to process your orders for fulfillment. They can also help you identify your weakest point in your process to prioritize first. 

How to Calculate ROI of an Order Management System

Another way to determine whether to invest in a new OMS is to calculate your return. You can determine your ROI by considering the following: 

• How much employee time will the new software save you by eliminating manual tasks?
• How many processing errors will you avoid?
• What else could you be doing instead of only processing orders?
• Can you cancel and replace a current software system?

For example, let’s say you have one employee dedicated to manually processing orders. With your new system in place, can you cut their time in half? Then, you can calculate your ROI by multiplying their saved time by their hourly wage. How much time and money do you save over a 12 month period? Are your savings more than your investment?

Once you decide that you’re ready for a new system, you can start researching how an OMS helps and which system is best for your business. 

What Does an Order Management System Do?

An order management system helps improve your order-to-cash cycle (OTC), which is how your business receives, processes, manages, and completes customer orders. This includes everything from collecting payment, shipping the items, creating invoices, and reporting. 

The order to cash cycle is critical to the success of your online business. It impacts your bottom line and the customer experience.  

This also means that order management systems provide a wide-range of functionality that help manage the people, processes, and integrations involved with completing an order from any sales channels:  

• Payment 
• Customers 
• Inventory, or stock levels 
• Suppliers or 3PLs
• Returns and refunds
• Invoices
• Pick, packing, and shipping 
• Financial integration
• Reporting and analytics 

It’s easy to see how an OMS can help with most of your backend processes. 

But, can’t I process orders in my ecommerce platform or ERP? While there’s overlap in functionality between an OMS and your eCommerce/ERP system, an OMS typically works alongside these systems. It’ll be your centralized platform to perform and track order processing across all sales channels, and then sync key information as needed into other systems. 

In fact, experts like the IHL group view order management systems as the center point for any sellers trying to achieve unified commerce. An OMS becomes the central platform to manage all of your critical processes for both online and offline sales channels. 

The Best Order Management Systems

While there are many solutions available, we narrowed down our list to these top order management systems. 

• Quickbooks Commerce
• Brightpearl
• Skubana
• Freestyle Solutions
• Odoo

How to Choose an Order Management System

When looking into order management systems, it can be difficult to decipher what’s actually important to you. Many companies have a long list of features. You have to determine which features are must-have or just “filler.”

Here are main areas to focus on when choosing your order management system:

• Price: Features you get relative to investment and any tiered pricing by order volume or users 
• Shipping: Route orders based on warehouse or customer location 
• Inventory: Update inventory levels across systems and sales channels 
• Customers: Track orders for customers and update accounts 
• Financial: Help with returns and refunds 
• Integrations: The ability to sync data with your other platforms such as sales channels, fulfillment partners, financial systems, and POS. 
• Offline Capabilities: Help with Buy Online, Pick Up In Store and/or Endless Aisle processes 
• Reporting: Visibility into your process to track performance or alert of any issues

These features provide a guideline when comparing your options.Of course, be diligent before committing to one platform. It’s always frustrating to implement the wrong system for your business, especially for something as critical as an OMS.  

Comparison of the Top 5 Order Management Systems

Quickbooks Commerce

Best for Small Businesses on Quickbooks Online

Formerly TradeGecko, Quickbooks Commerce is a centralized platform to manage orders for small businesses. The catch? Right now, Quickbooks Commerce is only available to new Quickbooks Online customers. But, they are working on expanding to the rest of the users. 

If you’re a Quickbooks Online userm, Quickbook Commerce is an affordable option —  pricing plans start at $20/month for the first 12 months. With it, you’ll be able to list products across sales, update inventory levels, set up automated shipping workflows, and integrate your financial data from Quickbooks Online. 

Saying that, Quickbooks Commerce is still best for small businesses only. They don’t support sellers selling over 30K orders a month, more than 20K SKUS, or inventory items with individual serial numbers. 

Brightpearl

Best for Medium to Enterprise eCommerce Businesses 

Brightpearl is an all-in-one operations platform. It integrates with popular sales channels like BigCommerce, Shopify, Amazon, and eBay. They also offer key functionality like: automated order fulfillment, returns management, multiple sales channels, and POS integration for Buy Online, Pick Up In Store. 

With ERP-grade functionality, Brightpearl is a system that scales with your business as you go from 1,000 orders a month to 30,000. This also means that Brightpearl can blur the lines of an ERP and OMS, and can better serve medium to enterprise businesses with their range of functionality. 

Sellers will need to contact Brightpearl to receive pricing information. 

Skubana

Best for Small and Growing Businesses 

Skubana is also an all-in-one solution that covers more than your basic OMS functionality including inventory management, sales channel integration, order tracking, and comprehensive reporting and analytics. 

Often compared to Brightpearl, Skubana can fall short in some features and options. It’s also only available as a web-based platform. For those reasons, Skubana usually better serves small and growing businesses. 

Freestyle Solutions

Best for Small and Mid-Size Businesses 

Formerly Dydacomp in 2015, Freestyle Solutions helps growing businesses centralize and streamline their order processing. You can sync your inventory levels across your channels, integrate the shipping process like drop shipping, manage multiple warehouses, and make informed decisions with built-in reporting. 

Users can take advantage of Freestyle Solutions’s system without being charged by number of users, channels, or SKUs.

Odoo — Best Open Source OMS

With over 5 million users ranging from startups to enterprises, Odoo is an open source platform that offers a suite of business apps that include everything from eCommerce to CRM and inventory management. They offer 30 main apps built by Odoo and another 1600+ apps developed by their own active community. 

Odoo is a different solution on our list because it’s open source, meaning that end users can download and customize the code of the platform. In other words, you have full control to configure the software to meet your unique needs. This also means you can easily integrate Odoo into other systems as you need like eCommerce, ERP, or shipping software. 

While they offer some basic inventory and warehouse functionality pre-built, you can easily modify and scale the software as your processes evolve. In some cases, open source software is both cost-effective and flexible for OMS functionality. 

See Odoo’s a la carte pricing plans. 

What To Do Next: Integrate Your OMS 

Choosing an order management system is the first step in simplifying your order and inventory management. This list of systems can help you narrow down your research on solutions that can work for your business.

No matter what system you choose though, integration into your sales channels and other fulfillment systems is key. After all, you want your OMS to become the centralized place where you process and track all your orders. Learn more about how nChannel can help integrate your retail systems. 

Stay informed on eCommerce best practices for multichannel retailers, subscribe to Multichannel Insights (what you’re reading right now) to get our articles sent straight to your inbox!

The post Top 5 Order Management Systems appeared first on .

When you sell on Amazon, you have the ability to reach millions and millions of consumers. The exposure means you can make A LOT of money, but because of Amazon’s payment delay, you don’t actually get that money for at least two weeks. 

It’s no surprise then that Amazon sellers often seek outside financing to help cover these cash flow gaps and make investments in inventory, marketing, and other growth areas.

As you may know from personal experience, getting financing from a bank is not ideal as an Amazon seller. After all, your financing needs are likely immediate — for example, if a supplier offers a flash sale on inventory, you’re going to need funds right away so you can take advantage. With banks, the application process alone can take several weeks. Not to mention, approval rates for small and online businesses are low.

Fortunately, there are other financing options to consider as an Amazon seller. Here, we break down Amazon Lending, Payability, and other alternatives so you can find a solution that will get you the cash you need, when you need it.

Amazon Lending: What It Is & How It Works

Since 2011, Amazon has been providing financing for their top-tier sellers. With Amazon Lending, sellers can get a short-term loan up to $750,000 with loan terms up to 12 months. 

Initially, Amazon loans were restricted, meaning sellers could only use the funds to invest in inventory to sell on Amazon. Now, it looks like sellers can also invest in new products or promotions. While it’s not specified, these additional use-cases are likely restricted to new products to sell on Amazon and advertising campaigns on Amazon, such as Amazon Sponsored Products.

The program remains invitation-only, so if you’re eligible to apply, you’ll get an offer from Amazon via email and/or in Seller Central. But getting an invitation isn’t a loan guarantee — you still have to go through their application process and, in some cases, provide additional documentation to prove your financial and customer service strengths.

Here’s more about how Amazon Lending works:

• Funding Amount: Between $1,000 to $750,000. 
• Application Process/Approval Time: There is a simple online application process. You may need to submit information such as proof of sales, A-z Guarantee claims, and more. Typically, you’ll get a decision within five business days, unless additional processing time is needed for your application.
• Eligibility: While Amazon’s minimum criteria is not online, eligibility generally includes the following: Amazon businesses who maintain excellent customer metrics, show a steady increase of sales, and have sold at least $10,000 in the past 12 months. If you meet these requirements and Amazon sees that you’re eligible, you’ll get an invitation to apply via email and/or Seller Central.
• Interest: Varies by account. According to seller feedback in various online forums, APRs range from 3% to 16.9%.
• Terms: Amazon’s short-term loans have monthly auto-payments and repayment terms up to 12 months. Your actual payments are deducted from each Amazon payout that follows your loan payment due date. If there are insufficient funds in your disbursement, your outstanding loan balance will be deducted from the next one. 
• Origination Fees: No
• Prepayment Penalty: No
• Early Repayment Benefits: Sellers pay interest for as long as the Amazon loan remains outstanding. If you pay back early, your interest due will be prorated on the remaining balance. 
• Credit Check: No
• Accelerated Daily Payout Option: No
• Multichannel Funding Options: No 
• Customer Support Team: No, the entire process from offer to payback is fully automated. 

Amazon recently partnered with Marcus by Goldman Sachs to offer the Marcus Business Line of Credit to U.S.-based Amazon sellers. According to an announcement from Amazon, “The Marcus Business Line of Credit offers competitive, fixed interest rates and provides Amazon sellers with the flexibility to request funds as needed, subject to approval.” Similar to Amazon loans, the Marcus Business Line of Credit is invite-only. If you’re eligible, you’ll see an offer in Seller Central.

At the end of the day, Amazon Lending and the Marcus Business Line of Credit can be convenient options for top-tier sellers who only sell on Amazon. Be on the lookout for an offer in Seller Central — and keep in mind that offers are valid for 30 days. 

Instant Advance by Payability: What It Is & How It Works

Payability, a financing company for marketplace sellers, offers a variety of funding options for Amazon sellers as well as sellers who do business on other or multiple eCommerce channels. With Instant Advance, you could get up to $250,000 in as fast as 24 hours — all without a single credit check or compounding interest payment. 

Payability is not a loan company, but a short duration purchase of future receivables. They base all their funding decisions on account health and sales performance — not on credit. And, they allow sellers to connect their entire eCommerce portfolio, so you can show the full picture of your sales history across every marketplace and platform you might use. 

Here’s more about how Instant Advance by Payability works:

• Funding Amount: Up to $250,000 (actual amount is typically 75% – 150% of one month’s worth of total sales revenue).
• Application Process/Approval Time: The application process is simple and only takes around 10 minutes to complete. Just fill out some basic information, and connect your Amazon store and any other channels you sell on. You could get a decision and funding in as fast as 24 hours.
• Eligibility: Instant Advance minimum requirements include 9 months of selling history and an average of $10,000/month in sales.  
• Interest: As we mentioned, Payability is not a loan company, so there is no interest. Instead, Payability charges a fixed flat fee, which starts at 0.50% per week. 
• Terms: As you sell, you’ll remit a fixed percentage of your sales to Payability until the total amount owed is paid back.
• Origination Fees: No
• Prepayment Penalty: No
• Early Repayment Benefits: Sellers receive a fee rebate for every week the advance is paid back early. 
• Credit Check: No
• Accelerated Daily Payout Option: Yes, see Instant Access by Payability. To qualify, you must have at least 3 months of Amazon selling history and average monthly sales of $2,000.
• Multichannel Funding Options: Yes, in addition to Amazon.com, Payability also funds businesses that sell on Walmart, Shopify, Tophatter, Newegg, eBay, and more. Decisions are based on account health and sales performance.
• Customer Support Team: Payability customers get to talk to real people the whole way through. Not only will you get to discuss your offer with a sales representative, Payability also has a 100% U.S.-based customer service team that you can speak to throughout the entire funding process. They are available from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m. EST. Payability customers often mention how much they appreciate speaking to real people and getting real customer support throughout their entire funding journey. 

Payability’s other financing solution — Instant Access gives sellers next-day access to their payouts. With Instant Access, you could get paid the next day, every day on your marketplace sales on marketplaces that pay on terms (i.e. Amazon every 14+ days). You can learn more about how Amazon payout and unavailable balances actually work here. 

Using Payability & Amazon Lending Together

Amazon determines how much they’ll lend to you and there is little room for negotiation. So, if you’re approved for a loan, but it’s not enough for the particular investment you have in mind, you can supplement the amount with Payability’s Instant Advance and/or opt for Instant Access to boost your cash flow with daily, real-time payouts. You could also use Payability’s products together, separately, or alongside Amazon Lending. It really depends on your particular needs. 

Other Alternatives

There are a variety of other financing options that you can consider as well. Here are a few:

• Square Capital & Stripe Capital: Similar to Amazon Lending, Square Capital and Stripe Capital work on an invite-only basis for businesses that use their respective platforms. They evaluate your account health to determine eligibility and then offer simple online application processes with funding in as fast as 24 hours. Repayments are made automatically and deducted as a percentage of your daily sales.
• Fundbox: Fundbox offers a revolving line of credit and net terms for your customers. To qualify, you need at least $50,000 in annual revenue, three months of invoicing history and a business bank account. Fundbox does pull your credit and you need a FICO score of at least 500.
• Credit Cards: If you’re in a pinch, credit cards could help you cover a specific investment, but keep in mind that if you’re not able to pay your balance in time, you could be responsible for hefty, compounding interest payments.

Which solution is right for your business?

At the end of the day, sellers like you have access to a variety of financing solutions, so you can boost cash flow and invest in other growth opportunities. To figure out which solution is right for you, consider these variables:

• Number of channels you sell on
• Amount of money you need
• When you need funds
• The state of your cash flow

From there, you’ll be able to determine which financing partner will most effectively take your business to the next level. In the meantime, visit Payability.com to see how thousands of eCommerce businesses use Instant Advance and Instant Access to grow their businesses on Amazon and other eCommerce sites.

About the Author

Victoria Sullivan is a Marketing Manager at Payability. She has over eight years of social media, copywriting and marketing experience. Prior to joining the Payability team, Victoria developed social media content and strategies for top technology brands such as Skype and Samsung. She holds a degree in Advertising from Syracuse University’s S.I. Newhouse School of Public Communications. She can often be found in a yoga class or working on her fashion blog.

The post Amazon Lending and Amazon Lending Alternatives appeared first on .

You can attest to the fact that e-commerce and online shopping has become the norm in recent days. With about 600 million orders being mailed each day into the U.S alone.

Without much ado, anyone can make a purchase online and have it shipped right to the comfort of their home without having to move an inch. Unfortunately, as with most recent improvements, this upsurge has also taken its toll on the environment.

While environmental consequences are almost inevitable, e-commerce businesses can take steps into ensuring that they fulfill their customers’ orders while ensuring that their processes are also environmentally friendly—for Arka, sustainable packaging and shipping is the hallmark of their operations.

With more people becoming conscious of the environmental impact of our daily activities, businesses need to find a way to fulfill their social responsibility by adopting sustainable practices in their operations.

6 Ways to Make Your Shipping More Environmentally-Friendly

We’ve listed below, six environmentally business-friendly practices that online businesses can employ in packaging, shipping, and fulfilling their orders:

1. Go For Smaller Boxes

There’s no reason why smaller items should be shipped in larger boxes. As much as possible, pack tightly as well. This will ensure that you aren’t just shipping air. It will also ensure that more items can fit and be transported at once.

Asides the fact that it makes no sense to have empty spaces in your shipping box, large boxes take the extra space that could have been utilized in delivery vehicles, thereby wasting fuel.

Also, small boxes generally cost less. And so, going for a larger box when it’s not needed is a way to unnecessarily spike up cost.

Arka, a leading packaging expert in the industry, advises business owners to reduce their packaging size in order to minimize cost and environmental waste. They also help e-commerce businesses achieve this by offering them packaging services.

2. Ship by Sea

Freight shipping leads to the emission of greenhouse gases. While that is the case most times, irrespective of whether you ship by air or sea, it’s also true that shipping by sea can cut down on cost. Not only that, but it’s also generally better for the environment.

3. Offer Carbon-Neutral Shipping By Offsetting Emission

By buying carbon offsets, you get to remedy your involvement in carbon emission by investing in clean technology and renewable energy.

While it’s not entirely possible to wipe out carbon emission as a result of business operations, it’s worth making an effort to either offset or reduce to the barest minimum

Offsetting emissions that comes from fulfilling orders does not entirely cancel out the harmful effects on the environment. Still, it at least tries to remedy the consequences which inevitably saves the environment a great deal.

4. Fixing Your Returns Process

Many times, businesses only plan for only forward shipment and do not put any plans in place for reverse shipment. This consideration is even more important when online businesses are involved.

This is because, with about 20% of goods being returned, e-commerce businesses experience a higher return rate than their brick-and-mortar stores counterpart, which have only an 8-10% rate of return.

Setting up a system for the returns process otherwise known as reverse logistics or will save you the stress in administering changes in case there’s a return, repair, recall, or a need for refurbishment.

Failure to provide an easy and effortless returns process can be damaging to your business and brand. On the other hand, a lenient and smooth return policy can help boost sales, retain customers, and reduce unforeseen costs.

5. Using Bio-degradable Paper and Materials for Packaging

Another environmentally-friendly practice businesses can adopt in achieving sustainable shipping is opting for more bio-degradable materials. Meaning such materials should be able to decompose easily, be reusable, or at least easily recyclable.

For example, most e-commerce businesses wrap glass orders in plastic to prevent it from breaking. You’ll even find many environmentally-friendly products coming affixed in plastic. And plastic, as we know, causes environmental pollution as it does not decompose.

A more sustainable approach to this might be to wrap it in Aluminium instead, which is 100% recyclable and involves no plastic at all.

6. Ship Items in Bulk and In a Single Box

It’s advisable to opt for bulk shipment rather than smaller ones. This is a more sustainable approach to cut down on environmental waste.

Also, as much as possible, consolidate all your orders into a single box. Doing this will help to save costs and reduce greenhouse emissions caused by multiple trips. One way to achieve this is by storing your goods/items in the same warehouse.

This way, when the fulfillment company comes, it can pack all your items and deposit them in a single box. The result will be less waste of money for supplies and postage.

By working with wholesalers, you can get to reduce individual and smaller shipments, thereby leading to less carbon footprint, greater ability to meet the demands of customers geographically, and even less possibility of return shipping.

Conclusion

Most businesses think the trade-off is between sustainable business practices and profit. But that isn’t always the case. There are simple actions that do not cost a thing but saves the environment a great deal.

Choosing to adopt environmentally-friendly shipping processes as an e-commerce business not only saves cost, it also positively affects your business image while helping to create a better, healthier, and greener earth.

The post 6 Strategies to Ship in a Sustainable Way appeared first on .

Cost-effective eCommerce

How to Spend Less to Get eCommerce Up and Running

Learn how to identify a minimum viable product and limit scope to ensure you build a cost-effective eCommerce presence.

Behavior by Generation

Online Consumer Behavior Differs among Generations

See the latest study on how online shopping behavior compare among different generations.

Influencer Marketing

5 Common Influencer Marketing Myths

While there’s mixed feelings about influencer marketing, learn more about the true benefits of this marketing strategy.

The post What We’re Reading: eCommerce, Generations, and Influencers appeared first on .

As retail stores slowly begin to reopen, many brands are realizing things will not be “business as usual.”  During the rise of the COVID-19 pandemic, customers have remained “socially distanced,” leaving their homes only to purchase essential items. For all other purchases consumers are more frequently ordering their favorite products online – leaving many brands feeling need to rapidly scale direct-to-consumer operations to meet their customers’ needs. This is not an easy task.  

The challenge with scaling direct-to-consumer operations is most brands don’t know where to start.  In this article, we’ll explore five areas that need to be optimized to ensure your direct-to-consumer operations scale smoothly and, most importantly, that you deliver a premium experience.  

1. Optimize Your eCommerce Website 

While this item seems obvious, the average cart abandonment rate across all industries is still a whopping 69.57%, illustrating there is room to grow with ecommerce enhancements. Most ecommerce companies recognize the importance of an attractive website, but successful direct-to-consumer leaders must look beyond the homepage.  Experts estimate that conversions can be increased by 35.62% when checkout optimization strategies are implemented.   

To help you begin, here are a few recommendations to implement: 

Optimize your product pages: 

Your product pages are essentially the first step of your checkout. Here consumers decide whether to buy (or not buy) your products. It’s your job to help them make that decision. Ensure every page includes details relevant to the product. Product pages are also a great area to provide ‘up-sale’ opportunities, linking to products that pair well with what the product the consumer is already looking to purchase.  

Use personalization: 

Utilize data captured from your website and social analytics to help your website produce personalized  content to returning visitors. Personalized content  can include relevant products, discounts, and content based on their user behavior. According to Gartner, data-driven personalization on your ecommerce page can boost profits by 15%.  

Optimize for mobile: 

One ecommerce optimization you can’t afford to skip is optimizing your site for mobile audiences. More people use mobile devices than desktops, and it’s also a key channel for researching products and services. 

2. Re-examine Your Order Management System  

In many ways, your order management order system is the heart of your operation. Scaling direct-to-consumer operations will be tough if your order management system fails to accurately capture subscription information or to process personalized orders.  

Your order management system must be integrated with all of the major online marketplaces where your products are sold. This will streamline order capturing and automatically capture data and sends it to our fulfillment centers. From there, you learn where the delivery needs to go, how much inventory is required to fulfill the order and the optimal warehouse from which to ship. The result is a reduction in postage costs and delivery time.  

Your order management system must be able to do these three things: 

• Connect and import orders from across every channel you use to sell products 
• Optimize ‘order splitting’ to split up orders and route products to the most optimal fulfillment center 
• Automatically update inventory information to ensure that products don’t get oversold (this is how backorders occur) 

3. Consider Looking for a New Fulfillment Partner 

As direct-to-consumer orders start to increase most brands will begin to outgrow their current fulfillment partner (sometimes called a “third party logistics” provider). If your fulfillment operations begin to do the following, it may be time to look for a new (or additional) partner: 

• Deliveries are delayed as backorders start piling up 
• Order accuracy suffers as a result of increased shipments 
• Inventory accuracy decays with increase of online orders 

If your business is experiencing any of these, download this guide to find the right 3PL for your business. 

4. Enhance Data Analytics for a Complete View of Your Customers’ Journey 

E-commerce analytics are the key to understanding customer churn and other critical metrics that reflect the overall health of your e-commerce operations. A successful e-commerce business starts with standard metrics such as cost per order, average order value, and others, but then digs deeper into more relevant metrics depending on what business process or customer challenge it wants to address. 

Data drives e-commerce analytics, but merely collecting data doesn’t allow you to make better decisions. Your strategy for using any kind of data and for choosing which metrics to prioritize should always align with your high-level business objectives. 

To help you determine which metrics your business should measure, download our whitepaper that highlights the formulas and solutions to grow your direct-to-consumer business. 

5. Don’t Neglect Your Customer Care Team 

An excellent customer experience isn’t just ‘nice to have’ — it’s absolutely critical. For your business to flourish, you have to provide engaging technology, design, and customer service touch points throughout the entire experience. This is especially true with your customer care team. 

Just as it’s important that your fulfillment operations are able to scale during peaks and surges, so should your customer care team. Working with your team and partnering with agencies to help scale operations (both increasing and decreasing) when needed is crucial for your customer experience.   

Conclusion 

There was a time when e-commerce was criticized for being too ‘impersonal.’ Today, however, the convenience of shopping online has clearly overcome that obstacle. In order to keep your customers returning to your ecommerce site, the entire experience needs to feel seamless.  

If you’re looking for more information on how to scale your direct-to-consumer fulfillment operations, download our whitepaper, “The complete guide to direct-to-consumer personalization at scale.”  

About the Author

Chris Accardo – VP of Marketing and Communications at OceanX 

A seasoned and accomplished technology and entertainment marketing executive, brand builder and entrepreneur.  In 2015, Chris was introduced to Georg Richter, President and Chief Operating Officer at Guthy-Renker. Georg was preparing to launch OceanX, a spin-off of Guthy-Renker. OceanX would focus on helping brands launch, grow and scale recurring revenue programs. Chris was a member of a small group of founders and OceanX’s first ‘full-time’ hire. He currently serves as Head of Marketing, overseeing all marketing, communications and customer acquisition efforts including lead generation, content and brand strategy, public relations and all earned, owned and paid channels. With 80% YOY growth, OceanX now operates 4 locations across the U.S., 8 customer care locations globally and runs over $1B through its subscription engine annually.   

Chris is an avid outdoorsman, recovering rock star and self-proclaimed science geek. He is most drawn to great creative challenges, unique projects, innovative technology, and being intrinsically involved with a company’s growth trajectory.  

About OceanX

OceanX makes it easy for large brands to engage customers in a direct-to-consumer (DTC) model.  Our solutions include a modern, high volume fulfillment-only option or an end-to-end offering that combines order management (including subscriptions), personalized fulfillment, customer care and rich customer analytics. OceanX partners with some of the world’s most recognizable direct-to-consumer brands including Glossier, Athletic Greens, Allergan, Seed and Proactiv to help launch, grow and scale their DTC programs.

The post Optimize These 5 Areas To Scale Direct-to-Consumer Operations appeared first on .

Retail Growth

eCommerce Takes Half of Pandemic-Driven Retail Growth

See the latest stats on the growth of eCommerce during the last few months of business shut downs amid the pandemic.

B2B eCommerce

The Coronavirus Continues to Alter the Course of B2B eCommerce

New research indicates that 45% of B2B companies are seeing a spike in digital sales.

Amazon

Amazon’s traffic is way up, but others are doing even better during the pandemic

See how competitors like Walmart and Target are faring against Amazon during the pandemic.

The post What We’re Reading: Retail Growth, B2B, and Amazon appeared first on .

BigCommerce is one of the most popular ways for small businesses to sell products online, and it offers robust ecommerce tools out of the box. That said, users can also take advantage of hundreds of add-ons, customizations, and apps to supplement the platform’s core features and take their ecommerce strategies to the next level.

In this article, we’ll cover seven of the most effective apps for BigCommerce users. These cover everything from A/B tests to omnichannel marketing and live chat support. Adding apps to your BigCommerce approach gives you the opportunity to craft a unique customer experience that will resonate with your audience

1.   Omnisend

Multichannel campaigns tend to achieve better results than campaigns that only leverage a single channel, but omnichannel strategies can add another layer of personalization to your customer interactions. Omnisend is a robust omnichannel application that streamlines nearly every aspect of omnichannel marketing.

The platform is currently compatible with email, SMS, push notifications, Facebook Custom Audiences, Google Customer Match, and Facebook Messenger. It also offers both preset and custom workflows that allow marketers to configure complex automation sequences across several channels.

With additional features such as thorough marketing analytics, customizable signup forms, and 24/7 email and live chat support, Omnisend is the perfect tool for transitioning to an omnichannel approach. Users can access its email features, signup forms, and reports at no charge, while premium subscriptions start at just $16 per month.

2. ReferralCandy

Word of mouth marketing is one of the most efficient ways to generate leads and sales, and ReferralCandy automates the process of developing a strong referral program. Users can start incentivizing referrals without any coding experience.

ReferralCandy costs $49 per month plus a tiered commission after a 30-day free trial. It’s compatible with BigCommerce as well as other ecommerce stores such as Shopify, WooCommerce, and Magento.

Subscribers can customize nearly every aspect of their referral programs including rewards, signup forms, and automated workflows. The platform also integrates with other marketing applications such as Google Ads and Analytics, Facebook Pixel, and Adroll Advertise.

3. Yotpo

Yotpo is a BigCommerce app that focuses on helping businesses generate more reviews on their products. Audiences tend to trust buyer reviews more than other types of messaging, so encouraging customers to leave a review can lead to a significant bump in sales.

While most review requests require the customer to visit the online store to leave a review, Yotpo’s form is embedded within the email. Recipients can write and submit the review without leaving the message, and Yotpo emails are all optimized for mobile devices as well as computers.

Yotpo’s free plan includes basic features like review request emails, widgets for your site, and up to 50 orders per month. Premium subscriptions are priced based on your business and come with additional tools such as Google and Facebook integration, support for multiple domains, and a dedicated account manager.

4. LiveChat

Real-time conversations are one of the most effective ways to generate interest in your products, and LiveChat facilitates these interactions by adding a chat widget to your website. The program is also compatible with a wide range of other channels such as WhatsApp, Facebook Messenger, email, and SMS.

While some customers will have general questions about your brand, chat agents can also direct them toward specific items through the product recommendation tool. These recommendations include an image and description of the product along with a link to its page.

LiveChat starts at just $19 per agent per month, or $16 per agent per month when billed annually. You can also start with a 14-day free trial to test out the application. Unlike many other subscription services, LiveChat doesn’t require payment information for free trials.

5. OrderCup

Shipping and order fulfillment may seem like straightforward aspects of running an ecommerce store, but managing them manually can significantly reduce your efficiency, especially if you’re selling a large volume of products.

OrderCup offers numerous tools to help streamline your shipping practices. Some of the most notable features are its discounted shipping and insurance rates, 24/7 emergency support, and free packing supplies. Users can also set up on-demand or automatic return labels to facilitate the return process.

After a 30-day free trial, premium OrderCup subscriptions are available from just $25 per month for up to 500 monthly shipments. A free plan is also available for businesses that make fewer than 50 shipments per month.

6. Optimizely

Gathering marketing data is a crucial step toward optimizing your campaigns, and Optimizely makes this easy by facilitating split tests and integrating directly with BigCommerce.

Split tests, or A/B tests, involve displaying two variants of the same page or ad and comparing the results in order to identify the best option. Consistently running A/B tests gives you the information you need to make adjustments and stay ahead of the competition.

Optimizely subscriptions start at just $17 per month, with specific pricing based on the features you need and the size of your business. Free trials are available for up to 30 days, giving you plenty of time to experiment with a variety of split tests.

7. TrustPulse

Like referral programs, social proof is an excellent way to build your brand’s credibility. TrustPulse tracks customer activity and automatically targets leads with social proof at the perfect point in the customer journey. Subscriptions start at $79 per year for up to 2,500 site visits per month.

For example, a lead who visits your site might receive a notification when another customer completes a purchase. You can easily set up these workflows in just a few minutes, and TrustPulse gives users the ability to customize various aspects of their workflow.

Conclusion

BigCommerce is a powerful tool on its own, but it’s at its best when combined with the top third-party applications and add-ons. These are just a few of the most effective apps to consider adding to your BigCommerce store in 2020.

What’s your favorite app? Let us know in the comments below.

The post 7 Apps That Will Improve Your BigCommerce Web store appeared first on .

Voice Marketing

5 Steps for Brands to Optimize Voice Strategies

See how brands can successful use voice strategies to provide better customer experiences.

Brand Pivots

Retailers and brands make a quick pivot in the pandemic

See top examples of how brands used people-first thinking to develop relevant products and content during the pandemic.

Cross-border Shipping

Goodbye NAFTA – Hello USMCA

See what the impact is on cross-border shipping when the USMCA replaces NAFTA on July 1, 2020.

The post What We’re Reading: Voice Marketing, Cross-border Shipping, & Brand Pivots appeared first on .

Magento 1 reaches its end of life on June 30th, 2020. Many users of this popular eCommerce platform plan to migrate to a newer eCommerce platform. However, many more businesses are still somewhere on the spectrum between deciding what eCommerce software, such as Magento 2, to re-platform to, and having their new site built.

In many cases, merchants will stay with a platform for as long as possible in order to avoid the costs of replatforming. It can be hard to spend cold hard cash to replace a site that you perceive to be meeting your basic eCommerce needs. This may explain why ~100,000 Magento 1 websites remain active with less than a month to go before Adobe, the owners of the Magento brand, stop supporting the platform. It’s hard to find a Magento 1 merchant that wouldn’t migrate onto something newer if money were not an issue.

As users are prioritizing new site builds to replace their old Magento 1 sites, they aren’t all going to the same platform. At JetRails, we’ve been tracking the choices that our customers make. It’s important for us to understand if our clients were experiencing some sort of friction that we (or our partners) could help to alleviate for other users in the future. 

A majority of our users have consistently chosen to migrate to Magento 2, and those that haven’t, have mainly sought other open source solutions. That’s not to say that our sampling is indicative of what all Magento 1 users are choosing – we mainly work with mid-market and enterprise organizations who have solid hosting and work with great web development teams – but we have found a pattern in why they’re sticking with open-source eCommerce solutions. Here are some of the main themes that we come across:

Website Ownership

With a SaaS solution, you don’t own your website. This is an overarching theme for why merchants prefer open source solutions. With a SaaS solution, you could be told tomorrow that the cost of your site is going up, that your SaaS provider will no longer support your category of products, or that the apps you rely on may no longer be connected to your site. You’re a renter, you can be evicted at any time, and you’re subject to the changes and whims of another company.

Data Ownership

In eCommerce, your data can be just as important a commodity as your supply chains. Knowing who your customers are, what your top sellers are, and what your sales volume looks like is information that’s coveted, and sometimes abused in the industry. Many businesses prefer to own and store their data in their own web hosting accounts, rather than relinquish the lifeblood of their business to big tech companies. 

Customization & Integration Opportunities

With an open source platform, like Magento 2, you can build custom extensions and debug any code conflicts so that extensions can work together. 

With SaaS solutions, you can’t install extensions – you have to run apps. Apps must be hosted separately leading to a variety of issues and challenges, such as:

• Large numbers of API calls
• Ongoing expenses from App publishers
• Inability to customize apps to meet your needs
• Inability to debug code conflicts between apps
• Greater expense to build and maintain custom apps rather than custom extensions
• Reliance on the scalability of 3rd party app hosting
• Reliance on the security of 3rd party app hosting
• Providing access to your eCommerce data to 3rd party app publishers
• Risks of App developers going out of business or changing their pricing or terms

Extensions, plugins, and modules for open source platforms typically take the opposite approach. You purchase the code or access it for free, and you can edit, install, and run the code at your discretion. 

Fewer “Penalties” for growing

With SaaS solutions, you often pay fees that are tied to your sales or revenue. In essence, the software publisher becomes your silent business partner. That’s not to say that your growth doesn’t require some extra resources on their part, but this can get out of hand. This is equally true when you’re simultaneously paying app developers in the same way, and paying credit card processing fees to your SaaS provider as well.

More predictable costs

To believe that you can perfectly predict your expenses as an eCommerce business would show hubris and a lack of understanding. In eCommerce, things change. There are evolving standards and requirements that come into play in order to conduct “business as usual.” Through the years, businesses have added a focus on mobile visitors from both a speed and a design perspective. In more recent years, there have also been more privacy standards to contend with, like the California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA) and the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). 

Whether it’s changing security standards, sales tax regulations, payment gateway features, user interfaces, or other aspects of your site, change is constant. However, with an open source website, your expenses are based on your needs and goals, and you can shop vendors to find what you need. With SaaS, you may come to renew your SaaS license and find out that prices have increased significantly. Similarly, if you want or need a solution, you may find that you have to pay for an enhanced package – you can’t simply add what you need when you need it.

More baskets for all of those eggs

If you’re unhappy with the loading speed you’re getting from your web host, you can switch hosts, at least if you have an open-source site. Similarly, if your eCommerce platform doesn’t have a particular feature that you need, you get a plugin or extension. 

Almost all SaaS eCommerce solutions are multi-tenant, so to provide you with a solution, it would have to be rolled out for ALL users on the platform. If you’re having a performance issue or unhappy with a missing or under-performing feature set, you’re out of luck. All of your eggs are stuck in one basket, or in other words, your hands are tied. 

While apps may be able to make up for some deficiencies, apps are limited to what the SaaS solution gives access to, which can be a major point of failure. Apps also add more monthly service fees and vendors to manage and rely on. These aren’t pieces of code installed on your site. These are 3rd parties that you integrate through APIs. As we touched on, relying on sometimes dozens of app providers can lead to a lot of hidden costs and risks.

Open source website owners can focus on giving their customers outstanding shopping experiences, while SaaS site owners may be stuck focusing on what they can do within the limits set by their platform.

All in all, what platform you use is a personal choice. Whenever possible, it’s best to speak with experts that work with both SaaS and Open Source platforms and go through a thorough assessment to see which platform will best suit your short-term and long-term goals. However, merchants have consistently shared with us that the reasons that they chose Magento 1 continue to hold true, which is why Magento 2 has been their top choice for the next iteration of the eCommerce stores.

What to Do Next

If you’re still on Magento 1 for the time being, check out these helpful tips to ensure you keep your webstore secure.

About the Author

Robert Rand is the Director of Partnerships at JetRails, a mission-critical eCommerce hosting service. Robert has over a decade of experience in helping merchants benefit from sound eCommerce and digital marketing strategies, assisting organizations of all types and sizes to grow and succeed via digital commerce. Robert is a frequent author and thought contributor in the eCommerce industry, and hosts The JetRails Podcast.

The post Why Magento 1 Users are Sticking with Open Source appeared first on .

Magento 1

Magento 1 End of Life: A Helpful Checklist

Magento 1 software reaches end of life this month. See how to prepare your webstore for what happens next.

Supply Chain

Re-Open for Business: Supply Chain in the New Retail

See how retailers are responding to the disruptions and supply chain and how to prepare for the furture.

Referral Marketing

How to Skyrocket Sales with eCommerce Referral Marketing

See how you can put together a killer referral marketing strategy to boost online sales.

The post What We’re Reading: Magento 1, Referral Marketing, & Supply Chain appeared first on .

We all have to grow up sometime.

For some of us it happens gradually- we get a little taller, a little stronger each day. 

And for some of us it happens overnight- you wake up one morning only to find out you no longer fit into your clothing.

It’s not that different for B2B eCommerce companies. 

According to Amazon, B2B eCommerce was worth $829 billion in 2016 – and by 2023, it’s estimated to grow to a market size of $1.8 trillion. 

In other words- it’s time to grow up.

So, how can you make sure that your eCommerce website is ready for this spurt, and ensure that it’s easy for B2B shoppers to use your services? In this guide, we’ve put together a few tips you can use to improve your website and shopping experience. 

Learn more below.

1. Optimize Your Omnichannel & Mobile Shopping Experience

First and foremost, you’ll want to optimize your website’s omnichannel eCommerce experience. This means providing a unified experience across all shopping touchpoints – including smartphone, tablet, laptop or desktop computer. 

More shopping than ever is done from mobile platforms, and this is not only limited to B2C (Business-to-Consumer) shopping. B2B users are also becoming more likely to shop from mobile platforms, particularly as it has become standard for enterprise software and productivity applications to support tablets and phones. 

94% of workers have a smartphone, and 91% of corporate employees are using “at least one” enterprise mobile application, with 21% using “dedicated, department-specific” mobile applications. In addition, 57% of mobile shoppers say they won’t recommend businesses that have a “poorly developed” mobile platform. 

Clearly, it is essential that your website deliver a seamless B2B-optimized shopping experience. You should place all relevant product information, ordering tools, mobile payment systems, and chat/communication systems at the fingertips of your customers. 

Whether you’re using Magento, Shopify, or even a custom eCommerce platform, you need to perform user testing and make sure you’re delivering a truly excellent omnichannel and mobile shopping experience.

2. Implement B2B-Focused Shopping Tools On Your Website To Streamline Ordering

The needs of business shoppers are different than those of everyday consumers. An end consumer (B2C) may purchase a single box of latex gloves from an auto supply store, while a dealership (B2B) may want to purchase 500 boxes of gloves, along with a bulk shipment of oil of different grades, dozens of pairs of safety glasses, brake fluid… and other such products in a single order.

For this reason, it’s very important to implement features that allow B2B customers to quickly place bulk orders on your website. Magento, for example, allows customers to purchase items by directly entering the SKU, or even importing a list of SKUs that can be translated into a purchase order.

Another alternative would be to enable bulk ordering directly from your standard shopping user interface. For example, you can use an extension like Rapid List Ordering on your Magento website. This tool enables one-click ordering and simplified product navigation for eCommerce customers. It reduces the time spent ordering individual items, and makes it simple to order and reorder frequently purchased items. 

By enabling these types of tools on your eCommerce platform, you can make it easier for B2B customers to get the items they need while minimizing friction and maximizing conversion rates. 

3. Provide Net 30 Terms & Invoicing When Customers Check Out 

Most companies prefer net 30 terms and invoicing for larger purchases, as this helps maximize their cash flow and makes it more convenient to order the items they need. Depending on the eCommerce platform you use, this feature may be available by default. But in most cases, you’ll need to use a third-party extension or add custom code to your eCommerce website to enable it.

Offering invoicing and purchase orders to your customers can be very beneficial for your company. Your clients will be able to spend more money on products because they won’t pay right away, resulting in higher sales.

Of course, it’s important to verify the credit of businesses when you extend these terms. Most third-party extensions and tools that allow purchase orders and net terms will allow you to do this automatically. 

4. Deliver Informative & Educational Resources To Customers While They Shop

Compared to B2C marketing, B2B marketing should be much more focused on providing informative and educational content to customers. A recent study found that 44% of top-performing B2B companies have a centralized content marketing group.

In addition, 66% of B2B companies focused on “prioritizing… audience’s informational needs” over their “organizations sales/promotional message.” When we look at the top-performing B2B companies, this jumps to 88%. Clearly, putting your customer’s informational needs above your own branding and sales-focused content is worthwhile in B2B eCommerce.

Compared to B2C commerce, B2B commerce involves higher dollar values per order, longer-term business relationships, and more repeat orders. Given this fact, it’s no surprise that B2B customers want to develop a thorough, comprehensive understanding of your company’s products or service before making a purchase. 

5. Consider Implementing Customized Pricing For Individual Customers

Another useful change you can make to your eCommerce website is to customize pricing for individual customers. Some platforms, like Magento Commerce, provide this as a built-in option for your store. Others may require you to develop a custom feature or extension to enable per-user pricing. 

As you may have already gathered, per-user pricing allows you to customize the prices of your items for individual customers.

For example, if you have a customer that often bulk-orders a particular item, you can customize and lower the price. You know they will be a repeat buyer and so you will be able to stay profitable even with a lower margin. In contrast, new customers or businesses that place smaller orders will pay higher per-unit prices, since you may not be sure if they will continue to shop with you. 

The biggest benefit of this is increased customer loyalty. You can let customers know that you are dropping the prices of some of your items for them, and thank them for being consistent shoppers at your store. Showing them this appreciation makes it more likely they will shop with you in the future – and encourages them to stick with you.

It also increases their “switching cost” – they may not know if they can get the same deal at another eCommerce store, so they will be less likely to explore other vendors, and less likely to stop shopping at your store. 

6. Make It Easy For Customers To Contact Your Team & Get Answers To Questions

Just as you should focus on informational, educational content about your products, you should also make it easy for customers to contact you and get answers to their questions about your products. There are a few ways you can do this:

• Q&As about products – Post answers to questions about your products publicly on each item’s page. This way customers find answers without contacting you directly. Chances are, many of your customers will have similar questions, so this is a great way to enhance customer knowledge.
  
• Chatbots – Chatbots are a seamless way to integrate communication throughout your entire website. Customers can quickly get automated answers to their questions, or request a connection to a live customer service representative – all without leaving the page they’re on.
  
• Contact information on each page – Having an email, phone number, contact form, or another such method of contact on each product page can be valuable, particularly if you encourage customers to get in touch if they have questions. 

When you implement these methods of customer contact, you need to make sure that you do your best to answer questions and connect with customers as quickly as possible. 

B2B customers, in particular, need to feel listened to – and expect rapid turnaround times for their questions. 86% of B2B customers are “more likely” to pay more from a vendor that offers a “great customer experience,” and they spend 13% more on average to buy products from such vendors.

7. Don’t Forget About Customer Reviews & Testimonials 

Finally, let’s touch on one of the most often-overlooked aspects of B2B eCommerce – product reviews. While product reviews are sometimes seen as something that’s only important for B2C consumers, this is not the case.

Only about 43% of B2B companies say they have product reviews on their websites – and only a further 20% say that they are seriously considering adding any.

However, a full 93% of customers say they are “more likely” to consider purchasing a product that they’ve read positive reviews about, and there’s no reason to believe that this doesn’t apply to both B2B and B2C customers. 

Whether your eCommerce platform already has a customer review feature or you need to add it with a third-party or custom extension, adding customer reviews to your products can be very helpful – and help build customer trust, boost conversion rates, and enhance your bottom line. 

Follow These Tips For A Better B2B eCommerce Experience – And More Sales! 

With these 7 tips, you’ll be able to improve the B2B eCommerce shopping experience, and sell your products and services more effectively. So think about how you can implement one, several, or all of the above features with your eCommerce platform. You’re sure to benefit from more sales, a better customer retention rate, and much more! 

Read more articles about B2B eCommerce:

• How to Choose the Best B2B eCommerce Platform for Your Business
• B2B eCommerce: Native B2B Platform Vs Repurposing B2C
• Should B2B Merchants Sell on Amazon or Their Own Webstore?
• Why Manufacturers and Distributors Should Sell Online
• Get Your B2B Sales Team On Board for Your eCommerce Migration
• How to Navigate B2B eCommerce: Go-to-Guide for Manufacturers and Distributors for Getting Online

The post 7 Tips To Supercharge Your B2B eCommerce Site appeared first on .

A negative shipping experience can have an irreparable impact on your relationship with customers. 84% of consumers say that they won’t return to a brand after just one poor delivery experience. It’s evident that a good shipping experience is vital for customer retention.

If you haven’t already, consider improving your online fulfillment processes. You can start by learning from EasyCare Inc and how they instituted same-day shipping for their equine business.

About EasyCare

Founded in 1970, EasyCare pioneered a new category in the equine industry known as the hoof boot. Designed by Dr. Neel Glass, EasyCare’s first comfortable, padded shoe was named the “Easyboot.” Unlike a traditional iron shoe, hoof boots allow a horse to naturally flex its hoof with each step, aiding in circulation, while still providing protection from rocks or damaging hard surfaces.

Beyond their innovative array of products, EasyCare has spent the last few years automating their internal operations to optimize their eCommerce and shipping experiences for customers. With the stage set by Amazon, EasyCare recognizes that today’s customers want timely and accurate shipping even when it came to their hoof boots.

How EasyCare Implemented Same-day Shipping for Online Orders

Here’s the initial steps EasyCare took to improve their processes:

Read the full case study here.

1. Outsourcing Fulfillment to a 3PL

EasyCare initially did all their own warehouse management. After almost 50 years in business though, EasyCare felt inefficient compared to the market and decided to outsource their warehousing and fulfillment to a third-party logistics (3PL) partner. Operating their own warehouse wasn’t worth the financial costs or time to perfect. Instead, they wanted to focus their business on creating products, marketing, and supporting customers.

After some trial and error, EasyCare landed a partnership with Dallas-based 3PL Warehouse-Pro. They appreciated their dedicated team trained to handle their unique shipping requirements like:

• Equine equipment terminology on packing slips and other shipping materials
• 30-day rental program for users to ship back test size boots
• Shipping products that contain glue, a hazardous material
• Shipping to international customers
• 45-day returns guarantee, no questions asked

2. Implement Shipping Software

When working with Warehouse-Pro, EasyCare learned they primarly used ShipStation as their shipping software and implemented it themselves. With ShipStation’s order tagging and shipping rule features, EasyCare can easily notify WarehousePro’s team when an order needs something special such as:

• Include a pre-printed return label for any rental program hoof boot
• Attach special paperwork for products that contain hazardous materials like glue
• Quickly generate a return label for guaranteed returns program

3. Integrating their ERP Software

With their 3PL in place, along with ShipStation, EasyCare saw an opportunity to automate their entire fulfillment workflow – from an order placed on the web to that product being picked and shipped from the warehouse. They turned to nChannel to integrate their ERP Sage 100 with ShipStation.

Before integrating their systems, EasyCare was only syncing online orders in two or three waves a day. This was slowing down the rest of the fulfillment process and didn’t always allow for same-day shipping. Delayed shipping times lead to their customer service and sales reps receiving calls from their customers asking where their orders were.

With the nChannel integration in place between Sage 100 and ShipStation, EasyCare no longer waits to sync online orders in batches throughout the day. Instead, the process from beginning to end is automated.

• Customer place online orders
• Online orders sync to Sage 100 with all the necessary data fields
• nChannel syncs sales orders to ShipStation to start the shipping process
• Warehouse-Pro fulfills the orders

Now, new orders make it to the warehouse within minutes of being placed online. This timeliness is crucial for giving their 3PL Warehouse-Pro enough time to ship as many orders as possible same-day for customers.

“If you can streamline the process with less human interaction, then the orders gets out the door faster and that’s what people want.”

Jessica Kahn, Operations Manager and Special Project Leads at EasyCare

The Results

With their 3PL partner and an automated shipping workflow in place, EasyCare can already tell a difference.

1. They’re shipping more orders same-day. With an automated process, they even rely on orders to ship same-day when employees aren’t in the office because of their four-day work week.

2. Customer service teams spend less time answering customers asking when their order shipped or why the tracking info hasn’t updated.

3. EasyCare also simplified their rental program and returns process for customers. As a horse’s hoof can vary in size just like a human, EasyCare ships multiple sizes of their hoof boots to ensure customers choose the best fit. Within 30 days, customers can try on the different sizes for their horse and return those that didn’t work. EasyCare includes that return label right in the packing box to make returns hassle-free.

EasyCare’s automated fulfillment processes are made possible through an integrated solution between their partners and software. Even though EasyCare was founded in 1970, they’ve evolved their eCommere and shipping experience to meet the demands of today’s consumers.

The post How to Implement Same-day Shipping for eCommerce appeared first on .

Data During COVID-19

How Data is Powering a Retail Evolution during the COVID-19 Pandemic and Beyond

See how certain data points like real-time location data are helping retailers see through the changes brought on by COVID-19.

Supply Chain

How is the COVID-19 Pandemic Affecting the Supply Chain?

See how leading 3PL ReTransFreight is helping their customers through COVID-19.

Shopify 2020

25 Shopify Experts Reveal What’s Next for 2020

Hear from well-known experts about what sellers should expect in 2020 from eCommerce and the leading platform Shopify.

The post What We’re Reading: Data, Supply Chain, Shopify 2020 appeared first on .

Financial technology (commonly referred to as fintech) has transformed the way we transact and manage money, creating a wealth of opportunity for eCommerce sellers, other types of small business owners, and even consumers. 

With better access to business banking, financing, global currency exchange, and more, you can leverage fintech to save money, maximize ROIs, and grow your eCommerce business for the long-term.

In this post, we’re going to show you how.

Online Banking

Traditionally, business banks charge fees and impose minimum deposit requirements. This is due in large part because traditional banks have physical branches and outdated infrastructures that increase their overhead costs (which are then passed on to you). Such fees and minimum deposits are less than ideal for businesses — but especially eCommerce sellers who often struggle with cash flow due to high demand, marketplace payout delays, and more.

Fortunately, businesses no longer have to rely on traditional banking institutions to manage their money. Online alternatives like Rho Business Banking offer checking and savings accounts with high yields, minimal to no fees, and no minimum deposit requirements. All in all, if you find that you never use your business bank for in-person banking, then you’re paying extra for services that are unnecessary for how you do business. With online banks, you stand to save a lot of money — and potentially make more in APY (annual percentage yield) on the deposits you already have anyway.

Alternative Financing Options for Businesses

The online financing landscape might be the biggest game changer for eCommerce sellers. After all, needs for financing can happen without warning — and with a sense of urgency.

For example, if you’re approaching a stockout during a busy time and want to restock to keep momentum going, you can get financing to invest in a resupply order from an online business funder before it’s too late. Going through a bank for financing could take weeks or months — and when you’re running low on inventory, you simply don’t have that kind of time.

The online and SMB funding landscape is vast. Luckily, there are fintech solutions designed specifically for the unique needs of eCommerce businesses. Take Payability, for example, which offers a variety of early payout and working capital solutions exclusively for eCommerce businesses. You could get your Amazon or marketplace payouts the next day every day with Payability’s Instant Access. Instant Access not only gets you paid in real time for your Amazon sales, it also protects you from the uncertainty of Amazon unavailable balances. You can also get a large lump sum of cash with Payability’s Instant Advance, and even access your income on the go with their Seller Card. They also offer Instant Advance for Shopify. 

Unlike traditional banks that often don’t understand eCommerce businesses, Payability is different. Approval is based on account health and sales performance. So there are no credit checks, no complicated paperwork, no hidden fees, and no origination fees. Just a short online application and fast 24-hour approvals. If you already have a term loan or other traditional financing or even an alternative solution like Shopify Capital or an Amazon loan, fintech solutions like Payability work well alongside other products you may already have in place. 

Just imagine what your business could do if you had reliable cash flow and the means to invest in growth opportunities as they happen. Learn more here.

Customer Financing Options

New and better financing options aren’t just available for your business reinvestment needs — they can also help boost sales. Companies like Affirm, Afterpay, and Klarna for business allow your customers to essentially buy now and pay later with point-of-sale loans. These are attractive payment options for buyers who want to avoid using a credit card, because many point-of-sale loans are interest-free and there’s no hard credit pull involved with setting up an account.

Point-of-sale lenders assume all credit and fraud risk and have seen that average order value increases for merchants that offer point-of-sale financing. Just keep in mind that the cost to use them might be more than what you’re currently paying for credit card transactions. Pricing is specific to the POS terms you choose to offer your customers, but generally speaking, it costs about 2-3% per transaction. To get a better cost estimate, set up a demo with your point-of-sale provider of choice and talk numbers.

Global Currency Exchange

Chances are, as an eCommerce seller, you work with overseas suppliers or maybe even sell to global markets. In either case, you have to deal with international money transfers and currency exchange, which can be costly if you use a bank or traditional payment processor (not so fun fact: some charge fees as high as 3%). 

So if you need to pay a supplier in China $100,000, you’ll be charged $3,000 just for the transfer AND you’ll need to cover the exchange rate. What’s more, some providers try to hide their fees in the exchange rate, which means you should always do your due-diligence and compare a quoted exchange rate to what the market rate actually is.

Or you can save yourself the headache — and high costs — by using an online currency conversion company like OFX, which allows you to cover all your currency exchange needs for far less than a bank or traditional payment processor. Not only are there no hidden fees in your exchange rate, but you can secure an exchange rate for a fixed time period (thus avoiding the volatile currency market and allowing you to plan better for your costs). And if you do a lot of business overseas, you can use a company like OFX to set up a local bank account to manage payments in that area’s currency and avoid exchange rate fees altogether.

More FinTech Solutions

Banking, financing, and currency exchange aren’t the only financial services that have been transformed by technology. There are a plethora of other FinTech solutions that can help your eCommerce business, from payment processors, accounting apps, eCommerce platforms, and more. 

At the end of the day, you should consider your business’s unique financial needs to determine which tech-based solution is right for you. Whether it’s an eCommerce-minded funding solution like Payability, an online bank or currency exchange company, or something else, you’ll reap the FinTech benefits — like more operational efficiency and faster, long-term growth — in no time.

About the Author

Victoria Sullivan is a Marketing Manager at Payability. She has over eight years of social media, copywriting and marketing experience. Prior to joining the Payability team, Victoria developed social media content and strategies for top technology brands such as Skype and Samsung. She holds a degree in Advertising from Syracuse University’s S.I. Newhouse School of Public Communications. She can often be found in a yoga class or working on her fashion blog.

Disclaimer: Please note that this post contains affiliate links. If you click through and purchase through these links, nChannel may receive a commission (at no additional cost to you). Our top priority is to provide valuable content and resources to our readers, which sometimes includes recommending products we find helpful and reputable. If you have any questions or concerns, please reach out directly at nchannel.com/contact.

The post FinTech Solutions for eCommerce Businesses appeared first on .

Black-owned Brands

Shopping Online? Here are 50 Black-owned eCommerce Brands to Support Right Now

Privy put together a great list of black-owned eCommece brands, along with the stories of how these entrepreneurs built their brands from the ground up.

The New Retail Experience

Navigating the New Retail Experience: Changing Expectations

See why this is the ideal time to reassess your customer experience and drive improvements.

Shipping Surcharges

Will Retailers Pass Along or Eat COVID-19 Shipping Surcharges?

As carriers announce shipping surcharges, see how retailers are responding.

The post What We’re Reading: Black-owned Brands, Retail, and Shipping Surcharges appeared first on .

In March 2015, Microsoft announced that their point of sale software, Microsoft Dynamics RMS 2.0 entered the “extended support phase” of its product life cycle. This means that RMS had reached its end of life, with Microsoft planning no future development for it. In 2014, at least 45,000 companies were using Microsoft Dynamics Retail Management System (RMS).

Fast forward to 2020 and there’s still companies using Microsoft RMS through various means. However, extended support ends in July 2021. This post covers what that means for your business and suggests POS alternatives for RMS.

What does Microsoft RMS End of Life Mean?

So, what does it mean when a software system like Microsoft RMS enters the “extended support phase?” The details about RMS’s “end of life” include:

• As of July 2016, Microsoft Retail Management Systems (RMS) and Dynamics Headquarters (HQ) is no longer sold to new customers
• Existing customers will continue to be sold RMS & HQ after 2016
• Mainstream support for RMS and HQ ended on July 10^th, 2016
• Extended support will end on July 13^th, 2021
• Extended support is only available to companies who maintain a paid annual maintenance agreement

Today, businesses can no longer purchase new licenses of Microsoft RMS. However, some businesses have opted to maintain a paid annual maintenance agreement to receive extended support until July 13, 2021. They also rely on their partners like VARs to continue support of their software, beyond mainstream support that ended in 2016.

With the official 2021 end of life date quickly approaching, businesses should consider their transition plan off of Microsoft RMS. While a select few partners might support Micrsoft RMS/HQ past July 2021, they won’t support the software forever. In the meantime, you partners could also charge you extra fees to support “outdated” software. You could face additional problems with RMS like loss of working integrations or add-ons, lack of hardware support, and issues with Windows 10.

(Please note that nChannel currently supports Microsoft RMS integration into ERP, eCommerce, 3PL, or other endpoint systems.)

The reality is that Microsoft RMS/HQ is aged software. It’s in your best interest to prepare to upgrade. While there’s more than a handful of options out there, here’s the top POS alternatives for RMS users:

Retail Management Hero (RMH): An Upgrade to Microsoft Dynamics RMS

Launched in 2016, Retail Management Hero (RMH) is a purpose-built upgrade for small-to-medium size businesses using Microsoft Dynamics RMS. Key functionality of RMH POS include:

• Built with same core functionality as RMS allowing users to keep their data
• Uses many of the same features as RMS, including hot keys
• Supports the same peripheral hardware used with Microsoft RMS upgrade
• On-premise solution with offline capabilities
• Adds enhanced functionality for users like Purchase Order Processing, Inventory Control, and Accounts Receivable.
• Supports third-party add on integrations

If you’re looking for a seamless upgrade from RMS, Retail Management Hero should be a good fit. They’re focused on keeping the RMS experience in-tact while also enhancing it to meet current user needs.

If you anticipate integrating RMH POS into your eCommerce stores or ERP, see how nChannel can help automate your business processes.

Microsoft Dynamics 365 Commerce: A POS-eCommerce Upgrade from RMS

In 2014, Microsoft announced Microsoft AX and Retail Essentials as the intended upgrade for RMS. Today, Microsoft Dynamics AX was re-branded to Dynamics 365 and includes POS functionality called Dynamics 365 Commerce. This product offers a seamless shopping experience from online to offline shopping channels. By combining these experiences, users can:

• Connect digital, in-store, and back office operations in one platform
• Connected ordering and fulfillment tools to enable options like buy online, pick up in-store
• Manage sales promotions across all channels
• Offer endless aisles in-store with access to full product catalog
• Get a 360-degree view of customer with one-place of transactions and observational data
• AI-driven recommendations, insights and loyalty programs

Pricing plans start at $180 per user/month. You can also add eCommerce management starting at $5,000 per month. If you don’t plan on using their eCommerce functionality, you can still connect Microsoft Dynamics 365 to your desired eCommerce platform.

If you’re looking to stay on a Microsoft product and centrally manage eCommerce functionality too, then Dynamics 365 Commerce could be an option for you.

Lightspeed Retail: A Cloud-based RMS Alternative

Launched in 2013, Lightspeed has grown into a popular cloud-based POS system for retailers and restaurants. Today, they have about 35,000 users doing over $12 billion in sales annually.

If you’re looking to move away from Microsoft, Lightspeed Retail POS works well for many industries like apparel, bikes, electronics, jewelry, sporting goods, and more. Their main features include:

• Centralize purchasing with built-in purchase orders that combine multiple vendors and stores
• Access from your POS from any device, anywhere
• Many hardware solutions that include iPads, Bluetooth scanners, cash drawers and more
• Track spending habits with a customer insight dashboard
• Craft a tiered rewards program to encourage repeat purchases online and in store
• An EMV-compatible terminal when you sign up
• Manage your eCommerce inventory from the same retail POS system that runs your physical locations

Lightspeed Retail is an all-in-one system and a comparable upgrade to RMS. It can also be integrated into other systems like an ERP Microsoft Dynamics GP or NAV or eCommerce platforms like Shopify, BigCommerce, Magento, and more.

Lightspeed Retail POS is also affordable. As a cloud-based system, users pay a monthly fee that range from $69/mo to $229/mo. They also provide Lightspeed Payments with credit card processing fees at 2.6% + 10 cents. You can review full pricing detail here.

What to Do Next

RMS is quickly approaching the end of its extended support phase in 2021, which means that you should consider planning for a transition to new POS software. 

Have you considered any other RMS alternatives? Let us know in the comments below what your transition plans are for Microsoft RMS.

The post Microsoft RMS End of Life (Discontinued): Details & Tips for Choosing a Replacement appeared first on .

Optimizing eCommerce Search

How the Experts Optimize Category Navigation in eCommerce

Read this guide to learn more about optimizing your category navigation online, making it easier for shoppers to find what they want.

Implementing Same-Day Delivery

Having Issues with Same-Day Deliveries? Here’s how to Evaluate and Improve Your Suppl Chain

See how you can meet customer expectations and provide faster shipping times like same-day delivery.

Social Commerce

Will Facebook Shops Launch Social Commerce into the Mainstream?

See what experts say Facebook Shops could do for smaller and DTC brands.

The post What We’re Reading: eCommerce Search, Same-Day Delivery, and Social Commerce appeared first on .

Security and PCI Compliance Failure

While your webstore will continue to work past June 2020, Adobe will officially no longer release security patches for Magento 1 users. Without these security updates for Magento from Adobe themselves, merchants are putting themselves at serious risk for failing to meet PCI compliance requirements.

PCI DSS Requirements 6.1 and 6.2 address the need to keep systems up to date with vendor-supplied security patches to protect systems from known vulnerabilities. Merchants may also fail to get passing Approved Scanning Vendor (ASV) scans because they weren’t able to address security issues detected in their Magneto 1 sites.

Recognizing this serious issue, third-party vendors like VISA and PayPal are putting pressure on merchants to migrate off of Magento 1. They recognize that sites on this framework are vulnerable to security breaches and are an increased risk to secure payment card data. Payment processors can contact Magento 1 users directly to ensure they’re taking the proper steps to secure their websites.

If your Magento 1 site is breached, you could face serious consequences since you’re knowingly on unsupported software. This can lead to security audits, monthly fines and penalties, and even a credit card provider revoking your ability to accept payment online. By the end of it, you could be found responsible and owe tens of thousands of dollars. Both your customers and the viability of your business are at risk!

How to Protect Your Magento 1 Site Past June 2020

If you’re still on Magento 1 without any immediate plans to migrate off of it, there are fortunately still ways to protect your site in the short term through additional security measures.

Work with your Hosting Provider for Security Coverage

It’s imperative you work with your hosting provider to understand what measures are in place to protect your Magento 1 site past June 30, 2020. Some hosting providers like JetRails are preparing to provide additional security coverage like virtual firewalling, security scans, and site monitoring for Magento 1 sites.

(Also note that vendors like Mage-One are also providing security patches, even though these do not qualify as vendor-supplied as stated in PCI DSS requirements.)

Review Your Site Extensions

Another vulnerable part of your site is your extensions. Some developers have already stopped supporting extensions for Magento 1 instances. You should review your current extensions to remove any unnecessary ones or any that won’t be viable for Magento 1.

Perform a Security Audit

If you haven’t done so already, you should perform a security audit to assess your current performance. In general, this is best practice for maintaining your site and proactively searching for any vulnerability issues.

Prepare a Security Compensating Controls Plan

In the meantime, merchants can also prepare a Compensating Controls plan. Payment processors understand that come June 30, 2020, many Magento 1 users will be in a sticky situation for meeting PCI compliance requirements. To deal with this, payment processors can allow for merchants to “make up” for any requirements they can’t satisfy by putting in an alternative measure that is equivalent or even better.

This is referred to as a Compensating Controls plan. It shows that a merchant has sufficiently mitigated the risk associated with the unmet requirement through implementation of other controls. In other words, you must demonstrate that your alternative security measures are “as good or even better” than the required level of defense as the original PCI DSS requirement.

If you’re asked to present a Compensating Controls plan to a payment processor, be aware that it’s now someone’s opinion on whether you’re doing enough to meet PCI compliance! It’s important then that your plan thoroughly demonstrates your alternative security measures. 

To navigate this difficult situation, we recommend reading the full explanation from the eCommerce agency Best Worlds. They collaborated with a certified PCI assessor to create a recommended Compensating Controls checklist document for Magento 1 users that you can review there.

Migrating Off of Magento 1

We want to be clear that the efforts above are only to buy you more time in the short term to plan your migration off of Magento 1. The reality is that Magento 1 is aged software and eventually even these alternative security measures won’t be enough.

Merchants should be forming plans to move off Magento 1 as soon as possible and migrate to new eCommerce software whether it’s Magento 2, Shopify Plus, BigCommerce, or another platform of your choice.

To aid your research, check out these helpful articles:

• Why Migrate from Magento 1 to Magento 2
• Magento vs Shopify Plus: How to Choose for Your Business
• Magento vs BigCommerce: Picking the Right eCommerce Platform for Your Business
• Overcoming Common Fears of eCommerce Replatforming
•  How to Choose the Best B2B eCommerce Platform for Your Business

The post Magento 1 End of Life: How to Meet PCI Compliance appeared first on .

Facebook Shops

Mark Zuckerberg announces Facebook Shops, making it easier for businesses to list products for sale

Read all about Facebook Shops, a new eCommerce feature that allows businesses to easily list their products on Facebook and Instagram.

Walmart Expands Ship-from-store

Walmart expands ship-from-store to 2,500 to handle eCommerce volume bump

See how Walmart is turning to shipping-from-stores to keep up with online orders.

eCommerce and COVID-19

The Latest Research on COVID-19 and Its Effect on eCommerce

ShipStation conducted another study to track the progression of COVID-19 and how it has transformed eCommerce. See what they found.

The post What We’re Reading: Facebook Shops, Walmart, and eCommerce appeared first on .

The eCommerce software market is full of excellent solutions which can make it difficult to decide on the right tool for your business. If you’re selling to manufacturers, wholesalers, distributors, and resellers, you may start your search with a purpose-built B2B eCommerce solution. However, there are many resources suggesting that, with enough B2B plugins and integrations, you can quickly make a typical eCommerce system B2B-capable.

In this post we will analyze if there is a grain of truth in these suggestions.

Native B2B eCommerce Features vs Add-on’s

Business software is built for a specific market in mind and more often than not is designed to help businesses address specific business challenges. With eCommerce being a relatively young market (Amazon sold its first book back in 1995), many eCommerce platforms grew from primarily offering their solutions to businesses selling to consumers. Some of the most popular ones include Shopify, Magento, and WooCommerce.

Many of such platforms have a variety of applications and extensions that can tailor an eCommerce site for any conceivable need, including B2B selling. At first glance, the only drawback to that would be high development cost and increased website complexity.

But that’s not the entire picture.

Business customers require shopping experiences that accommodate them at the company level, with corporate account structures allowing different permissions for different roles. Since B2B catalogs are usually large and complex, businesses customers prefer personalized catalogs and quick-order forms with pre-negotiated or quoted prices. Payment preferences for B2Bs vary widely, with some businesses being constrained by budget limits, others preferring contract pricing, and others still preferring to negotiate their terms.

B2B customers want B2C-like, not B2C experiences when shopping.”

Yoav Kutner, Founder and CEO of OroCommerce

That is, a B2B eCommerce platform is not just a shopping cart, it’s a lot more”, continues Kutner. “It’s designed to help business customers purchase quickly and easily on personalized self-service portals with checkout workflows and payment options they require. B2B eCommerce systems help sales teams be more efficient, whether they’re on mobile devices, using the CMS or the built-in CRM system.”

In order to make the right decision and avoid pitfalls, you need to understand what awaits you with a B2B-modified B2C eCommerce platform vs. a purpose-built B2B eCommerce platform.

7 Benefits of Purpose-built B2B eCommerce Software

See the top benefits of native B2B eCommerce platforms:

1. Flexibility and Customization 

When you sell to the public, aside from an odd discount or loyalty program, there aren’t that many things to worry about. Customers add their items to cart, go to checkout, and you thank them for their order.

• There is no need to display different prices to different customers.
• There is no need to offer unique checkout workflows for every customer.
• There are no minimum order sizes or order quantity limits to deal with.
• There are no complex payment methods like ACH or procurement punchout to worry about.
• There is no need to deal with quotation and order approval processes from parent/child business accounts.

A B2B eCommerce platform needs to accommodate everyone from resellers, brokers, businesses, and their stakeholders. Even with extensive B2B add-ons, B2C platforms are not optimized for long-term business relationships maintained through unique customer experiences. They’re not designed to ensure businesses are well-informed and their requirements are met before a purchase takes place.

2. Future-proof your Store

While your B2C eCommerce platform may work great today, your requirements can change in the future. This can cost you valuable time in searching and developing workarounds, extensions, or in extreme cases, replatforming.

With an out-of-the-box B2B eCommerces solution, you don’t stay in an endless cycle of scrambling for extensions. Even if your needs change over time, you won’t have to worry if changes to one plugin might impact another one. For example, OroCommerce offers not only B2B-specific features but a CMS, built-in CRM, and SEO optimization tools crucial to any B2C eCommerce platform. 

3. Improve Performance

Since B2C eCommerce platforms are not designed for the demanding needs of B2B, you’ll be constantly adding B2B extensions, which can negatively impact performance. And, as you add more of them, you can expect to spend more time configuring or fixing compatibility issues or bugs within your system. 

If you opt for a SaaS solution such as Shopify or BigCommerce, not only will you encounter a limited B2B feature set, you’ll also be locked into a SaaS vendor that doesn’t allow you to individually optimize your pages. All these factors can have a detrimental effect on the overall performance of your eCommerce store. 

4. Integration

Many popular B2C eCommerce platforms offer a long list of integrations, some of which are B2B and enterprise-focused. Many, however, do not have a powerful API that can share B2B-specific data or accommodate complex integrations.

While a B2C eCommerce system might integrate with a CRM, ERP, PIM, or a procurement punchout system, it won’t fully communicate with complex B2B processes that have also been added on. And, since B2B eCommerce platforms offer B2B features out of the box, data can be accurately synced and transferred between a variety of business systems you already use.

5. Cost-effective

Investing in a platform you won’t use to its full potential is never a good idea. To access B2B tools on a B2C solution, you must first invest in a B2C solution (a poor fit at its core) to potentially make use of their B2B offering.

For online B2C retailers who are exploring new markets, a B2B add-on may be just what the doctor ordered. However, as your business grows, you may be stuck in a position where you always have to tailor your solution to your requirements. Secondly, developers are expensive, whether you’re hiring in-house, working with a freelancer, or an agency, and that’s also something to keep in mind.

6. Roles and access options

Unlike B2C businesses, B2Bs must be able to appeal to many different business structures with different divisions, departments, managers, and employees. Thus, eCommerce systems must accommodate various scenarios ranging from allowing pre-registered customers to order online, to preventing lower-level employees from making purchases. For example, you may be only selling through a network of approved vendors who require access to areas of your store. You may also want businesses to create a primary account with child accounts, and provide them with different access and workflow permissions.

7. Go-to Market Time

Adding endless B2B plugins and extensions on your B2C eCommerce platform is not only hard on your wallet, but takes time, too. In order to present you with the right solution, developers must become familiar with your system and gain an understanding of what you want to accomplish – all which slows down your time to market. All in all, a B2B eCommerce platform saves you time that would otherwise be spent on outlining, developing, and implementing all sorts of B2B customizations.

How to Choose Right Solution for Your Business

The eCommerce industry is experiencing tremendous growth, and most of that growth is observed in B2B eCommerce. It’s no surprise that many B2C eCommerce vendors are positioning themselves as all-inclusive B2B eCommerce solutions. Most of them, however, do not have the necessary capabilities to address the specific needs of B2B sellers and their customers.

Therefore, you’re doing yourself a disservice if you start your B2B eCommerce platform search by exploring B2B add-ons for a B2C platform. Once you spend time going over what your customers really want, you’ll find that a purpose-built B2B eCommerce platform comes with all the features you need, and then some.

Download our free guide that walks you through how the B2B online landscape is changing and how you can take action to start selling online successfully. 

The post B2B eCommerce: Native B2B Platform Vs Repurposing B2C appeared first on .

Headless Commerce

Headless Commerce Success Stories: 4 Brands Solving Tough Challenges with Innovative Tech

Learn more how the concept of headless commerce is giving brands an advantage to meet changing customer and market expectations.

COVID-19

COVID-19 and eCommerce: How the Landscape has Changed for All Retailers

See what eCommerce strategies small businesses can use to see themselves through COVID-19.

Shipping

6 Reasons Why eCommerce Businesses Should Use Shipping Software

See the main benefits of using software to automate your shipping process for online orders.

The post What We’re Reading: Headless, Improving during COVID-19, & Shipping appeared first on .

A difficult part of selling online is managing your product catalog. You could have hundreds or thousands of SKUs to publish across different sales channels like your webstore and marketplaces.

It’s easy then for your product data to become messy and inconsistent. It can be tedious and time-consuming to normalize for all your use cases. This is why many merchants end up settling for subpar product information because it’s simply too much to handle. However, poor product information can lead to other issues like incomplete product listings online.

Here are some common challenges that merchants face with eCommerce product catalog management and what you can do to improve it.

Why Your eCommerce Product Data Matters

Product information is an integral part of providing an optimized online experience. How you manage your product data serves as the foundation of shopping experiences like: 

• Search Engine Optimization (SEO) – How often your products show up in search engine results
• Site navigation – How easy a buyer can navigate through product categories to narrow down their choices
• Site search – Ability for a buyer to search and find products on your site
• Product recommendations – Showing relevant product suggestions to buyers to increase average order values or upsell opportunities 
• Confidence to buy – Giving buyers confidence that your product meets their needs

How you manage your product data also affects important back office operations like:

• Go-to-market time – Be able to publish and update product listings online as needed
• Financial/operating reporting – Ensures accurate reports of sales by SKU, costs by SKU, breakdowns by category, and when it’s time to reorder more product
• Integration – Ability to map product data to your ERP to ensure the item is associated with the right inventory counts or customer orders

So, what gets in the way of properly managing your product data?

5 Common Challenges of eCommerce Catalog Management

Here’s 5 common challenges of managing your eCommerce product catalog. As an eCommerce seller, does any of this sound all too familiar?

1. Keeping product listings updated online
2. Managing product listings across multiple sales channels
3. Normalizing supplier or third-party product data
4. Expanding your product catalog
5. Managing complex product structures like serialized items or kits/assemblies

Keeping Product Listings Updated

Many merchants have to continuously update their SKUs because of constant price changes, newly available products, or other various reasons. Every day, you could spend a significant amount of time fine-tuning your items so that you can list them. This is time taken away from other important tasks such as marketing, operations, and your customers.

Selling Across Multiple Channels

How do you efficiently list the same products across multiple channels like marketplaces or webstores?

Listing products across multiple places is difficult because each channel has its own listing requirements. Amazon’s product categories are different from eBay’s. How you list your product on a marketplace is also different then how you would display them on your branded webstore.

Tailoring listings to each sales channel can take hours, which can slow your go-to market time with products. Product data can easily become messy and still lead to you to making listing mistakes like incomplete information or even listing in the wrong place.  

Dealing with Supplier Data

Your suppliers or other third-party vendors often hand over product data that has bare minimum information and could be missing several item attributes. Data can also be in the wrong format using different spellings or data structures.

Since suppliers don’t sell directly to consumers, they don’t need to standardize their product information the same way that you do. These are nuisances that you must fix before you publish online. Having to clean up or normalize this data is a timely step in the process.

Expanding Your Product Catalog

When your product catalog is already poorly organized, it’s hard to add more SKUs when you need to. You either have to go back and clean up your SKUs, or you have to live with your existing poor product data quality. This predicament can lead to some merchants choosing to not add to their existing catalogs. You may not have the resources or time to fix these types of problems. Unfortunately, this issue can discourage you from growing your business.

Dealing with Complex Product Structures

Depending on the types of items you sell, you could have more complex product data structures than others. For example, a merchant selling diamond engagement rings has to deal with a few challenging structures like:

• Serialized items – Each diamond is a unique item
• Kits/assemblies – An engagement ring consists of a unique diamond, stone setting, and ring band style

Even an apparel company deals with matrix/variant products where one item can come in different sizes and colors. These relationships between your products must be organized and well-represented in your data. If it is not, you can have issues publishing data online and with backoffice operations like inventory counts and financial reporting.

How to Improve Your eCommerce Product Catalog Management

Many of the previous challenges we talked about above affect the quality and consistency of your data. It’s hard to maintain quality data when tailoring data for different sales channels, normalizing data from suppliers, or trying to expand your catalog with new products.

The ability to maintain data quality usually comes back to where you centrally manage all your data. Many merchants often turn to Excel or their eCommerce platform to manage their product. However, these options will fall short if you have a large or a complex online product catalog.

When you’re managing large volumes of SKUs in Excel or your eCommerce platform, it can be overwhelming to establish and maintain a consistent standard. Item data can be up having misspellings, omitted attributes, or flat out wrong descriptions.

Excel wasn’t built for eCommerce catalog management. You aren’t going to have the comprehensive tools you need to update your product data. You’ll only have your employees to rely on to make mass updates and changes, which can easily lead to human error.

Your eCommerce platform can perform basic SKU management, but is not purpose-made for catalog management. It won’t have more comprehensive tools that allow you to import, normalize, and publish data to the rest of your sales channels. eCommerce platforms also don’t help tie product data to advanced inventory management or order fulfillment needs.

Choosing Where to Manage Your Product Data

To solve this issue, merchants can turn to different software solutions to better manage their product data to improve go-to market time, enrich product listings, and efficiently tailor listings to multiple sales channels.

1. Managing Product Data in an ERP

Merchants can manage product data in their ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) system, if you have one. While not all ERPs have the capabilities (especially the legacy ones) to do this, modern ERPs like NetSuite have added product data management capabilities. Your ERP can be a better choice to master your products than Excel or your eCommerce software because they’re then tied closely to financial reporting or any other operational needs. No matter what system they need to be in, your items will start in your ERP. This system turns into your single source of truth for product data.

If using your ERP to store your product information, you can use an integration provider like nChannel to automate your processes like:

• Publishing products from ERP to your eCommerce system or marketplaces
• Pricing updates to product listings online
• Displaying and updating inventory accounts online to avoid overselling
• Associating individual line items to online order fulfillment

2. Investing in a Product Information Management (PIM) System

Merchants can also use Product Information Management (PIM) system as designated software to handle their product data needs. A PIM system centralizes and manages all your product data, no matter where it’s coming from and where it needs to go to. Ideally, it streamlines the process it takes to upload, standardize, and publish your data to your sales channels. You’ll have robust tools that allow you to format data properly and ensure that you always have rich, consistent product information that your buyers are searching for.

PIM systems can vary in price and capabilities. They’re best for merchants who are selling across many (5 or more) marketplaces or have complex needs to clean and normalize data from multiple suppliers. Otherwise, they might not be worth the investment for your business, especially if you already have an ERP or other order management system in place.  

Product Information Management is an important topic for today’s online sellers. Check out more resources:

• Why All eCommerce Merchants Need eCommerce Product Catalog Management
• What is product content management?
• Why You Should Use a PIM as Your Item Master
• How to Increase Sales by Improving Your eCommerce Product Management Strategy

The post Common Challenges of eCommerce Catalog Management and How to Improve appeared first on .

nChannel is excited to welcome NS8 as our newest partner! NS8 is a comprehensive fraud prevention platform that combines behavioral analytics, real-time scoring, and global monitoring to help businesses minimize risk.

Why NS8?

Fight Fraud with Intelligence

NS8 offers an end-to-end protection platform that combines advanced data analytics with real-time scoring to outsmart threats and approve more orders so you can focus on growing your business without the fear of fraud.

NS8 analyzes all visitors and transactions in real time, providing a single score that assesses the fraud risk posed by each user. If a user’s score is suspiciously low, you can use NS8’s automated tools to escalate order investigation and require additional verification. This cuts back on manual review, while ensuring your team can investigate the order before a chargeback occurs. NS8 also seamlessly integrates with industry-leading eCommerce platforms enabling you to begin fighting fraud within minutes!

Learn more about how NS8 can protect your online business!

Notable Features:

• Risk-scoring – Using over 170 factors, NS8 provides a single, actionable score allowing you to easily assess fraud risk at a glance and automate your review process.
  
  
• Real-time data – Continuously analyze each user as they interact with your site, not just until they check out.
  
  
• Automation – Automate order processing workflows using over 70 customizable rulesets so you can create personalized defenses that are dynamic.
  
  
• Ad campaign optimization – Use advanced analytics to identify bad traffic generated by fraud and detect its source. Determine which advertising campaigns are bringing in high-quality traffic and adjust any campaigns that are not attracting real prospects.
  
  
• Live performance monitoring – Know when customers are experiencing site issues and notify your team before unexpected downtimes happen.
  
  
• Extensions – Take advantage of supplemental data and scoring provided by our industry-leading data partners, which is exclusive for customers using the full edition of the NS8 platform.

nChannel + NS8

With nChannel, NS8 customers can fully automate their online store operations and grow their business. Our cloud-based software integrates your eCommerce platform with your ERP/Accounting, POS, and 3PL providers.

nChannel connects your endpoint systems to centralize and facilitate data workflows between them, enabling merchants to automate critical processes such as order fulfillment, inventory synchronization, product catalog management, and supply chain management.

Through integration, nChannel ensures your fraud risk score from NS8 is automatically incorporated into your order fulfillment process in your ERP. With NS8 and nChannel, you can define order routing logic to determine how online orders are fulfilled in your ERP based on their NS8 risk-score.

For example, if an online order from your eCommerce platform receives a high-risk score, we ensure your team receives that data and investigates before fulfilling that item in your ERP.

The post Preventing Order Fraud – nChannel Announces Partnership with NS8 appeared first on .

Supply Chain

Commentary: How Supply Chain Startups are Surviving COVID-19

See the latest update from supply chain start up and how they’re navigating during these times.

Cash Flow

25 Tops to Improve Cash Flow in a Crisis

Check out these top tips to make your cash flow more efficient.

After COVID-19

6 Things Online Retailer Should Do Now to be Ready When the Pandemic is Over

Check out these steps retailers can take now to be ready for recovery from the pandemic.

The post What We’re Reading: Supply Chain, Cash Flow, After COVID-19 appeared first on .

How to Ship

Cheapest Way to Ship

See the best tips for get shipping discounts with major carriers.

Target Ship-From-Store

Target Acquires Tech from Last Mile Startup, Further Enhancing Ship-from-Store Capabilities

Read more about Target’s latest tech acquisition to boost their ship-from-store capabilities

Pivoting to eCommerce

Tips for Small Businesses Pivoting to eCommerce Amid the COVID-19 Crisis

See this guide that helps small businesses pivot to an online sales model during the pandemic to recover revenue.

The post What We’re Reading: Shipping, Target, and Getting Online appeared first on .

Welcome to our brief “how-to” guide on engaging an eCommerce digital agency for software design, development, and other agency services. This guide is designed to help prospective eCommerce agency clients get the most out of their agency engagements and relationships, while ensuring they are an ideal client in their own right.

1.  Understanding the Complexities of eCommerce

Your seemingly “simple” concept might actually present very complex technical challenges to designers and developers. In other words, saying is easier than doing. This is particularly true in the world of eCommerce development, where software is now managing the full transaction, logistics, payment, taxes, shipping, returns, rental returns, recurring payments, etc, etc, etc. Presenting this functionality to users in an experience they enjoy is not simple. 

2. eCommerce is an Investment

Software design and development, in general, are investments. Tangible results in the immediate term vary. It cannot be stressed enough that design and development are iterative processes and it may be on the secondary or tertiary iterations, where clients may see quantifiable returns on their design and development investments. With this in mind, the ideal prospective client will have created a budget range for the engagement with the digital agency, one that should get the client’s application into production (read generating revenue) as a “Minimally Viable Product” (MVP) while also providing for secondary and tertiary projects that can extend features and functionality to enhance revenue. The best engagements are iterative and based on continued partnership and investment, thinking of budgeting through this lens will allow the client to explore more possibilities and ultimately build a better set of software tools. Note: most agencies bill on a “time and materials” basis and hourly rates can range from $100-$300 an hour. The recommendation here is to base budget assumptions at or around $150 an hour. 

3. Trusting Your Partner

You, the prospective client, may be an expert in your field. Realize though, that your specific industry expertise is not necessarily always relevant with regards to eCommerce development. Digital agencies work for many clients and have assuredly gleaned some universalisms along the way. Allow them to implement their expertise. There may be messaging, digital interactions, or whole web pages that you, the prospective client *feel* are critical to your projects overall success…and that just might not be so. A good agency will run all of the assumptions, existing assets, and concepts through user experience testing, and will design and build based on the results. The ideal client will defer to the technologists’ expertise and a dialectic, data-driven process. 

4. How to Choose the Right Digital Agency

Our Chief Revenue Officer at Trellis, Jared Shaner, talks about “F.I.T.” when advising folks on how to choose a digital agency. Fundamentals, Innovation, and Teamwork. Digital agencies typically start out with one or two core fundamental offerings and develop their services from there. Be sure to find out what a given agency’s fundamentals are and where most of their resources are dedicated. Look for those breaking new ground, creating new tools and frameworks, and “innovating” current technologies, methodologies, and processes. Perhaps most importantly, be able to articulate your culture and values, and seek out those who validate them, not just rhetorically, but in practice. This is the basis of real teamwork and successful projects, engagements, and relationships with digital agencies.

5. Driving Value from Your Digital Agency

If you are looking for mere implementers, rethink engaging with an agency. The most valuable resource an agency can provide a prospective client, aside from direct technical expertise, is the business intelligence they’ve gleaned from working with dozens of clients across many different industries, and in some cases, among competing companies. Seek out those that have solved problems similar to yours, those who have worked with your competition, and try and extract as much information (read value) as possible. 

Five easy steps/things to remember and/or consider when preparing for an engagement with an eCommerce agency. Not an exhaustive list by any stretch, but a good start. Feel free to reach out to the Trellis team with any questions. 

About Trellis:

Trellis is a full service eCommerce solution provider that specializes in implementing websites based on popular platforms like Magento, WordPress, Shopify, and BigCommerce. Our capabilities allow us to plan and design a solution that not only meets your specific goals and budget today, but will also scale with you as you grow. Once a site is launched we stick side by side with our clients to help them improve the site and market the site to generate more customers.

The post How to Prepare for an eCommerce Project with an Agency appeared first on .

Retail Roundup

Roundup: Retail, Malls Reopen Slowly, Midsize Players Get Fed Relief

See the latest articles of how retail players are faring among COVID-19 shutdowns and reopenings.

Shop Local

Has COVID-19 made the ‘shop local’ message more real for consumers?

See how the “shop local” movement is getting a boost during COVID-19.

Consumer Behavior

A Look at Changing Consumer Behavior Trends

See the difference between in-store and online commerce trends.

The post What We’re Reading: Retail Reopens, Shop Local, and Consumer Behavior appeared first on .

It doesn’t matter how long you’ve been selling online, there’s always ways to improve your business. Here’s our top 10 tips to grow your store on Shopify.

Start Selling on Social Media

Social media is a must-have for most brands. It’s an important channel to create and foster a dialogue with your customers, whether it’s Facebook, Instagram, or Pinterest. However, social media is more than just a marketing tool. 

Over the past few years, Shopify has added built-in social media like buy buttons that turn these platforms into additional selling channels. Your posts on Facebook, Instagram, and Pinterest can turn into buying opportunities. The best part is that these buy buttons make it simple and convenient for customers to make purchases, without even leaving the social channel itself. Read more about these social media platforms that Shopify turns into sales channels:

• Considering a Shopify Facebook store? Read this first.
• Marketing on Pinterest Means Rethinking the Old Playbook for Social Media
• Tagging and selling products directly from Instagram.

Expand Your Product Line

One way to sell more is to offer more by expanding your product line. This gives you more options to sell to loyal customers or market to new audiences. To make expanding your product line easy, there’s two ways to do it on Shopify:

1. Sell wholesale products. There’s all types of categories like apparel, electronics, shoes, handbags, and jewelry. As the merchant, you can purchase the products from a wholesaler in a large quantity at a discount and then mark up the retail price to your customers. You can start researching for wholesalers in places like Oberlo’s wholesale directory that connects directly with your Shopify store, directories like Worldwide Brands , tradeshows, or go directly to manufacturers themselves.

Check out this guide on how to find and sell wholesale products on Shopify, including how to spot fake wholesalers trying to rip merchants off.

2. Drop ship. Another way to start selling new products is through the practice of drop shipping. It’s a fulfillment process in which merchants buy goods from a vendor who ships them directly to the consumer. The best part is that the vendor remains completely invisible to the consumer. By drop shipping, you don’t have to keep inventory on-hand. Instead, you can sell items without ever actually seeing or shipping them yourself.

Read this beginner’s guide to drop shipping to learn more about this fulfillment process.

Both selling wholesale products and drop shipping can be a great way to expand your product catalog. They allow you try something new before fully committing to it.

Financing Your Growth

Many eCommerce businesses are held back by their lack of access to cash. At any time, sellers need capital to invest in all different aspects of their business like marketing campaigns, new employees, or bulk inventory. While you can turn to your bank for financing, it’s not always the best option.

Recognizing this, Shopify offers their own financing called Shopify Capital. Your eligibility for this program is based on your history on Shopify and will show up in your Admin if you meet their requirements. Eligible merchants can receive either a cash advance or a business loan. Funding can be anywhere between $200 and $1,000,000.

If you don’t meet Shopify’s requirements or need access to more funding, Shopify sellers can also turn to Payability, where you could get up to $250,000 as soon as tomorrow to invest into your online business. Approval and actual funding are based on your account health and sales performance across Shopify and all sales channels.

Try Text Messaging Marketing

We’ll assume that you’re already building an email list to market to. How else can you reach your customers on a regular basis?

Enter text messaging marketing. It can help turn casual browsers on your site into repeat customers. Your shoppers can opt in to receive texts from you, so you can send shoppers back to abandoned carts or send coupon codes. It can complement your email marketing efforts. If you want to learn more, check out Privy’s new SMS texting capability that already works with Shopify.

Use 3D and Augmented Reality (AR) Product Pages

It’s no secret that most of the purchasing decision online is based on your product pages. It’s how potential customers can determine the quality of your product and then what size/color to order. The sophistication of your product pages can play a role in how well you convert traffic into purchases.

Today, clean photography and rich descriptions are table stakes. Leading Shopify sellers are taking it even further by trying out product pages with built-in support for 3D models and video. These tools give your buyers a true sense of the product and the confidence to buy.

Since introducing this capability in 2018, Shopify has reported 3D models in AR can increase your conversion rates by up to 250% on product pages! Learn more about Shopify AR.

Run a Flash Sale

How do you increase sales around holidays or even during slow months? Flash sales.

Merchants often turn to flash sales to generate revenue. They’re exciting and create a sense of urgency for customers to buy right then. They can be used to attract new customers to try a product for the first time or even loyal customers to make an extra purchase.

The good news is that setting up a flash sale in Shopify is relatively easy. You can select your products, set your date and time, and then promote it via email, text or social media.

The challenge is making sure you’re set up on the backend to handle the surge in site traffic and order processing. You don’t want to run a flash sale that crashes your site or causes severe delays in shipping. That’s not a good way to impress your customers.

Read more in this guide to online flash sales to understand what it takes to run a flash sale and avoid common failures.   

Automate Your Shipping Processes

One of the more difficult aspects of selling online is shipping your orders. On top of that, marketplaces like Amazon have conditioned shoppers to always expect fast, accurate, and free shipping too. Customers aren’t always very forgiving when you make a mistake.

It’s easy for the fulfillment process to go wrong. Long delivery times, costly shipping rates, shipping to the wrong address, and shipping the wrong product can all plague your delivery experience.

While you’re not a logistics expert, it’s important improve your fulfillment processes. Guaranteed and accurate delivery can lead to higher conversion rates, positive customer reviews, and repeat purchases from customers.

So, how do you improve them?

1. Invest in a backend system like an ERP – This allows you to track sales, manage inventory, and fulfill items all from a single place. Learn more what an ERP is.

2. Use shipping software – Software like ShipStation can help you print shipping labels, compare shipping rates, and track your packages.

3. Outsource to a 3PL – A third-party logistics company (3PL) can take care of warehouse management, transportation of goods, reporting, and forecasting for you. 3PLs can leverage their relationships and volume discounts for affordable, fast shipping for your customers.

4. Integrate Shopify and your ERP/3PL – Connect Shopify with your ERP/3PL/shipping software to automate your shipping processes. Automation accelerates your processes and avoids costly mistakes like shipping to the wrong address.

Create a Rewards and Loyalty Program

Customer retention is key to the long-term health of any online business. You spend a lot of time, effort, and resources to acquire a customer. So, you should always continue to market and sell to them. It’s a cost-effective way to boost sales. Existing customers can also be an effective way to refer to new customers.

Creating a loyalty program is about engaging and interacting with your existing customer base through efforts like:

• Referrals
• Pop-ups
• Loyalty points
• Exclusive marketing campaigns and sales
• Personalized perks

Shopify has some great apps to help run your loyalty program like:

• Smile Rewards
• Swell
• Growave
• Bold Loyalty

Sell Internationally

How far is your market reach? Shopify merchants can also consider selling internationally to reach new audiences. This strategy can work well for aspirational, luxury, or lifestyle brands that offer unique items or a product that a consumer can’t imagine living without. If your target customer can’t find similar items in-store, they’re probably willing to search internationally for it. These types of products can span many verticals such as consumer goods, beauty, fashion, athletic, leisure wear, baby, personal goods, and home goods.

Merchants today can take advantage of new technology that removes many of the barriers to international selling. There’s platforms like Flavor Cloud that give you access to reliable and cost-effective shipping. Shopify also makes it easy to create multiple storefronts that are tailored to different countries to accommodate for local languages, currencies, marketing campaigns, and product lists.

Sell on Marketplaces

Along the lines of expanding sales channels, Shopify users can also turn to marketplaces like Amazon and eBay to reach new audiences. Amazon and eBay are two-leading marketplaces for a reason. They offer a convenient, one-stop shopping place for consumers. They make it easy to compare brands and prices all at once.

Recognizing this, Shopify makes it easy for sellers to sync their products in Shopify right to Amazon or eBay. From your Shopify store, you can centrally manage your inventory and orders across all your online sales channels. Read more about Shopify and their marketplace integration.

There you have it! What tip do you want to try out first? Have you had success in growing your Shopify store in other ways? Let us know in the comments below!

The post 10 Ways to Grow Your Shopify Store Fast appeared first on .

You can’t always ship an entire order at once. You might even prefer to ship items separately to ensure they arrive on-time. Some items could ship from a service like Fulfillment by Amazon (FBA) while others are fulfilled from your own warehouse.

Fulfillment of a single order in multiple shipments is referred to as partial shipment. While often necessary, it’s difficult to monitor on the backend of your operations. How do you track partial shipments in your systems? How do you ensure orders are mark completed only once all items are fulfilled?

Before executing partial shipment, you’ll need to know what the process is, why it’s important to get it right, and the best way to do it.  

What is Partial Shipment

Let’s start with the basics. A partial shipment is when you deliver a single order in multiple shipments. Partial shipments are necessary when:

• One item or another in an order is on backorder
• An item at a certain warehouse is delayed in delivery
• Shipping items from multiple warehouses for faster delivery

Partial Shipment Example

Here’s an example of a partial shipment.

Imagine that you’re a pencil manufacturer. You get an order for a 1,000 yellow #2 pencils. But, when you go to fulfill the order, you realize that you only have 600 yellow #2 pencils in-stock. How do you handle an order that you can’t fulfill completely?

You’ve talked with the customer and you agree that you can do a partial shipment. You can ship the 600 you have on hand now. Then, once you get the 400 back in inventory, you can ship those in a second order.

Why Merchants Need Partial Shipment Capabilities

Partial shipment capabilities help you create a better customer experience. In the example above, the merchant would lose the entire order if they couldn’t do partial shipments. They would have turn the customer away at check out because they couldn’t fulfill the entire order at once. This is a loss of business, and possibly a customer for life.

Partial shipment can also ensure that you’re meeting delivery times. For a single order, you could need to ship inventory from multiple warehouses based on availability and proximity to the customer. You don’t want to have to wait to receive each item individually at one warehouse before sending the entire order to the customer. Instead, you can send separate packages from each warehouse that arrive at the same time on your customer’s doorstep.

Shipping items separately can also protect you in cases where there’s an unforeseen delivery delay at one of the warehouses. You don’t want one item to hold up the entire order. Your customer will be more understanding if they receive most of their order, instead of none of it.

Whatever the case is, it’s important to notify the customer that orders containing several items may ship separately. You should always be transparent and manage their expectations. In the example above, a customer should be able to choose whether they still want to place the order.

Why Partial Shipments are Difficult

From a customer experience perspective, partial shipments seem like a necessary part of fulfillment. However, some merchants can struggle properly managing partial shipments on the backend. It isn’t always straightforward how to manage them when you have to consier:

• Tracking the shipping status of individual items on a single order
• Marking an order complete ONCE all items are delivered
• Notifying customers what individual items shipped while others are still processing
• Fulfilling the open order when inventory does become available, before other incoming orders
• Sending partial shipment sales invoices

To properly manage these processes, you need in-depth visibility into your inventory and fulfillment processes to coordinate order and inventory data across all systems involved, which can include your eCommerce platform, ERP and/or accounting system.

It’s a lot of work to police these types of orders manually. It’s easy to make mistakes like prematurely marking orders complete or forgetting to ship part of the order that’s still unfulfilled. Instead of managing this manually, you can turn to technology to help automate the process.

How to Automate Partial Shipments

In the case of partial shipments, you need technology that can treat individual items separately on a single order. This is often referred to as a “splitting” an order. It allows you to split an order into multiple line items so you can create separate labels and track shipping of each individual items. This also ensures that you don’t lose the parent-child relationship of the individual items to the single order. Once all line items are fulfilled, you can mark the order as complete.

Small merchants can use shipping software like ShipStation to properly spilt their orders. This allows you to create separate shipments within a single order with each shipment containing its own details, tags, notes, notifications, and packing slips. Mid-size or Enterprise merchants you can also spilt orders within an ERP system like NetSuite, Microsoft Dynamics, Sage or others.  

The challenge is that you need to share this order status and shipment info from your shipping software or ERP to your eCommerce platform. As updates to the order status of each line item become available, you want your eCommerce platform to reflect those changes. This ensures you can accurately communicate with customers throughout the fulfillment process. It also gives your internal team visibility into the order status.

To automate partial shipment updates between multiple systems, you can use an integration platform like nChannel to automate the movement of your order and inventory data. System integration allows you to create order workflows to update inventory quantities, approve, post, and track partial shipments, and correctly mark orders complete when all items have been fulfilled.

What to Do Next

Partial shipment is an advanced, but necessary process that you can use to quickly and properly fulfill online orders. To see how else, you can improve your fulfillment processes, check out these helpful articles:

• Distributed Order Management as a Competitive Advantage – See what practices and technologies merchants need to fulfill merchandise orders in ways that meet today’s complex business requirements.
• What is a 3PL and Why Are They Important to Retailers?
• Why Your eCommerce Delivery Strategy is More Important than Ever
• Are Returns Killing Your Online Store’s Profitability?
• Drop Shipping 101: An Introductory Drop Shipping Guide
• eCommerce: How to Ship Your Products

The post Everything You Need to Know about Partial Shipment appeared first on .

Forecasting Inventory

How to Forecast Inventory Demand with Sell-Through Rate

To prevent over or understocking, sellers should learn how to forecast demand by using their sell-through rate.

Virtual Selling

Is virtual selling set to take off?

While retailers have been experimenting with virtual selling, see how this tactic is becoming even more important as a response to COVID-19.

Demand Planning

How to Forecast the Unforecastable: Demand Planning In the Time of COVID-19

See how you can manage the impact of COVID-19 with approaching demand planning by using these steps throughout each phase of the disruption.

The post What We’re Reading: Demand Forecasting and Virtual Selling appeared first on .

Almost all merchants are facing these problems together, and many are sharing their insights with others. To help, we put together our top list of tips to help your online business navigate the unique challenges of this time.

1. Increasing Internal Communication

During any time of crisis, communication is key. If you haven’t done so already, it’s best to establish a regular cadence of communication. At the very least, teams should meet weekly, and in some cases, daily. Even if these meetings become short, they’re critical in sharing regular and updated information across the organization. When everyone is aligned on goals and challenges, then your team is prepared to find the best solutions together.

On top of the need for more communication, most merchants have also been forced to move to remote work. If you or your team are struggling with making it work, here are some great articles about working from home:

• Five Ways to Manage Business Coronavirus Concerns When Employees Can’t Work from Home
• Four Ways Your Business Can Support Remote Workers

2. Focus On What’s Working

For many, this outbreak upended many of your planned marketing campaigns, product launches, or events. With an unstable economy, consumers are changing their spending habits too. So, how does your team decide what to focus on now?

Take a look at your organization and identify what is working and focus on that. You might see an increase in conversions in one marketing channel over another. Recognize that and allocate resources accordingly. It might be best to simplify your operations by focusing on your essential products over experimenting with new lines.

When it’s harder to come by new customers, it’s also a good time to focus on your current loyal customers. How can you provide the most value for those you know are already committed to your brand?

For example, I love the outdoor brand United by Blue (UBB) and have always been impressed with their transparent communication with customers. In this case, a personal letter from their CEO last week gave me deep insight into their operations right now, which I appreciated. I responded by placing an order because I knew the positive impact it would have on their business, not just because of the discount offered.

By the way, this isn’t the first time I’ve been impressed by UBB. Check out they used a fulfillment misstep to make their brand even stronger.

3. Be relevant to customers

COVID-19 affects everyone in some way or another. For most, it’s an extremely frustrating and confusing time. Be aware that consumers are taking in a lot of information right now – most of it overwhelming. You need to consider how your brand, products, and messaging fits into the “new normal” of social distancing.

For some, this may mean moving up planned product launches and holding off on others. For example, apparel companies should be thinking about lines that focus on comfy, stay at home clothes versus your next outfit for vacation. Recognizing this, many fashion brands are already making the switch to work from home clothes.

Before you hit the publish button on anything, use yourself as a gauge as to whether you’re crossing the line. You are also going through these same hardships. Would your initiative be helpful to you right now? Would you consider it insensitive?

As we navigate these first several weeks, I’ve seen many brands take a step back from selling, and instead are focusing on education or direct COVID-19 relief efforts. Here are two great examples of companies putting the overall being of others first.

• Rogue Fitness
• Rothy’s

4. Setting Customer Expectations

Along with being relevant to customers, it’s also important to properly set expectations for when they do interact with your brand. If you aren’t operating as normal, customers are most likely affected in some way. You should be transparent about what could be different. For example, shipments will probably be delayed or support hours could be longer than usual.

The good news is that most customers will be understanding, especially if you communicate early and often. Just like with your internal team, you need to keep a regular dialogue with customers and how their interactions with your brand might look a little different right now. Remember a customer experience now can still make or break whether they buy from you again. For brands who do it right, they’ll come out of this situation with stronger customer relationships than ever.

5. Solidify Your Supply Chain

Another critical disruption in your business right now is your supply chain, especially if you rely on international partners. Border and warehouse closings can seriously affect your ability to procure raw materials and produce your product. If you haven’t done so already, it’s critical to identify the weakest point in your supply chain. Or, what piece is the most likely to fail during these times?

After identifying that one (or few) critical weak points, think about how your organization can create backup and redundancy for it. How can you be proactive in solving for it? This could mean reaching out to additional manufacturers or other vendors now. If you do need them, you’ll already have the relationships in place.

Your supply chain is essential to your business operations, no matter what the circumstances are. Weak points in your process could ruin your business even during normal times. Use this as a proactive approach to strengthen your business for now and the future.

• Combatting eCommerce Supply Chain Disruptions and Steps You Can Take to Minimize Impact
• How to Forecast Inventory Demand with Sell-Through Rate

6. Take Care of Your Team

Last, but certainly not least, don’t forget to take care of your own team. The best way to help your customers is to ensure the health and safety of your own team above all else.

We hope these tips help your business navigate these uncertain times. We’d love to hear what else your business is doing to stay afloat.

For a comprehensive list of resources, check out our one-stop COVID-19 resource for merchants.

The post How to Navigate Your Online Business Through COVID-19 appeared first on .

According to Forrester, US B2B eCommerce is expected to reach $1.8 trillion and account for 17% of all B2B sales in the US by 2023. B2B eCommerce is on pace to be twice the size of B2C eCommerce.

However, many B2B sellers are still in their infancy for building out strategic online channels. So far most have been slow to adopt eCommerce best practices. If there’s one thing to learn from B2C selling, it’s how crucial it is to choose the right platform to power your online business.

This article aims to show B2B merchants the role eCommerce technology plays in building a user-friendly online experience and how to evaluate which B2B eCommerce platform is best for your business.

Why Your B2B eCommerce Platform Is Important

B2B eCommerce has been around for over 20 years. However, their online experiences tend to not be up to today’s standards set by B2C. B2B merchants have been slow to refocus the purpose of their webstore. Many B2B sites were first thought to replace customer service reps for interacting with existing customers. Today, B2B eCommerce sites are strategic channels for acquiring new customers and driving revenue.

With the new strategy in mind, B2B merchants have a lot to learn from the B2C industry. B2B buyers expect similar shopping experiences as they would on consumer sites. They start product research online with generic queries, use mobile touchpoints like smartphone and tablets, and expected detailed product content. Overall, they’re looking for a straightforward, user-friendly experience in which they can mostly serve themselves.

It’s more than just having the best products and lowest prices. Buyers are looking for the best experience online. To power that experience you want, B2B sellers must choose the right eCommerce platform. And you’re going to need something more powerful than just a plug-in to your ERP.

How to Choose Your B2B eCommerce Platform

There are all types of platforms to choose from to run your B2B site. They all have their own advantages and disadvantages. As you compare platforms though, here are some important areas you must consider:

1. Functionality

B2B online selling has its own unique challenges different than B2C. B2B merchants deal with longer buying cycles, needed purchase approval, budget availability, large order quantities, recurring orders, and more. Your platform must meet complex needs that B2B sellers deal with daily.

2. Responsive Design

B2B buyers also shop across different devices such as smartphones and tablets. Your web content should render properly across multiple devices sizes to make it easy to research products, check prices, and make purchases.

Learn more about the challenges of mobile B2B eCommerce.

3. Self-Service

Buyers want to be able to find information and solve problem themselves. Your eCommerce experience should give them the ability to do that. Customers should have access to shipping information, order tracking, quote approvals, and any other features that help them manage their account themselves.

4. Customer Specific Pricing

A unique need of B2B eCommerce is being able to offer customer-specific pricing and product catalogs. Unlike B2C, your price can vary by who the customer is. Your platform should give you the ability to list different prices for each of your customers.

5. Payment Options

B2B buyers purchase differently from B2C customers. Business typically buy larger orders and on a recurring basis. Your platform needs to have flexible payment options like paying one or several invoices, or partial payment.

6. Product Catalog Management

Product information management is one of the biggest challenges for B2B merchants. Your product content can easily get out of hand and disorganize when you’re dealing with dozens of product catalogs in all different formats from your suppliers. It’s challenging to normalize this data and make it ready for product listings on your website. Be sure to vet how your eCommerce platform handles complex product catalog needs. In some cases, you might need to invest in a Product Information Management (PIM) in addition to your eCommerce platform.

B2B eCommerce Platform Types

When evaluating eCommerce software, you’ll often come across terms such as open source, SaaS or cloud-based. It’s important to know the difference between these platform types as it affects your functionality, total cost of ownership, and how you interact with your platform’s technology.

SaaS vs Open Source eCommerce Platforms

Here’s a quick overview of each platform type:

SaaS eCommerce

Software as a Service (SaaS) is a software licensing and delivery model in which software is licensed on a subscription basis. SaaS software is also referred to as web-based or hosted software since it’s hosted and maintained in the cloud by a third-party. Your subscription allows you access to the software via a web browser.

Notable SaaS-based B2B eCommerce platforms include EvolutionX, BigCommerce, Shopify Plus, Zoey Commerce, Core DNA, and Elastic Path.

Open source eCommerce

Open source software is licensed to users and allows them to view, change, and distribute its source code for your own purpose. In this way, open source software is developed in a public and collaborative way. It allows for heavy customization by end users.

Notable open source B2B eCommerce platforms include OroCommerce and Magento 2. OroCommerce was actually created by the same team that founded and built Magento. Their new platform became the first purposefully built from the ground up open source B2B eCommerce platform.

Read a more in-depth comparison of SaaS vs open source eCommerce software.

Each platform’s architecture will affect your eCommerce software in these main areas:

1. Out-of-the-box Functionality

Since SaaS eCommerce software is hosted and maintained by the provider, they will provide the most out-of-the-box eCommerce functionality. This a better option if you’re trying eCommerce for the first time, need a quick launch time, or don’t have your own IT team. You can utilize pre-built themes and won’t need to start your site from scratch.

On the flip side, you could be limited to the functionality available. These platforms can fall short for B2B merchants who need complex or customized functionality to meet their B2B requirements.

2. Customization

An open source  eCommerce platform gives you access to modify the platform’s code. This gives your in-house or agency developers endless creative freedom when designing and configuring your B2B website.

However, working with open source eCommerce platforms can mean implementation times of 3 – 7 months before you get up and running. Creative freedom means you’ll be building your site from scratch and you’ll need to make several decisions before launching.

3. Maintenance

With hosted or SaaS-based eCommerce platforms, the software provider takes care of maintaining the platform you’re on. They’ll make automatic updates and upgrades. If something crashes, it’s their responsibility to fix it. Your subscription rate covers both your access to the software and the providers ongoing maintenance of it.

For open source platforms, you have complete ownership over your software. This includes procuring and maintaining the servers that host your webstore. It’s your responsibility to monitor and fix with any issues you have with broken software.

Deciding on which type is best is a matter of how much control you want versus the added responsibilities.

4. Security and PCI Compliance

Webstore security, including PCI compliance, is a must for eCommerce sellers. It ensures that you’re safeguarding your customers’ info, including payment card information.

Depending on your platform type, this could be included in your responsibilities. Most cloud-based platforms include overall security and PCI compliance since they will secure the data is on their servers. For open source solutions, the B2B seller is in charge of making sure that all requirements for PCI compliance and other security concerns are met.

Be sure to ask the eCommerce provider how site security PCI compliance works.

5. Costs

Lastly, each platform’s costs add up differently.

For open source eCommerce platforms, you’ll be able to download the software for free, but you’ll need to set up and pay for licensing, hosting, security, and any design work by an agency or someone similar. These projects can have larger upfront investments in order to get started.

For fully-hosted, cloud-based SaaS, you typically pay a monthly fee that covers hosting, security, maintenance, and support (which could help lower costs). You might still utilize an agency to help with design work.

Understand what services you’re paying for and how it affects your investment.

6. Integration

B2B merchants should also consider how your eCommerce platform will integrate with your other systems such as your ERP, POS, PIM or supplier databases. Integration connects your systems so you can sync data and automate processes such as order fulfillment, inventory synchronization, product catalog syndication and more.

Without integration, you’ll be stuck manually entering online orders, inventory counts, and more between your systems. This can slow down your processes and is prone to errors.

When searching for a new platform consider how it will work with your ER or other backend systems. Can it easily handle information that comes for your suppliers? Some eCommerce platforms are easier to integrate than others. A cloud-based platform with a strong API will be easier to integrate than a legacy or proprietary (unique to you) website.

Ask your eCommerce provider about integration upfront. You don’t want to install a whole new eCommerce platform to find out that you can’t integrate it with your ERP after the project is done. It’ll be a waste of your time and money.

Learn more about how to tell if your business needs eCommerce automation.

Other eCommerce Platform Approaches

• In-House – It’s always an option to build your site completely in-house. While homegrown sites give you complete control and ownership, they can be cumbersome and costly to maintain. In-house IT projects can easily lose sight of requirements, project timelines, and budget.
• Headless Commerce – While the idea of headless software is not new, headless commerce is becoming a more pragmatic strategy for the average merchant. Headless commerce decouples the front-end and back-end technology for your website.In other words, the presentation layer that handles your content and product is separated from the technology that allows customers to checkout and pay. In the evolving eCommerce industry, headless commerce might be the best way to adapt to your content when new trends come along like social, video and voice shopping.

Choosing a B2B eCommerce Platform

Choosing the right eCommerce platform for your business takes time and research. It’s an investment in in the long-term growth of your business. Looking at the high-level ways to compare platforms should start your research in the right direction.

Keep reading more about B2B eCommerce best practices:

• B2B eCommerce Best Practices You Should Know About
• B2B Online Selling Challenges (and How to Overcome Them)
• B2B eCommerce Trends: What Trends B2B Sellers Need to Know About
• How to Navigate B2B eCommerce: Go-to-Guide for Manufacturers and Distributors Who Want to Sell Online

The post How to Choose the Best B2B eCommerce Platform for Your Business appeared first on .

Meeting Customer Needs

Are retailers nimble enough to give consumers what they need and want right now?

The ability to connect with consumers is more reliant on digital technology than ever before. Are retailers up for the challenge?

Digital Transformation

How retailers can add the human touch to digital transformation

See how retailers can best blend the physical and digital within their stores and customer experiences.

Selling Online

Don’t open an online store (until you read this): The reality of eCommerce

Read this honest advice about taking the necessary precautionary measures when opening your own eCommerce business.

The post What We’re Reading: Humanity in Retail and Reality of eCommerce appeared first on .

Over half (57%) of consumers say social media like Facebook influences their shopping decisions. Shopify is taking note and they’re make it easier to set up shop on Facebook and integrate it with their software.

A few years ago, Shopify released an app called Shopify Facebook Store that allows merchants to set up a fully integrated store on Facebook. Expanding your selling to social media sites can be an excellent tactic to increase traffic to your online store, improve engagement with your Facebook fans, and increase sales.

But, selling on Facebook may not be a tactic that everyone should use.

Let’s dive into how the Shopify Facebook app could help your business, and why you should (and shouldn’t) consider using it.

Benefits of a Shopify Facebook Store

There are three main ways a Shopify Facebook Store can help grow your business.

1) Increase brand awareness using typical social indicators (likes, shares, promotions, etc.).

2) Increase sales by putting your products where your customers already are. 78% of American consumers say they’ve discovered products on Facebook.

3) Create an online store with fewer resources and less time than building out a custom online store.

It isn’t a good idea to seek all these benefits equally. You should prioritize them and focus on what you consider as most important. And, remember what is best for your competitor may not be best for you.

Questions You Should Ask Before Selling on Facebook

If you’re considering adding a Facebook store to your online selling sttategy, ask yourself the following questions:

Do you already have an online store? If so, think about the impact a Facebook Store will have. Will you be distracting your customers from your main storefront or will you be opening yourself to new markets?

If you don’t have an online store yet, what is your long-term strategy? Creating a Facebook Store can be a low friction way to get started, but what about the future? Where do you want to be one year from now?

It’s important to consider the difference between an “owned” and “rented” web properties. If you build your own website, that’s an “owned” property. You call the shots. You decide the strategic direction.

A Facebook page is “rented” (even if it’s free). If Facebook decides they want to shut you down for any reason, that’s their prerogative. Maybe they decide to disable Facebook pages for strategic reasons. Maybe they want to start charging $1000/month for one. Neither are likely, but the point is the same. You don’t own your Facebook store. You are at their mercy.

When considering your long-term strategy, I do not recommend you build a company on borrowed land. Eventually you’ll need to focus on your own web property. That said, a Facebook store could have some significant tactical and/or short-term benefits.

What is your goal for Facebook? Are you trying to increase sales or increase awareness of your brand? A Facebook store can remove barriers to sales (your customer doesn’t even need to leave Facebook). It can also distract them, if you’re trying to ultimately bring them to your online store. Be clear about your intentions.

Is the Shopify Facebook Store the best approach for you? Shopify is fully integrated with Facebook so product details, images, and inventory sync automatically with Shopify, much like how nChannel helps you integrate Shopify with your business systems.

What other channels are you selling in?  What about marketplaces like Amazon or eBay? Do you have brick-and-mortar stores? Like any facet of your online selling strategy, your Facebook store will not live in a vacuum.

Getting Started with a Shopify Facebook Store

Creating your new Shopify Facebook Store is relatively easy, especially if you’re already familiar with Shopify. Look at this quick reference for the necessary steps to set up a Shop on your Facebook Page. Briefly, it looks about like this.

1) First, check out their Facebook app page on Shopify’s marketplace.

2) Once logged in to Shopify, connect your Facebook account to create the tab on your Facebook page.

3) Load your product data and use Shopify how you otherwise would (including setting up payment and fulfillment options).

4) Run Facebook Ads by following this step by step guide.

Whether you’re trying to get off the ground quickly as a new business or expanding what you’ve already built, there is very little friction.

Consider the Future

The long-term benefit of using Shopify, with or without Facebook, is that it gives you a platform for growing your business over time. There’s an eclectic marketplace of apps for improving how you use Shopify. It’s also a highly familiar, highly supported platform.

Be sure to consider what happens when you become successful. You’re going to expand. You’ll likely add new channels. You’ll need to start using platforms like an ERP or start implementing advanced fulfillment options, like drop shipping.

You won’t be able to ride Shopify alone the entire way there.

Continue to Improve Your Shopify Store

Check out these articles on how to further improve your Shopify webstore.

• 3 Ways to Integrate NetSuite with Shopify
• How to Choose a Shopify-ERP Solution
• Shopify Capital and Shopify Capital Alternatives
• Shopify vs Etsy: Should You Sell on a Marketplace or Webstore?
• Shopify Adds New Multi-Location Inventory Capabilities: What it Means for Your Business
• Shopify Multiple Stores: How to Overcome Common Challenges
• Shopify’s Import Product Features: Why It Falls Short for Multichannel Merchants
• How to Find and Sell Wholesale Products on Shopify
• 5 Shopify SEO Problems & Tips To Solve Them
• Top 5 Shopify Shipping Apps

For even more articles about Shopify, click the “Shopify” tag link below to see a full list

The post Considering a Shopify Facebook Store? Read this first. appeared first on .

No matter what your situation is, we hope to cover your top options when it comes to successfully shipping online orders.

eCommerce Shipping Options

Online fulfillment takes the organization of all the people, processes, and technology needed to deliver an order to a customer. This includes everything from your online checkout processes, payment provider, and order management system to how you pick, pack, and ship items. A lot can go wrong from the time an order is placed then shipped.

Unless you’re Amazon, you probably don’t specialize in logistics either. Depending on your situation though, you have several options when it comes to improving your fulfillment processes.

1. Shipping Software

Shipping software helps retailers import, organize, and process all their online orders for fast and reliable shipping. They help you create and print shipping labels and compare carrier rates. Shipping software is an affordable way to take care of the tedious part of domestic shipping, while ensuring you’re using the most cost-effective carriers.

If you’re a small business, shipping software might be all you need. If you’re a high-volume seller, you’ll most likely use shipping software alongside your ERP or other technology used to pick, pack, and ship items.

A few popular shipping software options are:

• ShipStation
• Shippo
• Ordoro
• ShippingEasy
• Stamps.com

2. Integrating your ERP

If you have an ERP, consider system integration software to connect it to your eCommerce platform, 3PL provider, or shipping software. System integration platforms enable merchants to sync data and automate processes between their systems like online order processing, inventory synchronization, and financial reporting. System integration keeps your data accurate and accelerates daily processes like order fulfillment.

For example, without integration, merchants often hand-key an online order from their eCommerce platform into an ERP for processing and then hand-key shipping/tracking data back to the eCommerce platform to complete the process. This can be slow and prone to errors like mistyping a SKU number or shipping address.

If you’re experiencing an influx of orders and slow fulfillment processes, integration could be the best solution for now to ensure timely and accurate deliveries.

Learn more about how nChannel automates order processing for your online business.

3. Outsourcing to a Third-party Logistics (3PL) Provider

Realizing that most retailers aren’t going to specialize in logistics, 3PLs, or third-party logistic providers, offer a way to outsource either part or all your fulfillment process such as warehouse management, transportation of goods, reporting and inventory forecasting, etc. There are many different types of 3PLs that serve different needs. Some 3PLs will specialize by industry or area of logistics.

Merchants use 3PLs because you don’t need to incur the cost to specialize in logistics. Instead, you can benefit from a 3PL who can leverage relationships and volume discounts that you as a merchant couldn’t otherwise achieve. Along those lines, 3PLs also save retailers from investment in warehouses, staff, technology, and transportation. Retailers can opt out of this responsibility and instead focus on core operations and customer experience.

Popular 3PLs include:

• Fulfillment by Amazon (FBA)
• DHL eCommerce
• Newgistics
• Rakuten Super Logistics
• Red Stag Fulfillment
• eFulfillment Service

Learn more about 3PLs here:

• What is a 3PL and Why Are They Important to Retailers?
• Fulfillment by Amazon (FBA) Alternatives
• Is FBA Worth the Cost?

4. Drop shipping

Drop shipping is a fulfillment process in which merchants buy goods from a vendor (like a manufacturer or wholesaler) who ships them directly to the consumer who bought them from the merchant. Here’s how it works:

1. Merchants establish business relationships with vendors that carry products they want to sell. If selling in smaller quantities, merchants buy from wholesalers on an as-need basis.
2. Merchants offer these products either on their online stores.
3. When a customer places an order, the vendor is notified of the purchase and charges you the wholesale price of the product
4. The vendor is then responsible for shipping the product to the customer.

The best part of this process is that the vendor is completely invisible to the customer. The product appears to be shipped from you the merchant. Drop shipping differs from traditional fulfillment process in that you don’t have to keep inventory on-hand. Instead, the vendor represents your stock of inventory. You only purchase from them when you sell an item.

Drop shipping allows you to sell items without ever actually seeing or shipping the item yourself. This becomes a very easy and attractive fulfillment process for merchants, especially if you’re trying to quickly launch a new online store or diversify your product line.

If you think drop shipping sounds like a good solution for you, read our Drop Shipping 101 Guide. 

5. International Shipping

The international shipping experience for consumers today can range from incredibly simple and satisfying to incredibly frustrating. And, most of the experience depends on how the merchant sets up their shipping processes. How do you prepare your operations for international fulfillment?

One of the first steps is finding a technology partner that will guide you through the setup and launch process of international shipping, and is a complete solution. There are a lot of moving parts and government regulations to wade through, but a good partner can handle all of it. This allows you to focus on your product line and customers.

The other step is to speak with your fulfillment provider, usually a 3PL. Most of the best international shipping solutions offer an integration with any 3PL, so you should let them know what your plans are and how you will be launching your international shipping plan. 

Lastly, savvy merchants are now including the customs and duties fees at checkout. This leads to a smoother experience as the fees are usually lower and can speed up delivery times as local customs offices don’t need to determine the fees. 

Read through our Q&A with international shipping provider FlavorCloud to learn more about the complexities of international shipping.

Learning from Others

Recognizing the recent challenges of online fulfillment, many software vendors, service providers, and merchants are offering their expertise. One of our favorite resources currently is this panel discussion with direct-to-consumer brands and how they’re overcoming supply chain challenges due to COVID-19. Listen to the full panel session here: BVA Virtual Conference – How is the Coronavirus Impacting the Back-End of DTC Businesses?

The post eCommerce: How to Ship Your Products appeared first on .

Shipping

3PL (Third Party Logisitics): Everything You Need to Find the Right Shipping Provider

Learn everything you need to know to select the right 3PL for your business, and avoid nightmare shipping scenarios.

eCommerce Sales

U.S. eCommerce Sales Up 25% Due to COVID-19, E-grocery Doubles

See what product categories are seeing increases in online sales.

Marketing

Amid COVID-19, Marketing Changes Shape

See best practices when communicating with customers during this difficult time.

The post What We’re Reading: Shipping, eCommerce Sales, & Marketing appeared first on .

The idea of replatforming your eCommerce store strikes fear in most merchants. It appears too risky. There’s seemingly so much that can go wrong during the process. But, avoiding a migration to a new platform for the wrong reasons can hurt your online business in the long run.

By sticking with your old technology, you won’t be able to provide the experience that your customers demand. You could be wasting thousands of dollars trying to fix the same problems over and over again. You could be holding your business back from growth.

To help you build confidence to take on this initiative, we’ve put together a list of common replatforming fears and how to avoid them. Put your mind at ease and don’t be afraid to grow your business by upgrading your eCommerce platform.   

Common Fears of eCommerce Replatforming and How to Avoid Them

Many merchants have read and heard too many horror stories of replatforming projects going horribly wrong. We’re here to tell you that it doesn’t have to be that way!

While not ALL migration projects are painless, you can prepare yourself for a successful one. Here’s how to avoid some of the common fears of replatforming.

Fear: You’re not sure if you really need to replatform.

It can be difficult to be 100% sure that migrating to a new platform is in the best interest of your business. You tell yourself that you can put up with a few problems here and there because they seem better than a migration project.

However, these problems can start to pile up. Your outdated software lacks the features you need to keep up with new customer demands. You’re often spending too much time and money fixing bugs and maintaining your software, instead of improving your customer experience.

This is an especially timely topic as Magento 1’s platform reaches end of life in June 2020. Whether you move to Magento 2 or a platform like Shopify Plus, your business must prepare for an eCommerce migration. In this case, the answer to whether to migrate or not, is yes. The reality is that Magento 1 is outdated and all services providers will eventually stop supporting it.

Solution: Take an honest look at your business. Are you showing any of these signs that you should replatform? No matter how old or new your site is, an upgrade can be the best solution for the long run and healthy growth of your online business.

As you make a strong case for a migration, it’s also critical to have total buy-in from all your internal stakeholders. You need their support to make projects like these happen. If everyone isn’t bought in, a project might not ever be fully realized.

Fear: I’ve invested too much into my current platform to switch now.

A common pushback among organizations is that your team has already invested too much time and money into your platform to switch now. Is it worth it to seemingly throw all that hard work away?

Solution: This is a real objection to a migration project, and a hard one to overcome. While it’s true that you’ve put a lot of effort into your current platform, the reality is that you do have major pain points causing you to evaluate other solutions.

Try looking at this decision from the long-term, especially from a cost perspective. Some of those pain points aren’t going to go away, they may even get worse. By not fixing them, you’re still going to waste money or time trying to overcome your platform’s challenges, instead of solving your customers’ problems.

Undertaking a migration project means more costs upfront, but the goal should be to significantly improve your performance and costs for the future with a new platform.

Fear: Migration services will cost too much.

eCommerce migrations require extensive knowledge of both your current and new platform. Most merchants don’t have the time or talent in-house to migrate their data themselves. Therefore, you’re going to need to work with a partner to migrate your store(s).

When working with third-party partners, you might worry that projects will go off the rails with continued scope increases and on-the-fly customizations. This can result in projects that start off within budget and quickly exceed it by hundreds or thousands of dollars.

Solution: Cost-effective projects are all about choosing the right partner and understanding your project scope. Your partner should take detailed requirements of your data migration needs upfront and these should be reflected in your contract. Make sure you read and understand your project scope and contract so if anything does come up during your project, you won’t be surprised.

When a merchant and a partner are misaligned on the project at the beginning, budget is usually wasted overcoming those misunderstandings. Be diligent in the beginning to understand the process and what variables lead your project to be on budget.  

Fear: Your migration project will take too long.

A common complaint is that migration projects take longer than expected. You think that a migration should take just a few hours or days, but then your project ends up lasting months or a year. While project timelines vary case by case, you shouldn’t be waiting reasonably longer than planned.

Solution: First, don’t wait until the last minute to migrate your store. If you need to be migrated and running on your new store in just a few days, these probably aren’t realistic expectations, especially if you have thousands of items, orders and customers to migrate. Proper migrations can take anywhere from weeks to a few months.

Second, know your data beforehand. No two eCommerce platforms are the same. It takes time to migrate between stores, especially in cases when you go from an open source platform like Magento to a SaaS platform like Shopify. This is because there are data fields in Magento that don’t exist in Shopify and vice-versa. You’ll need to work with your partner to understand these differences. Most migrations projects will require some sort of data clean up too. Projects delays happen when merchants aren’t ready to adjust their data as directed.

Lastly, be ready to communicate with your partner frequently. Project delays also often happen because the partner is waiting for sign-off or approval from the merchant. You should have a dedicated person in charge of your project to keep your team on schedule.

Fear: I’m going to lose all my data.

There’s a lot of data that must be moved between two eCommerce platforms. You have order history, customers, products, images, web pages, and possibly even more. All this data is important to you. As you move from one eCommerce database to another, you worry about losing it during the transfer.

Solution: As mentioned before, not all the same data fields are going to exist in both your current platform and new one. There might be a product attribute that doesn’t have the exact corresponding field in your new platform.

While your data structure might change in your new platform, you’re not going to lose data forever. Your partner should provide a detailed mapping of what data is being moved and to what field so you know where everything is. In some cases, customization or a workaround might be needed.

Fear: I’ll wreck my SEO.

If you’re selling online, then an SEO strategy is a must. It takes time and patience to build up your SEO strength, so your business and products rank high in search results.

It’s a very real fear that replatforming can mess with your SEO rankings.

Solution: While it’s true that a migration can affect your SEO, they don’t have to. All you need is a solid, comprehensive plan in place to ensure you stay on top of your SEO needs. Check out this guide on how to avoid SEO disasters when migrating. When done right, you can actually improve your SEO after migrating!

Fear: I won’t be able to integrate my new eCommerce platform.

Retailers often rely on more than just their eCommerce platform to run their business. You might use an ERP or Accounting System to manage backend process like fulfillment, inventory management, and financial reporting. No matter what your tech stack is, you need a way to integrate your systems to ensure operational efficiency.

If you can’t integrate your new platform, then migration isn’t worth it.

Solution: First, be sure to research upfront whether your new platform can integrate to your existing systems. In most cases though, you might be migrating because the new platform can more readily integrate into the rest of your tech stack. Either way, it’s not too early to start thinking about your eCommerce integration project. It’s common to start an integration project alongside a new eCommerce store build so that both your new store and integration are live at the same time.

Here at nChannel, that’s what we do. To see how we integrate eCommerce platforms with ERP/Accounting, POS, 3PL, and other systems, check out our library of pre-built connectors.

How to Prepare for an eCommerce Migration

Now that you feel ready to take on a migration project, here’s a final summary of our best advice to ensure a smooth project:

• Start early:Don’t wait until the last minute to migrate your store. Rushing your migration project can lead to more problems.
• Pick the right partner: Do research beforehand and work with a partner that has a proven track record of successful migrations. If you choose solely on price and time, you might end up getting what you paid for.
• Prep your data: Data cleanup will be needed before the migration. Plan a head to make the necessary changes to your data.
• Understand your data mapping: Make sure you understand where data is moving to in your new platform and know there will be limitations.
• Read your contract: Know what your project’s scope covers and doesn’t so there’s no surprises along the way.
• Expect daily communication: Migration projects require prompt and ongoing communication with your partner. Have resources from your team allocated properly to assist.

With these realistic expectations, you’re more likely to experience a timely and pain-free migration process.

Still feeling a little uneasy about migrating? Read this article with eCommerce expert Paul Rogers and his first-hand experience with migrating hundreds of B2C and B2B merchants between all sorts of different platforms.  

More Articles about eCommerce Replatforming

To keep learning about eCommerce migration, see these other articles:

• Magento to Shopify Plus: Is It Time to Make a Switch?
• eCommerce Migration: How to Know When You Should Replatform
• Everything You Need to Know about eCommerce Replatforming

The post Overcoming Common Fears of eCommerce Replatforming appeared first on .

Magento and Shopify are two of the leading eCommerce platforms available for sellers. While Magento has led the market for many years, Shopify is the fastest growing platform with no signs of slowing down. Both offer compelling solutions for medium-sized to Enterprise online sellers. The question is then, which platform should you use for your eCommerce store?

Whether you’re implementing a new site for the first time or upgrading from Magento 1, there are many factors that play into your decision. This article compares and contrasts Magento versus Shopify Plus to help you decide which platform is the right fit for you.

Why Choosing the Right eCommerce Platform Matters

Not only is it competitive to sell online, but brands must constantly evolve to meet new customer expectations. Technology decisions for critical systems like your eCommerce platform can be a deciding factor in whether your brand is able to deliver for customers. You don’t want your technology holding the growth of your business back. Daily time spent maintaining and operating your eCommerce software is time taken away from product development and your customers. Do you spend more time wrestling with your tech stack or on customer experience?

Are you still on Magento 1?

Magento released a cloud-based 2.0 edition of their platform in 2016. Fast forward a few years, and Magento 1.x versions are quickly approaching end of life dates in June 2020. Now is the time for current Magento users to consider whether they’re upgrading to Magento 2 or a platform like Shopify Plus.

Even if you’re considering to move from Magento 1 to Magento 2, this upgrade requires you to migrate all your customer, order, and item data. Most migrations will take 3 to 6 months. Knowing that a move off Magneto 1 requires a full migration anyway, it makes sense to re-evaluate whether Magento is still the best platform for your business.

[Merchant Story: See how theBalm cosmetics upgraded from Magento 1 to Shopify Plus to effectively run their flash sales.]

How to Compare Open Source Magento and SaaS-based Shopify Plus

To start, an important difference between Magento and Shopify Plus is the type of software they are. Magento is a PaaS (platform as a service), open source solution while Shopify Plus is a hosted, SaaS (software as a service) platform. This affects how each platform stacks up against each other and how you can expect to interact with your platform.

Unlike Magento 1, Magento 2 has a cloud-based infrastructure, instead of on-premise (must be installed locally on own hardware). However, you still must license the software and secure hosting, which then gives you a framework to build and create a customized eCommerce store.

Shopify Plus, on the other hand, is SaaS-based. This means that Shopify provides turnkey functionality and takes care of the hosting for you. You can access your eCommerce store from any web browser and an internet connection.

(Read more in-depth about how SaaS and open source platforms differ from each other).

This difference though plays a part in how each platform can meet your needs in these main areas:

Open Source vs Out-of-the-Box Functionality

Each platform covers more than your basic eCommerce functionality. They’re top software in the industry for a reason. Instead, you should consider your unique business needs and how well each platform can meet them.

As an open source platform, Magento allows users complete access to modify its code, giving you endless creative freedom when designing and configuring your website. This attracts merchants with robust functionality or IT-control needs. An in-house or third-party certified Magento IT team can start with a blank slate for your store and have complete control over how its built. Because you start from scratch, launch times for Magento stores can take a few months or longer, depending on how sophisticated your webstore is.

For those who don’t want to worry about IT and set up, Shopify Plus is the better option. It’s an out-of-the-box solution, which means they provide upfront the foundation and core functionality of your store. While you can continue to build upon this, you can launch a Shopify Plus store much faster and have confidence that they’re following eCommerce best practices.

To be clear, this doesn’t mean that Shopify Plus isn’t still customizable. Shopify Plus has released a developer’s kit that allows you direct access to edit the platform’s code. You can choose to have more control or not.

When it comes to functionality, you should also consider:

1. Extensions/Apps

Similar to Magento’s developer community, Shopify Plus has its own marketplace of approved apps and service providers that merchants can leverage to build out their store further. Since Shopify Plus provides more core functionality upfront, their merchants shouldn’t need to use (and pay for) extensions or custom developed apps as often as Magento users

2. Social Commerce 

Shopify is a market leader when it comes to social commerce integration with your eCommerce store. Shopify recognizes that social platforms such as Instagram, Pinterest, Twitter, and Facebook are great avenues to reach new customers. Shopify has gone great lengths to include “buy” buttons for your eCommerce products right into social platforms. If you know social selling will be important to your customer acquisition strategy, Shopify has the better offering.

3. Customer Types

Who do you sell to?

B2C and Direct-to-Consumer – Shopify is a highly adopted platform among B2C and direct-to-consumer (DTC ) brands that are disrupting the retail landscape both online and in-store. As digitally-native merchants hyper focused on the online customer experience, Shopify allows these companies to quickly scale and evolve as needed. They provide leading eCommerce functionality like headless commerce, social media integration, and more. Because of their ease-of-use, DTC brands can quickly adopt new selling strategies as needed.

B2B – Both platforms started as B2C platforms that have continued to add wholesale and distributor eCommerce functionality over the years. Saying that though, B2B eCommerce is a different beast than B2C. B2B buyers have more complex needs which require more Enterprise-level functionality like managing customer-specific product catalogs, account terms, and buyer approval processes. Because of its customizability, Magento can edge out Shopify Plus for merchants who have complex B2B needs.

Check out the latest B2B functionality added to Magento 2.

Total Cost of Ownership

Shopify is subscription-based, meaning you pay Shopify a flat monthly subscription to provide you a service. That service includes web hosting, security, maintenance, support, and bandwidth on their API.

As an open source platform, Magento requires a few extra costs such as sever hosting, licensing fees, security and maintenance fees. These added costs can quickly add up to $15,000+ a year.

For an Enterprise solution, Shopify Plus can easily come out as a total lower cost for sellers. Typically, sellers pay around $2,000 a month for hosting, security, maintenance, and support. These costs are bundled in, instead of added on like Magento.

For both platforms, you’ll most likely work with a web design or development agency. Shopify Plus stores though can be more cost-effective. With its out-of-the-box functionality, Shopify doesn’t require developers to take as many hours to build a site that meets your vision. Magento developers on the other hand are building most of the site from scratch every single time. Depending on the site and functionality asks, Shopify Plus can save you at least tens of thousands of dollars in web design and development work.

From a financial perspective, Shopify Plus sites will be more affordable over the long run.

eCommerce Integration

If you’re a mid-market or Enterprise business, you’ll most likely need to integrate your eCommerce store into other systems like your CRM, POS, ERP/Accounting, or fulfillment/3PL. Integration allows you to automate data movement between these systems to ensure efficient processes for order fulfillment, inventory management, product data management, and more.

Integration requires connecting or wiring up the interfaces between your systems so they can “talk to each other” or pass data between them. This is often done through APIs, or Application Program Interfaces. A system’s API affects what data you can sync and how fast you can do it. The good news is that both Shopify Plus and Magento have a robust API that integrates well with other systems like mentioned above. These two platforms instead differ in how predictable (and costly) integration projects can be.

As mentioned, Shopify Plus provides every merchant with the same, well-built foundation for an eCommerce store. They also, in some instances, limit what a merchant can fundamentally change about how Shopify’s software code operates. Because of this, it means that Shopify Plus integration projects are more straightforward, especially when connecting it to other cloud-based systems. When each Shopify Plus store has the same foundation, it’s easier for an integration provider to predict what the solution needs to look like. There will be less variability between stores.

Magento, on the other hand, provides only a loose framework for every merchant to start with. Then, they allow merchants to customize the code, even if it’s for the worst. This leads to more variability between merchants’ stores. Every integration project has to account for those unique requirements of your store, including overcoming bad development decisions sometimes. Magento integrations can be more time-consuming and complex, which can also lead to higher costs.

If you plan to integrate to other critical systems like an ERP, it’s important to understand what the scope of that integration project could look like based on your requirements.

Maintenance

You’re in charge of maintaining your Magneto store. After licensing the software, sellers choose their Magento hosting providers and any IT problems are your responsibility.

For some, this might be a positive. You want complete ownership and decision making when it comes to dedicating resources and maintaining traffic bandwidth to coordinate performance. You plan on having that expertise available or paying someone else for it.

For others, you won’t want this responsibility. You don’t see a need to hire and train an IT team to make those types of decisions. You don’t want to think about the backend maintenance to ensure your store’s performance.

Unlike Magento, Shopify Plus is a fully-hosted solution. Shopify Plus oversees maintaining your web store when it comes to security, site performance, upgrades, and more. They’re constantly monitoring for any issues. If anything goes wrong, it’s their job to fix it. One drawback is that you can share resources with other merchants, which is how Shopify is able to keep costs low. If you need more bandwidth, you’ll have to work Shopify Plus for it and expect additional costs.

Security

You can’t sell online without a transparent plan in place to safeguard your users’ personal data. Not only do merchants have to think about cyber-attacks, but they also must meet evolving data privacy laws like CCPA and GDPR.

Each platform is concerned about its merchants meeting security standards like PCI compliance and data privacy laws. The difference is that Magento will give more of that responsibility to the merchant. Magento users will need support this in-house or work with their hosting provider to ensure their store is up to date on security patches. It’s up to you to make sure your store is prepared. Shopify takes care of standard security like PCI compliance of their platform and all users benefit from it.  

Data privacy laws are a little bit trickier for each software vendor. Each law can differ based on who is controlling and processing what data. While both should equip you to make the necessary adjustments, data privacy laws can depend more on the merchant to take the right action, no matter what platform you choose.  

Still on Magento 1? When June 2020 hits, Magento will no longer install new security patches for their users. If you plan on being on Magento 1 past this point, you need a plan in place to ensure your site stays protected and healthy until you’re ready to migrate. 

How to Choose Between Magento and Shopify Plus

Deciding which platform is best for your business won’t always be an easy decision. Shopify Plus and Magento are two leading eCommerce platforms for a reason, so there’s a lot to consider.

At the end of the day, it all comes down to your unique business needs, budget, and long-term eCommerce strategy. Either platform will get you there, if it’s the right fit!

Think You’re Ready to Try Shopify Plus? Learn more about their eCommerce platform.

Here are other helpful articles to aid your research on choosing the best eCommerce platform for your business:

• How to Choose the Best B2B eCommerce Platform for Your Business
• Advantages and Disadvantages of SaaS eCommerce Platforms
• Comparing Saas vs Open Source eCommerce Platforms
• Best Practices for Remaining on Magento 1 after June 2020
• How to Choose an eCommerce Integration Solution
• eCommerce Replatforming Questions: An Honest Conversation
• Everything You Need to Know about eCommerce Replatforming

The post Magento vs. Shopify Plus: How to Choose for Your Business appeared first on .

eCommerce Sales Surge

COVID-19 Impact: eCommerce Sales Surge as More Shoppers Display Urgent Buying Habits

See the latest stats of eCommerce sale increases as more consumers look to buy online amid brick-and-mortar shut downs.

Online Privacy

Online Privacy in eCommerce: 6 Key Takeaways and Shocking Stats You Didn’t Know About

Learn how to protect your user data online and what else you should know about eCommerce website privacy.

Communication with Customers

Communication with Customers Key in Times of Uncertainty

See best practices for how to communicate with customers in a timely and transparent matter during these times.

The post What We’re Reading: eCommerce Sales, Gift Cards, and Communication appeared first on .

As you navigate these evolving challenges, we hope to make your time a little bit easier by giving you one resource of the latest news from financial assistance to eCommerce help and adjusting to working from home.

Most of all, we’re inspired by the creativity we’re witnessing every day by business owners to overcome these circumstances!

We will continue to share resources, advices, and best practices as they become available. If you think we missed any, please leave them in the comments so we can add them.

Table of Contents

Please use these links to find the content you need. 

• Small Business Financial Relief
• Fulfillment Resources
• eCommerce / Retail Resources
• Employee Management / Remote Work

Small Business Financial Relief

1. Forbes Small Business Relief Tracker
Comprehensive list of how government agencies, private companies and nonprofit organizations are extending support for American businesses.

2. U.S. Small Business Administration (SBA) Disaster Assistance in Response to Coronavirus
See what areas are eligible for SBA disaster loans, which changes often. To apply for assistance: https://disasterloan.sba.gov/ela/

3. U.S. Passes CARES Act
One of the key provisions includes the Paycheck Protection Program (PPP)*, where small businesses can apply for (at least partially) forgiable loans to help with payroll, mortgages, rent, and utilities.

*Please note that the PPP is looking to add additional funding, as initial funding is currently exhausted.

4. IRS Coronavirus Tax Relief
Tax Day is moving from April 15 to July 15 to allow individuals and businesses more time to file and pay without interest or penalties.  Americans who are owed refunds are encouraged to file immediately.

5. U.S. Chamber of Commerce Coronavirus Response Toolkit
Sharable graphics based on the CDC’s latest guidance for businesses and employees. They encourage you to share these assets on social media, websites, and other channels, and send them to your colleagues and employees. Example: Customizable flyer for small businesses to inform customers of their efforts toward COVID-19. In addition, check out COVID-19 Reopening Guide for Small Businesses.

6. Facebook Small Business Grants Program
Facebook is offering $100M in case grants and ad credits for up to 30,000 eligible small businesses in over 30 countries where they operate. Sign up for more information and notification of when they start taking applications.

7. Discounts for Small Businesses
Many brands and companies are offering discounts on products and services that may help you through this time. Check in with providers like:

• eCommerce services offering free months of service, longer trials and/or free set-up
• Credits for small businesses from issuers like Citi, American Express and Chase
• Free online education courses

8. Mark Cuban’s 4 Best Tips to Business Owners on Weathering a Downturn
The billionaire ‘Shark Tank’ star fielded questions on LinkedIn to help entrepreneurs brainstorm ways to keep their companies afloat and avoid layoffs.

Fulfillment / Supply Chain

1. Amazon FBA Announcements

• Amazon limiting shipments of certain types of products due to COVID-19 pandemic
• Update 4/14/20 – Amazon resumes intake of ‘all products’ into fulfillment centers.

2. ShipStation

• How to Sell Food Online During the COVID-19 Pandemic
• How to Adapt Your Business During COVID-19
• How to Fulfill Orders: Amazon Suspends some FBA Support During COVID-19 Pandemic

3. Amazon (Fulfillment by Amazon) FBA Alternatives
As FBA suspends some FBA support, check out these alternative fulfillment options to Amazon.

4. eCommerce: How to Ship Your Products
Check out these top options when it comes to delivering your online orders to customers.

5. Combating eCommerce Supply Chain Disruptions and Steps You Can Take to Minimize Impact
See some of the best ways you can prepare for supply chain disruptions you’re facing now, and how to better manage risk in the future.

6. Manufacturer’s Supply Chain Resilience, Customer Relationships Vital in a Time of Crisis
Critical insight into how manufacturers are building resilience in their supply chain and deepening customer relationships to overcome the challenges of COVID-19.

7. How to Forecast Inventory Demand with Sell-Through Rate
Learn how to use your sell-through rate to predict demand for a product and purchase the right amount from suppliers and manufacturers, avoiding discounting and maximizing profits. 

eCommerce

1. Shopify Resources

• Make gift card store on Shopify – Gift cards are now supported on all Shopify plans.
• Build Buy Online, Pickup Curbside Store – Step-by-step guide for quick launch
• Shopify’s COVID-19 Community Forum
• Shopify Store Setup Assistance – A team of agency owners, freelancers, and Shopify employees have combined forces to help you, the business owner, get up and running on Shopify so you can continue to operate your business online during this unprecedented time.
• A Crisis Communications Plan for Brands – Learn how to create a community and show empathy in a variety of empowering ways.
• Cash Flow Management Strategies – Creative ways to keep cash flow going during these times.

2. BigCommerce

• EcommStrong – One-stop resource for all BigCommerce content related to COVID-19 help.
• Understanding the COVID-19 Effect on Online Shopping Behavior
• Strategies to Adapt Your eCommerce Store as Coronavirus Impacts Shopping Worldwide
• eCommerce Business Continuity Planning: 7 Steps to Assess Risk and Plan for the Unexpected

3. Privy

• A place to find and shop small eCommerce Brands – First marketplace to help small eCommerce brands expand their reach.
• 13 eCommerce Brands that Have Handled Crises (And What They Can Teach Us about COVID-19) – See how brands have come out stronger, or even fallen short, while navigating past crises.

4. How to Communicate with Empathy During the Coronavirus Crisis
Klaviyo’s guide on how to effectively communicate with customers to get your important messages across.

5. BVA’S Virtual Conference Recap
Hosted by BVA and sponsored by leading partners, the goal was to bring the commerce industry together to talk about the COVID-19 crisis and what it means for customers, companies, employees, and more. They honed in on some of today’s most relevant and pressing topics for anyone in the DTC space. Great panel discussions to listen to.

6. How to Navigate Your Online Business Through COVID-19
Our top list of tips to help your online business navigate the unique challenges of this time.

Employee Management / Working from Home

1. COVID-19 Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA) Questions and Answers
See additional obligations for employers under FMLA regarding sick employees or those caring for ill family members.

2. Five Ways to Manage Small Business Coronavirus Concerns When Employees Can’t Work from Home
While COVID-19 has pushed many companies to adopt remote work practices, here are some ideas to consider for employees who do not have the option to work remotely.

3. Four Ways Your Business Can Support Remote Workers
Regardless of coronavirus, remote work is becoming more popular. See how you can invest in remote work and start adapting today.

The post Coronavirus Resources for Small Businesses, eCommerce, and Retail appeared first on .

For many small business owners — and especially eCommerce sellers — access to capital is a major growth hurdle. To effectively grow your eCommerce business, you need to invest, be it in a marketing campaign, new employees, or bulk inventory, for example. While it might work for some eCommerce businesses, going to a bank for financing isn’t always the best option (after all, the process is cumbersome, lengthy, and often a wasted effort due to low approval rates for online businesses).

But you likely already knew this. What you might not know is that there are financing options designed to work with your business, so you can get the cash you need — when you need it. In this guide, we break down popular options like Shopify Capital, Payability’s Instant Advance for Shopify, and more. 

Disclaimer: This post is not intended as financial advice. We are just introducing a few common funding options for Shopify stores. There are thousands of other funding solutions so we always suggest doing additional research before making a decision for your business. 

Shopify Capital: What It Is & How It Works

Shopify Capital offers two types of financing for eligible Shopify merchants: a merchant cash advance and a business loan. Eligibility is based on your history with Shopify; if you meet their minimum requirements, you’ll get an offer in your Shopify Admin page. If you accept the offer, then you’ll go through a simple application process that requires minimal paperwork and no credit check. If you’re approved, funds will be deposited in your business bank account within two business days. Here’s a little more about how Shopify Capital works:

• Funding Amount: Between $200 – $1,000,000
• Interest: There is no interest. Instead, you’ll have to repay a fixed amount/flat fee.
• Repayment Terms: 
  • MCA: A fixed percentage of your sales is remitted on a daily basis until the total amount owed is repaid.
  • Loan: A fixed percentage of your sales is remitted on a daily basis over the course of 12 months. Within those 12 months are six 60-day repayment cycles with minimum payback amounts.
  • Actual remittance amounts: Because repayment is based on a fixed percentage of daily sales, the actual daily payment amount changes. So if you have a slow sales day, the repayment amount is small. If you have a big sales day, the payment amount will be more.
• Early Payment Benefits: None.
• Eligibility: Shopify Capital determines eligibility based on your account health and history on Shopify. So it only “works” if you use Shopify’s eCommerce platform to host your website and/or use their point-of-sale system — i.e. it won’t be able to factor in any other eCommerce data if you sell on other platforms or marketplaces.
• How to Apply: You cannot apply directly to Shopify Capital, but if you see an offer in your account, you’ll have to complete a simple application to get a final approval and funds.
• Credit Check? No.

If you see an offer in your account, note that it will be valid for 30 days. If it expires, you will either see a new offer or none at all. It all depends on your eligibility status on the day of expiration. 

If you don’t see an offer, if one expires and you don’t get a new one, or if you need more than what is offered — don’t worry. You have plenty of other financing options. For example, Payability’s Instant Advance for Shopify. Head to the next section to learn more.

Payability Instant Advance for Shopify: What It Is & How It Works

Payability, a financing company designed specifically for ecommerce sellers, is dedicated to giving online sellers access to fast, friction-free funding — no matter what marketplaces or platforms you sell on. With Payability’s Instant Advance for Shopify, you could get up to $250,000 as soon as tomorrow to take your Shopify business to the next level. Approval and actual funding amount is based on your account health and sales performance — not credit. 

If your business extends beyond Shopify, you can connect your other marketplaces and platforms to get an offer based on your entire eCommerce portfolio (not just your Shopify sales). And, if you already have funding from Shopify Capital or another financing provider, Payability can still give you the extra boost you need to achieve your goals faster.

Here’s more about how Instant Advance for Shopify works:

• Funding Amount: Up to $250,000 (actual amount is typically 75% – 150% of one month’s worth of total sales revenue).
• Interest: There is no interest. Instead, you’ll have to repay a fixed amount/flat fee. Fees start at 0.50% per week with no origination fees. Pay back early to lower your cost.
• Repayment Terms: Instant Advance for Shopify is a purchase of your future receivables. As you sell, you’ll remit a fixed percentage of your sales to Payability until the total amount owed is paid back. Similar to Shopify Capital, the daily payment amount changes depending on how much you sell.
• Early Payment Benefits: You’ll receive a fee rebate for every week you pay your advance back early.
• Eligibility: To qualify, you must have at least nine months of selling history and make at least $2,000 on average in sales per month. Payability connects to many of the top eCommerce platforms and marketplaces to determine your eligibility and an appropriate offer. These include Shopify, Amazon, Walmart, Newegg, Tophatter, Etsy, Volusion, and more. So unlike Shopify Capital or Amazon Lending that only apply to their respective platforms, Payability takes a holistic view of your entire eCommerce business.
• How to Apply: Fill out a simple online application (takes less than 10 minutes). No paperwork required. Get decisions and funding in as fast as 24 hours.
• Credit Check?: No.
• Need help during the process?: You can speak to a US-based account rep about your offer — no virtual answering services or all-or-nothing automated offers. Payability’s team is available to answer questions and provide real human support both pre and post-funding Monday-Friday from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m. EST.

What’s more, Payability also offers Instant Access, a financing solution that will get you paid daily and in real-time. So if you want to get paid the next day on sales, every day, Payability can help.

Using Payability and Shopify Capital Together 

As we mentioned previously, Payability’s Instant Advance for Shopify can supplement any existing funding you already have, be it from Shopify Capital or another financing provider. For example, if Shopify Capital offers you a max of $10,000, but you really need $15,000, Payability can help bridge the gap. Just speak to one of Payability’s US-based reps to get started.

Other Alternatives

If you’ve done any amount of research on business financing options, you know that there are a lot — especially for eCommerce sellers like you. In addition to Shopify Capital and Payability, you can also boost cash flow and invest in growth with solutions from providers like Square Capital, Stripe Capital, or Fundbox. 

Square Capital and Stripe Capital work very similarly to Shopify Capital. By looking at your history on their respective platforms, Square Capital and Stripe Capital offer funding options on an invite-only basis, fund in as fast as 24 hours, auto-deduct a fixed percentage of daily sales as payback/remittance, etc. Fundbox offers a revolving line of credit as well as net terms for your customers. Fundbox’s minimum qualifications include $50,000 in annual revenue, three months of invoicing history, a business bank account, and a minimum personal credit score of 500.

Next Steps

As you can see, there are a variety of financing options for your ecommerce business. To find a solution that’s right for you, consider how you run your business. In other words, do you operate on many platforms or marketplaces, or just one? How much money do you need and when do you need it? How is your daily cash flow? When you look at your business and financing needs from a bird’s eye view, you should be able to determine where to apply for funding first.

In the meantime, learn more about Payability and Shopify visit Payability.com/Shopify for more on Payability’s multi channel financing options, visit here.

About the Author

Victoria Sullivan is a Marketing Manager at Payability. She has over eight years of social media, copywriting and marketing experience. Prior to joining the Payability team, Victoria developed social media content and strategies for top technology brands such as Skype and Samsung. She holds a degree in Advertising from Syracuse University’s S.I. Newhouse School of Public Communications. She can often be found in a yoga class or working on her fashion blog.

Disclaimer: Please note that this post contains affiliate links. If you click through and purchase through these links, nChannel may receive a commission (at no additional cost to you). Our top priority is to provide valuable content and resources to our readers, which sometimes includes recommending products we find helpful and reputable. If you have any questions or concerns, please reach out directly at nchannel.com/contact.

The post Shopify Capital and Shopify Capital Alternatives appeared first on .

Government Relief Programs

Government Relief Programs for Small Businesses Affected by COVID-19

Find a comprehensive list from Shopify of available government relief programs around the world.

Retail Survival Guide

Your Coronavirus (COVID-19) Retail Survival Guide

A list of several things that all retailers can do during this unique time to ensure their recovery.

Weathering a Downturn

Mark Cuban’s 4 Best Tips to Business Owners on Weathering a Downturn

The billionaire ‘Shark Tank’ star fielded questions on LinkedIn to help entrepreneurs brainstorm ways to keep their companies afloat and avoid layoffs.

The post What We’re Reading: Tips for Retail and Small Businesses appeared first on .

In February 2020, BuiltWith.com detected well over 60,000 live websites powered by Magento 1.9. It’s apparent that many merchants will continue to operate their Magento 1 stores rather than replatform before this popular eCommerce software reaches its official end of life in June of 2020.

What happens when Magento 1 reaches its end of life?  There will be no dramatic change, the store will continue to work. Simply stated, Magento will stop releasing security patches for Magento 1 users. However, there will be some ripple effects that users will experience. For instance, it may become harder to be certified as PCI Compliant since the platform will technically be unsupported by its publisher. There may also be third-party vendors, like payment gateways, that stop supporting the platform. 

If you’re still leveraging Magento 1 and don’t expect to migrate to Magento 2 or another platform before security patches stop rolling out, there are things you can do to help protect your website and your business. Here’s a quick checklist to get you started down the right path:

Development: Make sure your Magento developers are going to continue to support your website past June of 2020. Some Magento agencies and development teams won’t be continuing forward with Magento 1 support.

Hosting: There are hosts, like JetRails, that are prepared to provide additional Magento 1 security coverage, including virtual firewalling, security scans, and site monitoring. Make sure that your Magento host will continue to support your environment after M1 reaches its end of life, and be sure to find out what extra measures they’re rolling out to help keep your site safe.

Patches: While Magento won’t be releasing patches, providers like Mage One and Open Mage are offering solutions. Even with a host that’s using a WAF to deploy virtual firewalling, you should expect to need some software patches and updates to keep your Magento site safe and operable.

Extensions: Less is more. Consider removing unnecessary extensions, and make sure that those you are continuing to use are up-to-date. Be aware that some extension developers have already stopped supporting their Magento 1 extensions.

Apps & Integrations: Any additional vendors that you use in conjunction with your Magento site should verify if they’re going to continue to support your Magento 1 website. This is especially important for any vendors that relate to payments, where providers like Adyen have already suggested they may not provide ongoing support for M1 users due to overall PCI Compliance concerns.

Overall Security: If you haven’t conducted a security audit recently, consider a Magento 1 Security Audit to make sure that you’re following general best-practices to keep your store safe and healthy.

Don’t forget that Magento 1 is aged software. In the long term, you should be thinking about migrating to a new platform, whether Magento 2 or something else entirely. While many merchants will seek “additional runway” to keep operating on Magento 1 past its end of life, that doesn’t mean that it’s a good time to launch a new Magento 1 site or to invest heavily into an existing Magento 1 store.

Other helpful articles:

• Overcoming Common Fears of eCommerce Replatforming
• Magento vs Shopify Plus: How to Choose for Your Business
• eCommerce Migration: How to Know When You Should Replatform

About the Author

Robert Rand is the Director of Partnerships at JetRails, a mission-critical ecommerce hosting service. Robert has over a decade of experience in helping merchants benefit from sound ecommerce and digital marketing strategies, assisting organizations of all types and sizes to grow and succeed via digital commerce. Robert is a frequent author and thought contributor in the ecommerce industry, and hosts The JetRails Podcast.

The post Best Practices for Remaining on Magento 1 after June 2020 appeared first on .

As an online merchant, your band must stand out as you face tough, fast-moving competition. To stay ahead, your business must use the right technology to power optimal customer experiences. This probably lead you to choose leading eCommerce platform Shopify/Shopify Plus in the first place. While your business is built around this platform, it’s not the only platform that can help you grow.

What about your back office operations? How do you ensure you remain efficient as possible as order volumes increase and your fulfillment processes mature? At this point, you should consider using a robust backend system like an ERP alongside your eCommerce platform. This guide walks you through what an ERP system is and how to choose the best Shopify-ERP solution for your business.

What is an ERP System and Why Do You Need One?

Your business is booming! Great! However, how are you going to manage the new influx of orders? What if you want to add a new sales channel or improve current shipping processes?

As your business matures, you’ll need to add new technology alongside your eCommerce platform to maintain efficiency. That’s why many Shopify and Shopify Plus users turn to Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems to manage their back office operations.

What is an ERP? Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems have been around since the 1990s. They are a comprehensive software that helps a business run more efficiently and effectively, by automating core process like:

• Financial tracking
• Order management
• Inventory management
• Pick, pack, and ship
• Lightweight manufacturing needs

Today, the global ERP software market is projected to reach $78.40 billion by 2026. More merchants are adopting ERP software for greater transparency and operational efficiency. They also want to make data-driven decisions. You can only do that with accurate data across your organization at your fingertips. This means you need a central place like an ERP to house data from multiple departments. An ERP quickly becomes the “hub” that runs the main functions of your online business.

Accounting vs ERP Software

It’s common to confuse ERPs with accounting systems. While some of the functionality may overlap, ERPs are more sophisticated software. Accounting software like Quickbooks and Xero cover a specific area like accounts receivable and payable, banking, financial reporting, and some revenue tracking. An ERP, on the other hand, covers accounting plus other areas mentioned above. It’s not uncommon for businesses to start with accounting software then move to an ERP, or use accounting software alongside their ERP.

When Should a Shopify User Adopt an ERP?

Any Shopify/Shopify Plus merchant with high-volume data or complex back office processes can benefit from an ERP. Here’s telltale signs that you should consider one:

• Significant and sustained increase in order volume
• Delays in financial reporting
• Shipping products late or wrong due to volume
• Managing multiple suppliers
• Large or complex product catalogs
• Managing multiple B2B customer relationships
• Low employee productivity due to manual tasks

How to Pick an ERP System

Look at your operations and processes today. What are your biggest pain points? Are you piecing together a handful of basic apps that a single system could replace?

Here are some factors to consider when choosing an ERP system:

• Expected order volume
• Complexity of how you fulfill orders. Do you use multiple drop shippers or suppliers?
• What’s the biggest issue you need your ERP to fix? Is it order fulfillment, inventory management, or financial reporting?
• Do you sell on multiple sales channels like Shopify, marketplaces, and physical stores?
• Total cost of ownership
• How will your ERP integrate with Shopify or other systems like 3PLs or POS systems?
• How easy is the software to learn? Older ERP systems are notorious for their clunky interfaces.

These factors are just a start to what you should consider when evaluating ERP systems. You can learn more about ERP evaluation here.

Keeping those factors in mind, here’s a list of popular ERP systems used by online merchants:

• Sage
• Oracle NetSuite
• Microsoft Dynamics GP, NAV, Business Central
• Infor
• Acumatica
• SAP Business One
• Epicor

You should note that a single ERP provider can come in many flavors. For example, Sage ERP provides multiple products like Sage 100, Sage X3, Sage 300, and Sage 500, which all provide different functionality.

Shopify-ERP Integration Solutions

A vital factor when looking at an ERP system is whether it integrates well with Shopify/Shoify Plus. If it doesn’t, then you could be limiting your business.

While you can forgo integration, you’ll be stuck with manually moving data back and forth between your eCommerce and ERP systems. Staff will have to hand-key online orders, inventory counts, item updates, and customer data. This takes a lot of processing time and is prone to human error.

Integration can automate these processes. This saves time and resources, while making your business more efficient. You won’t have to worry about mistyping a customer’s address that leads to a missed delivery.

When evaluating an ERP’s integration capabilities, you need to know how your ERP sends and receives data, or how it will “talk” with another system. If your system doesn’t connect easily to other systems, it will limit what processes you can automate between it and Shopify.

In general, a cloud-based ERP with an open and well-documented API will be easier to integrate. The “code” of your ERP system will be more accessible, making it easier to communicate data with any other system including Shopify/Shopify Plus. Cloud ERPs can also can be more affordable options for small to medium-sized businesses. Just like cloud-based Shopify, they provide reduced IT infrastructure costs, lower upfront investment, and pay-per-use pricing models. The modular-nature of ERPs allows users to pick and choose the capabilities they need. When you’re ready, you can add more functionality later.

Choosing a Shopify-ERP Solution

You can see how choosing and ERP for your Shopify store is not an easy task. There are many factors to consider when evaluating an ERP, especially how it integrate your eCommerce platform. The integration solution that is best for you depends on your business needs.

Keep reading more Shopify and ERP resources:

• What is a Cloud ERP System?
• What is ERP integration for Retail?
• 3 Ways to Integrate Shopify and NetSuite ERP
• Integration Solutions for Shopify and an ERP

The post How to Choose a Shopify-ERP Solution appeared first on .

Network Performance

Network Performance can Make or Break Retailers During High-Traffic Shopping Events

See how to prepare for high-traffic shopping periods, beyond Black Friday and Cyber Monday.

DTC Success

Direct to Consumer Trends: Up and Coming Brands Succeeding with DTC

As some DTC brands struggle with customer acquisition costs, see how others are growing stable businesses.

Fricitonless Checkout

Mitigating Fricitonless Checkout Risk with Prescriptive Analytics

Frictionless checkouts are the way of the future. See how some retailers leverage prescriptive analytics to mitigate risk around self-checkout.

The post What We’re Reading: Network Performance, DTC, and Frictionless Checkout appeared first on .

Trends like the “The Amazon Effect”, growth in eCommerce, success of direct-to-consumer brands, and lower barrier of entry in the global supply chain space are all leading the explosive growth of cross-border commerce. Online selling through webstores, social media, and marketplaces are making it easier than ever for brands to reach more customers around the globe. It doesn’t matter where a customer is located, they’re searching and finding the products they want. Merchants should be ready to serve them. 

The challenge isn’t necessarily reaching customers online, but rather shipping your products overseas, which often doesn’t always go as smoothly for both parties. Merchants have to prepare customs documentation an fees like duties and taxes, all while maintaining favorable shipping costs to your customers. Just like domestic shipping, you must think about selecting carriers, shipping rates, last mile delivery and returns. 

To understand more about the complexities of international shipping, we sat down with our friends over at FlavorCloud, experts in cross-border commerce. Check out this Q&A with their Founder/CEO Rathna Sharad to learn more about what cross-border commerce is and how merchants should approach international shipping to ensure the best possible experience for your customers. 

What is cross-border commerce and what market trends are driving its growth?

In its simplest terms, cross-border commerce is the sales of goods where both the buyer and merchant are in different countries. For example, a buyer in the UK purchases a dress from a seller located in the US.

The size of the market for cross-border commerce is exploding. Analysts estimate the market to top $1 trillion in 2020 and head towards $4 trillion over the next few years, truly explosive growth.

Local shoppers are now looking beyond the mall to shop. With the rise of social media, consumers are seeing brands or niche products that may not be available in their home country, but nevertheless want to purchase. This is especially true for the new digital native brands that sell specialized products in apparel, footwear, health and beauty that have seen explosive growth. 

Selling on a global scale can seem challenging to merchants. What types of merchants/brands are best suited for cross-border commerce? Why is selling at a global scale a good opportunity for them? 

The great thing about the technology and platforms available today is that any merchant can sell internationally. While it may be possible for all, some brands may still be better suited for a global audience. 

The current sweet spot seems to be direct-to-consumer (DTC) brands that may be an aspirational, luxury, or lifestyle brand. In other words, a company that offers a unique product or provides products that customers could not imagine living without. The good news is these types of products span many verticals such as consumer goods, beauty, fashion, athletic, leisure wear, baby, personal goods, vitamins and home goods. 

These types of brands will generate interest and sales from international customers, who are willing to go the extra mile and seek out the website and purchase products from them.

We believe it is a great opportunity for these merchants for multiple reasons. First, there is likely untapped demand for their product internationally. And, with the technology and services available today, they can just “turn on” international shipping and realize a dramatic boost to their revenue.

Second, the rise of platforms and technology for online retailers has likely brought on more competition and saturation in your home market. With cross-border commerce, you can now market and sell to a new global customer base, adding in the billions of people that can now purchase your product.

International shipping is the toughest challenge of cross-border commerce. What’s the experience usually like today and how is it falling short of consumer expectations? 

The experience for consumers today can range from incredibly simple and satisfying to incredibly frustrating. And, most of the experience depends on how the merchant sets up their international shipping. 

Like it or not, governments have a role in all cross-border commerce as they place duties and taxes on almost all imported products. If you purchase imported goods through your local retailer, you are paying those fees, but it is usually paid for the by the importer and then added to the final sale price. 

When a customer purchases online from a global seller, then the customer is the importer. This means they must pay the duties and taxes, either at the time of purchase or upon delivery. 

Some merchants will not present  the duties and taxes to the customer at checkout , which then must be paid upon delivery. This sets their customers up for a nasty surprise. As customers do not read the fine print indicating this, they are shocked when they finally receive their package and are asked to pay some exorbitant fees to get that package into their hands. 

Savvy merchants are now including the customs and duties fees at checkout. This leads to a smoother experience as the fees are usually lower and can speed up delivery times as local customs offices don’t need to determine the fees. 

Because the shipping experience is vital to consumer satisfaction, what elements make up the ideal international shipping experience for consumers? What should merchants be thinking about?

Besides the issue of duties and taxes we just discussed, another critical item for customer satisfaction is returns. While retailers hate returns, they’re a reality of selling and very important to customers in their reviews and overall satisfaction of a brand. Having a clear and efficient return process is critical, especially for international shipping.

Of course, we cannot leave out the most important item and that is shipping costs. Offering low-cost shipping is critical. Our analysis has shown that high shipping costs accounts for 40% of drop offs in the purchase path. Customers are OK paying more for international shipping as long as they don’t feel ripped off. Merchants should be careful that their international shipping provider offers low-cost shipping. They should and focus on increasing their volume of purchases and shipments, and not abandoned carts. 

How should merchants prepare their operations for international shipping? What type of partners or software solutions should they consider? 

One of the first steps is finding a technology partner that will guide them through the setup and launch process of international shipping, and is a complete solution. There are a lot of moving parts and government regulations to wade through, but a good partner can handle all of it, letting the merchant focus on their product line. 

The other step will be talking to their fulfillment provider, usually a 3PL. Most of the best cross-border commerce solutions offer an integration with any 3PL, so you should let them know what your plans are and how you will be launching your international shipping plan. 

Tell us a little about FlavorCloud and how you’re approaching cross border commerce differently. 

FlavorCloud has a mission to make international shipping and returns easy, affordable and friction free. We believe any brand can become a global brand and we can easily turn any eCommerce seller into an international merchant, with limited integration and no need to understand carriers, customs, compliance and all the issues of global logistics. 

We do this with the mission of being completely transparent on our pricing and fees collected, so there are no hidden surprises for the merchant or the customer. Others in the space view shipping fees as a profit center and will mark up shipping costs 50-100% to merchants, where we pass through our volume based discounted costs directly to the customer, leading to low costs for the customer and higher turnover and sales to the merchant.

We want to be a growth driver for merchants, not a cost center, and we work with our partners to increase conversions, grow revenue, and make the customer checkout as smooth as possible 

Key Takeaways from FlavorCloud

With the rise of global online shopping, international shipping challenges are sure to follow. Here are some key takeaways when it comes to cross-border commerce. 

Global shopping = explosive growth.

With online selling through branded websites, social media, and marketplaces, it’s easier than ever for customers around the global to shop your products. If you’re looking for ways to continue to expand your brand, then international selling could be a strategic move for you. Right now, cross -border commerce seems like the best opportunity for direct-to-consumer, or digitally native brands. 

Be transparent about shipping fees – at checkout. 

The shipping experience is critical to the customer experience. While customers are willing to pay more for international shipping, they don’t want to be ripped off. They also do NOT want to be surprised at the door with fees. Be sure to be transparent about what the shipping fees are and present them at checkout. 

Find a partner for international shipping. 

To be successful at international shipping, it’s best to work with a partner like FlavorCloud that can guide you through the setup and launch process. Just like domestic shipping, you’re not in the business of being a logistics expert. Instead, you want to focus on your brand and products.

Don’t forget about returns. 

Lastly, getting your product to your customer is just one step in the process. Don’t overlook making sure your international returns process is also as efficient as possible. 

About Rathna Sharad and FlavorCloud

Rathna Sharad started her career in the transportation and logistics industry, working with carriers, forwarders and 3PLs to build multi-modal, cross-border solutions. She also worked with customs organizations around the world, defining trade and tariff contracts.

Subsequently she held leadership positions at Microsoft, responsible for marketplace and monetization, driving advertiser platform strategy, and working with the largest retailers and brands around the world. She co-founded Runway2Street, which was her foray into eCommerce, a marketplace that enabled SMB brands scale globally, powered through an in-house logistics cross-border platform. She then launched FlavorCloud in 2018 as a turn-key, “anywhere to anywhere” logistics SaaS platform, when she realized that a seamless DTC cross-border solution was a critical need in the industry for any brand that wants to go global.

The post Q&A: The Future of Cross-Border Commerce and International Shipping Experience appeared first on .

Optimizing Onsite Content

Let Your Products Do the Talking: Optimizing Onsite Content to Maximize Product Appeal

Learn how to ensure your products stand out and appeal to your target demographic.

Store of the Future

Exclusive Chris Walton Q&A: Why the Store of the Future is Already Here

Here from a retail expert of what elements are already happening in brick-and-mortar and what to expect next.

Beauty Supply Chain

Beauty companies rethink supply and demand strategies amid coronavirus

The coronavirus continues to spread and impacts brands who work in China. See how beauty companies are preparing for the worst and also amplifying related opportunities.

The post What We’re Reading: Onsite Products, Stores of the Future, and Beauty Supply Chain appeared first on .

So, what is recommerce exactly? Learn more about why consumers are renting and buying secondhand fashion, and what’s going on behind the second to make recommerce as accessible as ever.

What is Fashion Recommerce?

Fashion recommerce, or resale is the renting, reselling, or thrifting of apparel. Instead of buying new clothes and then either donating or trashing them, consumers are looking to new ways to access and own apparel.

Over the past three years, the fashion resale market has been expanding 21x faster than traditional retail. Those leading the change include:

• Rent the Runway – Launched in 2009, this online service focuses on rental of designer clothing, dresses and accessories.
• threadUP – Founded in 2009, thredUP is one the largest online consignment and thrift stores to buy and sell high-quality secondhand clothes.
• Poshmark – Social commerce marketplace to buy and sell new or used clothing, shoes, and accessories.

Why are consumers turning to alternative ways to buy clothes?

Consumers Change Their Expectations from Fashion Brands

See how the shift in consumer’s expectations are leading to a revolution in the fashion industry.

Experiences over Ownership

More retailers are experimenting with ways to provide consumers better access to the things they want, with less emphasis on ownership and purchasing. Instead, consumers are looking for better access to different experiences or options. This sharing-economy mindset looks similar to other businesses like Spotify, Netflix, Uber and Airbnb.

For example, Rent the Runway gives access to designer clothes for special occasions like prom, weddings, and more. Even if you only need the clothes for one event, it’s easier to rent. It’s more value for your money, and it’s not wasteful.  

Sustainability

Fashion has long been known for its negative impact on the environment. Fast fashion has led to pollution problems. Jeff Reinhard, CEO of threadUp explained in a retail keynote that consumers are buying considerably more clothes, but not wearing them nearly as long. This leads to the serious issue of an equivalent of one garbage truck of textiles being dumped in a landfill or incinerated every second.

Younger generations, especially Millennials and GenZ, are very conscious of how fashion contributes to waste. They want to spend their money with brands that promote sustainability and transparency. It’s no surprise then that 18 to 37 year olds are adopting secondhand apparel 2.5x faster than other age group. Also, in the past, shopping ethically was often seen as out of reach. Ethical and sustainable products can come at a high price tags. Luckily, a secondhand market makes those same high-end products available to more people.

The Thrill of Thrifting

According to this thredUP 2019 resale report, secondhand shopping transcends age and in income levels. Secondhand shopping is closely split between generations GenZ to Boomers. Even around 20% of luxury, department, and value chain shoppers will buy secondhand.

Beyond sustainability, all shoppers enjoy the thrill of the hunt. They look for the continual refreshment of options, unlike traditional retail where refresh happen 4 to 6 times a year. They like being able to constantly change their wardrobe, without filling up their closet or worrying about throwing away low-quality clothes at the end.

What’s Making Fashion Recommerce Happen

Secondhand shopping or renting isn’t a new idea, but more consumers than ever are taking part. What’s changed? Technology.

Innovative technology has made the resale market accessible to more people. It’s now a convenient process that anyone can partake in, without even leaving their home. Consumers can easily ship unwanted clothes from their home to sellers and quickly receive cash. Online sites make it possible for customers to pursue thousands of items and quickly narrow down their choices. Images and better product descriptions also give customers the confidence to buy, even if it’s used. On the backend, most of these processes are now automated so platforms like thredUP can be efficient in receiving, listing, and pricing out clothes in sheer volumes.

It’s no surprise then that recommerce is rivaling traditional fashion. The resale report states that 51% of consumers plan to spend more on secondhand in the next 5 years.

The Future of Fashion Recommerce

Recommerce isn’t fad. There’s a revolution happening in the retail industry that will have lasting effects on how consumers interact with fashion brands. More consumers want to participate in renting and resale clothing, and more online platforms are giving them access to that.  

The global online clothing rental market is expected to grow annually by over 10% for the next four years, according to MarketWatch. The total secondhand apparel market will double in five years, reaching $51 billion.

Retail executives are taking notice. 96% of senior retail executives surveyed want to advance their company’s circular fashion efforts by 2020. This means testing resale, rental, and refurbishment models. Expect to see more platforms like threadUP and more traditional retailers add ways for customers to recycle their clothes.

The post How Recommerce is Changing the Fashion Industry appeared first on .

Competing with Amazon

How Amazon’s Top eCommerce Competitors Survive and Thrive

See how these eCommerce sellers are competing against Amazon and winning when they can.

2020 Retail Sales

Retail sales will rise to more than $3.9 trillion in 2020: NRF

See NRF’s latest report on retail sales for this year.

Digital Natives Goes Physical Stores

Fifth Wall Ventures Raises $100 Million to Help Digital Natives Open Their First Physical Stores

See how this real estate firm is helping fund DTC or digitally native brands find viable locations for their first shops.

The post What We’re Reading: Amazon Competitors, Retail Sales, and DTC appeared first on .

A challenge for most merchants is managing your product data. Today’s customers demand rich, consistent product information. If yours isn’t up to their standards, they won’t have the confidence to buy from you. Learn how to better manage your product data.

What Is eCommerce Product Catalog Management?

Let’s start with the basics. What is eCommerce product catalog management?

It’s the strategic process of managing your eCommerce product catalog to ensure the quality of your product data across all sales channels. It includes how merchants organize, standardize, and publish their product data to each sales channel. Whether your product data is created in-house or is from third parties like suppliers, you need to need manage its accuracy.

Why eCommerce Product Catalog Management is Hard

The idea of eCommerce catalog management seems simple enough. You just have to maintain a single catalog of all the products you sell online.

Unfortunately, this is hard to do for many reasons.

Product Types

First, your product types can make SKU management more complex like:

• Matrix/Variance/Product Options – A family of products that vary by attributes like size and/or color. For example, t-shirts must have related SKUs for one shirt that may come in multiple sizes and colors like a Red, Large and Red, Small.
• Kit/Assembly – Individual products that can be assembled into one product. For example, a bike where you might sell individual parts, as well as the whole bike.
• Serialized – Unique items that have a serial number such as diamonds or collectible items. You might have a handful of 1 carat diamonds, but each one will have its own serial number.

These types of product often have parent-child relationships that can be hard to manage. How do you ensure that SKUs relate to its parent item, but also are represented as individuals?

Selling on Multiple Channels

Another challenge of product data is managing it across multiple sales channels like different branded websites or marketplaces such as Amazon and eBay. Each of these channels require a specific format of your product data for listing purposes. How do you keep track of what channel needs what information exactly for listing? If not taken care of, you could fail to meet listing requirements or publish incomplete information.

Customer-specific Pricing

The same products can vary in price according to who’s buying them. This is common practice in B2B selling. Individual or groups of customers can have their own specific pricing sheets. It’s important to maintain this information because you’ll want to ensure that the right prices show online for the right customers.

Normalizing Third-Party Product Data

Do you receive product data from third parties like suppliers? This data can come in all sorts of formats. For example, one supplier might use BLK for the color black. Are attributes organized as you need? It can be tedious and time-consuming for merchants to normalize product data from other sources to meet their internal requirements.

(These challenges are very real for merchants. Because it’s such an important topic, we covered it in-depth in this article.)

Product data can become messy, fast. Merchants often have large teams who spends weeks compiling, updating, and publishing product data. Not only is it hard on your operations, but it can also result in wrong and inconsistent data on your website for customers.

Why It Matters to Fix Your Product Catalog Management

These challenges can be tough to overcome for merchants. It’s why some merchants settle to have subpar product information. However, it’s worth to do it right because of how competitive selling online is. See why fixing your product catalog matters.

Set the Foundation for a Good User Experience

Product information is an integral part of an effective online user experience. It affects SEO, site navigation, and giving customers the confidence to buy. How you mange your product data serves as the foundation of these experiences.

Potential customers often don’t know the exact product they’re looking for. This means they need help finding it, but don’t want to waste time searching too hard. Your product information serves as a roadmap for your customers to find and purchase the item they want. However, most companies don’t do a good enough job helping users easily do tthat. A Baymard study on site search queries revealed that

61% of sites require their users to search by the exact same product type jargon the site uses, e.g. failing to return all relevant products for a search such as “blow dryer” if “hair dryer” is used on the site, or “multifunction printer” vs “all-in-one printer”, etc..

This can turn customers off. It doesn’t lead them to the product results they want. Instead, merchants need to focus reducing the time it takes for a user to navigate to a product they want in innovative ways. You have large product catalogs and customers need help narrowing down their choices. This can mean more intelligent search queries, intuitive drop-down navigation, or interactive wizards like Fabletics’s Legging Finder that ask a series of questions before making recommendations. If your attributes are a mess though, you won’t be able to organize and categorize your products for users in this way.

Read more about how to improve your site search.

Once they find a product, customers also need a detailed product page. This page should anticipate and answer any questions a user might have before buying. LuLu’s website does a great job of providing rich content about each of their items like size, color options, images, fit descriptions, reviews, model info and more. This type of experience ensures the customer knows exactly what’s going to show up on their doorstep.

No matter what the user experience is exactly, your product data is what fuels it.

Improve Operations

Product information management also helps your back office operations. If product attributes are messy, it can take weeks to make necessary updates to push new products to the website. You’ll be constantly cleaning and normalizing data. What if you could give that time back to employees to do more meaningful tasks?

SKU management also plays a role in financial or operational reporting too. How many of this item did you sell? How much does it cost to make that SKU? When do you need to re-order more of this SKU for a kit/assembly item? You can’t answer these questions easily if your product management doesn’t make sense. You won’t have meaningful or actionable data.

Lastly, poor product management can also affect your ability to share that data with other systems. For larger organizations, you won’t manage or “master” your products in your eCommerce platform, but instead in your ERP, PIM or POS system. To share that data to your online store, you’ll integrate your systems and automate the process of syncing product listings. If SKUs aren’t properly organized, integrations become difficult to show the item properly online associate the correct SKUs with inventory counts or customer orders.

Take on New Opportunities

An overlooked aspect of mismanaged product data is that it can hold your business back. Do you want to expand to new channels? Do you want to work with new suppliers? Simple strategies like these can seem overwhelming when you don’t have a good handle on your product data. When it already takes week to get your data in order, it seems too much to add another sales channel or data source to the process.

If these issues sound too familiar, then you’re ready to consider how to improve your current processes.

How To Improve Your eCommerce Product Catalog Management

eCommerce catalog management depends on the tools you have. First, you must pick a place to manage, or “master” your product data. No matter what, this is one central place where you have every product needs with all necessary attributes. The products that exist in this place are the single source of truth for your data.

Choosing Where to Master Your Product Data

When first starting out, merchants often turn to their eCommerce platform or an Excel spreadsheet to master their products. If you have limited or basic SKUs, you can probably get away with this for some time. Each of these places feature a minimum tool set that allows you to upload, bulk edit product attributes, and publish to one (maybe two) channels.

As you grow though, you’ll quickly find these tools aren’t enough. You’ll spend too much time formatting and editing data, but still won’t keep things in order. If you’re publishing data to multiple sales challenges or dealing with outsides source, you probably need to upgrade,

Your next step might be to switch your products to an ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) system. While not all ERPs have the capabilities (especially the legacy ones) to do this, modern ERPs have added product management capabilities. Your ERP can be a better choice to master your products because they’re then tied closely to financial reporting or any other operational needs. No matter what sales channels they’re going to, they’ll start in your ERP. Learn more about how to sync your products from your ERP to an eCommerce platform.

Merchants can also use a designated system like a Product Information Management (PIM) to handle their products. If you have thousands of products coming in from multiple sources that require extensive normalization, a PIM is well-equipped to handle this.

What is a Product Information Management (PIM) System?

A PIM system centralizes and manages all your product data, no matter where it’s coming from and where it needs to go to. Ideally, it streamlines the process it takes to upload, standardize, and publish your data to your sales channels. You’ll have robust tools that allow you to format data properly and ensure that you always have rich, consistent product information that your customers are searching for. Popular PIM systems include:

• Salsify
• Riversand
• Akeneo
• Pimcore
• inRiver
• Jasper

Like most software, PIM applications come in all shapes and sizes. You’ll need to evaluate options based on your unique requirements. Consider your current needs and plans for the future. Think about how you can improve your business by simply improving the quality of your product information.

If you’re not sure where to start, click the link below to download our eBook to learn more about how to strategically manage your product data from beginning to end.

The post Why All eCommerce Merchants Need Product Catalog Management appeared first on .

Shopify’s Growth

Direct-to-consumer ‘is no longer a fad,’ Shopify COO says after strong Q4 earnings report

Hear from Shopify’s COO about how they’re fueling entrepreneurship through the growth of their platform.

Loyalty Programs

Are loyalty cards key to online-to-offline attribution?

See how innovative brands like Kroger and Sephora are using loyalty programs to view in-store and online sales across different campaigns. eCommerce Sales

eCommerce Sales

US eCommerce sales grow 14.9% in 2019

Online spending represented 16.0% of total retail sales for the year. See how that compares with 2018.

The post What We’re Reading: Shopify, Loyalty, and eCommerce appeared first on .

Whether you’re an established online seller or launching your first online site with Shopify, it’s important to consider integrating these two systems sooner than later. It’s how you control your systems, people, and reporting to ensure you continue to progress your online business.

Why You Should Integrate Shopify and Sage

Integration between Shopify and Sage payoffs for both your operations and customers.

First, what do we mean by integration? Software integration maps data movement between Shopify and Sage. Through data mapping, you can automate core processes like order fulfillment, inventory count updates, pricing updates, financial reporting, and more. Automation eliminates the need for manual data entry between your two systems, which reduces data processing time and ensures data consistency like always transferring the right shipping address.

Take it from Shopify Plus user Q-See and what their experience was like before integration to Sage.

When we decided to change ecommerce vendors, we realized that we also needed a provider that could automate order processing and inventory management between our new vendor [Shopify Plus] and current ERP [Sage 100]. Up until that point, we were performing all the functions manually. Not only was it time-consuming, but we were paying excessive overtime, and many critical business functions were getting pushed back. Our process was simply draining human resources and negatively affecting our progress.

For Q-See, some of those manual processes included:

• Hand-keying online orders in Sage to pick, pack, and ship and then entering that shipping/tracking info back into Shopify Plus
• Updating inventory counts to avoid overselling
• Keeping product listings fresh and consistent across various channels like Shopify and marketplaces.

(Read the full case study here on Q-See’s Shopify to Sage integration project.)

With integration in place, your business becomes more efficient. Staff members aren’t dedicated to manual data entry, but can work on meaningful tasks. Data is also consistent. You can guarantee those 2-day shipping deadlines. Avoid overselling (or underselling!) and show real-time stock levels. You can always ship the right product to the right address. In short, when your operations are consistent, your customers can expect a consistent experience with your brand too.

Here are some tell-tale signs that you’re ready for integration between Shopify and Sage:

• Keep overselling
• Spending hours on manual data entry
• Making costly mistakes like shipping the wrong item
• Shipping orders late and routinely miss delivery times
• Losing web orders because of system crashes or order errors
• Product content or pricing doesn’t update online fast enough
• Inventory updates lag
• Want to add more competitive capabilities like 2-day shipping, drop shipping, or another sales channel like a marketplace

Do any of these issues sound familiar? If they do, you’re ready to consider an integration solution.

How to Choose a Shopify to Sage Integration Approach

Merchants should do their due diligence when choosing a solution. Software integration for two sophisticated systems like Shopify and Sage is challenging work, especially for processes like order fulfillment. These two systems weren’t built to natively “talk” with each other. How Sage as an ERP uses product data is fundamentally different then how Shopify uses it.

The goal of integration is to understand how each system receives and sends data in their various fields, and then mapping your data accordingly. On top of that, your data flows also must reflect your unique business requirements. Most merchants want to sync inventory updates. Your business however might want to run an inventory update only at 12:00 PM every Thursday. This logic must be accounted for.

If your systems or requirements aren’t understood correctly from the beginning, then integration projects can become very frustrating and never result into quite the solution you need. As always, it’s easier to pick the right solution the first time around. That’s why it’s important to understand your options and how to choose between them.

There are two main approaches to eCommerce and ERP integration:

Pre-built Integration for Shopify and Sage

The modern way to connect your Sage ERP with your eCommerce platform is to use a pre-built solution from an iPaaS (integration Platform as a Service) vendor. iPaaS vendors offer cloud-based applications that feature out-of-the-box and “codeless” functionality to connect your systems.

Even though they’re “out-of-the-box”, you won’t necessarily lose customization either. Pre-built integration solutions are often “configurable.” This means that merchants can change or customize the pre-built settings to accommodate your business needs. For instance, through configuration, you can choose to sync your inventory updates every Thursday at 12:00 PM.

As a cloud-based application, these integration solutions give you many of the same benefits as a SaaS eCommerce platform like Shopify. Pre-built integration solutions are generally more affordable and faster to implement because they’re out-of-the-box. You don’t have to worry about maintaining or upgrading the integration application itself. In most cases, you don’t deep technical resources or an IT team to manage the connection. For access to the software, merchants should expect to pay a monthly subscription and a one-time implementation fee to cover the costs of configuring the integration to your needs. Based on data volume or complexity (like B2B), monthly subscriptions can run between $300 and $1,500 dollars.

Lastly, don’t overlook that an iPaaS provider’s core business competency is integration. They’ll have deep expertise in software integration and your systems. They should always use best practices to ensure data runs smoothly between your systems.

Custom-built Shopify to Sage Integration

In rare cases, merchants or their partners (like an ERP consultant or web agency) opt to build a custom integration between Sage and your eCommerce platform. We define “custom” here as a developer writing one-off custom code that maps your systems directly together. The code only works for your systems and your requirements.

Custom integration takes serious technical knowledge of both Sage and Shopify to understand how each system sends and reads data. It’s not something you want an in-house resource or partner learning on the job. If they overlook best practices or don’t account for common data errors, your integration can routinely break, still interrupting your operations.

Sometimes custom integration projects are the best option. For example, ERPs can be customized beyond belief for one reason or another. You could have added obscure or proprietary (unique to you) changes to Sage to help with SKU management or order fulfillment logic. Depending on the change, it could require custom code to access these data fields or processes.

However, most sellers don’t have truly unique requirements to justify the cost and maintenance of custom integration projects.

Instead, custom integration solutions can introduce more risk to your project.

For example, a single person is usually responsible for building and maintaining the code for your integration. What happens when that person goes on vacation and you have no idea why your online orders aren’t syncing correctly to your ERP? How accountable is that single person to stay up to date on any system updates that could break your integration?

Custom integration projects can also vary in price tags. On one hand, the solution could be affordable because the solution only covers the basics. On the other hand, a vendor could quote you $20,000 to $30,000 because they’re building everything from scratch.

Be sure to vet your entire requirements with all solution providers before deciding on custom integration. What you consider to be custom or unique requirements to your business might not be considered complex to a pre-built integration provider. Configuration-based integration is robust and can overcome most cases.

What Sage to Shopify Integration Approach We Recommend

What solution is best for your business? It comes down to your requirements and desired experience for your team and, ultimately, customers. Unless you have proprietary requirements, then an iPaaS vendor should be a sensible way to connect Sage and Shopify, saving you time and money in the long run. To get an idea of what an out-of-the-box solution looks like, check out our codeless and configurable Shopify and Sage integration.

The post How to Integrate Shopify and Sage appeared first on .

Gen Z

Gen Z shoppers love the physical customer experience

Why the Gen Z generation loves mobile, apps, and social media, see why they also love interacting in-store.

Retail Data Analytics

6 Ways Retailer Reap the Rewards of Data Analytics

If you hope to grow a stable retail business, then you have to exploit the benefits of big data. See how.

eCommerce Metrics

The 4 Metrics Your eCommerce Business Actually Needs to Track

See the top metrics that every eCommerce sellers should track to start.

The post What We’re Reading: Gen Z, Data Analytics, eCommerce Metrics appeared first on .

Amazon.com is by far the most popular online retail site in the U.S. They continue to amaze us with the sheer volume of products sold and shipped as a marketplace. We complied Amazon’s latest statistics in one place so you can see how they continue to dominate.

The Most Interesting Amazon Statistics This Year [Infographic]

If you want to skip straight to the infographic, click here.

Otherwise, look at these interesting statistics about Amazon. Amazon tends to keep their numbers to themselves so it can be tricky to find the right ones.

Who Shops on Amazon

Amazon averages more than 200 million unique visitors per month. Whether you’re a customer or seller, Amazon is the marketplace of choice.

• In 2018, Amazon was set to make up 49.1% of all online retail spend in the U.S., and 5% of all retail sales. [1]
• In December 2018, 20.6 million users visited Amazon’s website per month. [2]

Amazon Prime Statistics

Amazon Prime debuted over 13 years ago. Since then, Amazon tends to keep others guessing on how well their flagship membership program performs, but here’s what we know.

• The tech giant has 101 million U.S.-based Amazon Prime subscribers, researcher Consumer Intelligence Research Partners (CIRP) estimates. [3]
• Amazon Prime members average $1,400 in spending, which is more than double the $600 non-prime members spend. [3]

Amazon Prime Day Statistics

• In 2019, estimated sales hit $7.6 billion globally over a 48-hour period – up 71% from 2018. [4]
• In 2019, sales of products from marketplace sellers crossed $2 billion, which still only accounted for about a third of Prime Day Sales. [4]
• According to Adobe Analytics, retail rivals to Amazon with annual sales of $1 billion or more posted a 72% increase in sales on the second day of Prime Day, compared to an average Tuesday, and 25% for niche retailers (under 5 million in annual revenue). [5]
• Top products sold during Prime Data were toys (1 million), headphones (1 million), and household cleaning supplies (650,000). [6]

Amazon Third-Party Sellers and Fulfillment by Amazon Statistics

See how important third-party sellers are to the overall success of Amazon.

• In 2018, Amazon generated $42.75 billion in third-party seller service revenues, up from $31.88 billion the previous year. [7]
• In 2018, nearly three-quarters of Amazon seller businesses had between just one and five employees. [7]
• In Q4-2019, 53% of paid units were sold by third-party sellers on Amazon. [7]
• According to a 2018 survey of Amazon sellers, almost half of all U.S. businesses generated 81 to 100 percent of their revenue from Amazon sales. [8]
• Amazon has 8,102,099 total sellers worldwide, of which 2,827,344 are active sellers. The rest no longer have products listed for sale. [9]
• Less than 10% of currently active sellers were able to achieve $100,000 in yearly sales, and only 1% achieve $1 million in sales. [9]

How Consumers Feel about Amazon

See how often shoppers turn to Amazon and why they prefer to shop there.

• Nearly half (46.7%) of U.S. internet users started product searches on Amazon compared with 34.6% who went to Google first, according to a May 2018 Adeptmind survey. [10]
• The most important factors driving U.S. buyer decisions on Amazon are price (82%), low shipping costs (70%), positive product reviews (57%), and flexible return policy (49%). [11]
• According to a Convey survey of 2,000 consumers, 47% do at least a quarter of their shopping on Amazon, and 23% buy more than half of all their goods on the site. [12]

While Amazon has set the standard for the online buying experience, not all consumers buy into Amazon’s impact as a whole.

• One and four have negative feelings when it comes to Amazon’s impact on retail and the environment. [12]

Amazon Statistics: Need to Know Numbers about Amazon by Jillian Hufford

Share any other interesting statistics in the comments below! We love learning more about Amazon.

Check out these other helpful posts about Amazon:

• Are Fulfillment by Amazon’s (FBA) Fees Worth the Cost?
• A Comparison of Amazon vs eBay Selling [Infographic]
• Amazon FBA Alternatives
• Top 5 Mistakes to Avoid When Selling on Amazon
• How Amazon Sellers Can Win the Buy Box

Sources & Citation Info

To be clear, none of the statistics in this blog post are based on nChannel research. We compiled these statistics from different sources around the web. We wanted to give you one, convenient place to find data about Amazon.

We encourage you to link to this post, but for any formal or academic purposes, we ask that you cite the original source of the data.

The links below are where nChannel found the statistics. We encourage you to follow through to these sites for many more statistics about Amazon.

[1] Amazon’s share of the US e-commerce market is now 49%, or 5% of all retail spend, Tech Crunch

[2] Most popular retail websites in the United States as of December 2018, Statista

[3] Amazon Prime Has More Than 100 Million U.S. Subscribers, Fortune

[4] Amazon Prime Day 2019 sales cross $7 billion, DigitalCommerce360

[5] A Recap of Amazon Prime Day Results, TotalRetail

[6] Amazon and rivals report record Prime Day results, RetailWire

[7] Percentage of paid units sold by third-party sellers on Amazon platform as of 4th quarter 2019, Statista

[8] Amazon revenue share of Amazon sellers 2018, Statista

[9] Number of Sellers on Amazon Marketplace, Marketplace Pulse

[10] More Product Searches Start on Amazon, eMarketer

[11] U.S. Amazon Usage Reason, Statista

[12] We love Amazon, but we hate Amazon, Retail Customer Experience

The post Amazon Statistics: Need To Know Numbers about Amazon [Infographic] appeared first on .

To love or hate Amazon?

We love Amazon, but we hate Amazon

Consumers reportedly have negative feelings towards Amazon, but still buy at least half their purchases from there. See what’s causing the mixed feelings of consumers.

BOPIS

5 Vital Tips for Winning at BOPIS

Buy Online, Pick up in-store has been key to brick-and-mortar stores fighting eCommerce. See how to put together a successful program.

DTC vs Amazon

Why some DTC brands are pulling out of Amazon

Learn why brands like Nike, Ikea and other notable DTC brands are wary of selling on Amazon and deciding not to sell on the marketplace.

The post What We’re Reading: Amazon, BOPIS, and DTC appeared first on .

eCommerce is a strategic investment that takes considerable time and resources, not to mention it’s usually a cultural shift for a B2B organization too. One of the first decisions you might make is whether to sell on a marketplace like Amazon or make the investment in your own branded web store.

This guide walks you through the differences of these go-to-market eCommerce strategies and why the answer is probably that you should be selling on both.

Today’s Modern B2B Buyer is Different

First, why should you be selling online? The reality is that buyer purchasing preferences have changed.

Take a look at what the modern buyer looks like now:

• 80% of B2B buyers will be Millennials by 2020.³
• 74% of B2B buyers report searching at least half of their work purchases online.³
• On average, B2B researchers do 12 searches prior to engaging a specific brand’s site.⁴
• 33% of B2B buyers turn to Amazon Business or Google to begin their purchasing journey.²
• Today, 68% of B2B buyers prefer doing business online versus with a salesperson.¹

There are more than a dozen stats like these above and all point to a digital-savvy buyer who’s looking to research and complete their purchase online. eCommerce can no longer be an afterthought for your business or you risk getting left behind.  

Now the tough question is, where and how do you start selling online?

Why B2B Sellers Should Sell on Amazon

Most sellers start on Amazon for good reason. As mentioned above, research indicates that buyers turn to marketplaces to search and find products they want. In addition to selling where your buyers are looking, here’s the benefits of selling on Amazon:

Low Barrier to Entry

As a marketplace, Amazon represents a relatively low barrier to entry. It’s a well-established marketplace with one of the biggest audiences across the globe. Any merchant can be up and selling on Amazon in a short period of time. To start, sellers only need to worry about their product listings, account management, pricing, and fulfillment. If you want to test out the eCommerce waters, Amazon is a feasible way to start.

Upfront Costs

A main reason to sell on a marketplace is the little upfront costs it takes to get started. You don’t need to invest in the design and development of a website. Nailing branding and messaging isn’t crucial. It’s free to set up of account on Amazon and sellers only need to consider Amazon’s selling fees and fulfillment costs. Otherwise, sellers get to piggyback off Amazon’s industry-leading site experience.

Buyer Behavior

As mentioned above, potential prospects are already looking on Amazon. One-third of buyers turn to Amazon to research the products they’re looking for. This means you don’t have spend as much time and resources on advertising and brand awareness to drive traffic to your site. Instead, your focus will be on enriching your product listings and winning the Amazon Buy Box to get in front of as many potential buyers as possible.

Overall, Amazon is a “relatively easy” way to start selling online. It overcomes some of the toughest challenges for new online sellers like driving web traffic, developing an online storefront, and executing a favorable online shopping experience.

Why Amazon Isn’t a Long-Term eCommerce Strategy

Despite its obvious benefits, most sellers find out that Amazon isn’t the only path to eCommerce success. It might not even be your best path to success online. Sellers must consider some of the drawbacks of relying on a marketplace to grow revenue, establish a brand, and build lasting customer relationships.

You Don’t Own Buyer’s Data or Relationship

A big benefit to online selling is the ability to gather data on your customers. You can track everything from what links they click to the lifetime of their purchase history. In turn, you can improve and personalize the buying experience at every step. The better you know your customers, the better you can provide for their needs.

When selling on a marketplace like Amazon, you don’t have access to rich data about your buyers. At least, not in the same way as you would by selling directly to buyers from your own website. Amazon owns that data, and they don’t share most of it with its sellers. They know what products are ranking, what actions users are taking on their site, and more. Amazon uses that data to their advantage. If you rely on Amazon to gather important data about your users, you’ll miss out on important insights, making it hard to make the right decisions later.

Third-party sellers on Amazon also don’t own the customer relationship. You’re one vendor out of millions on the platform. When buyers receive their products, it’s in a box from Amazon and not your company. All seller communication is done via Amazon’s platform and their service reps. In other words, buyers will be more used to doing business with Amazon, not your brand. This makes it hard to control your interactions with buyers and the consistency of it.

Tough Competition

Amazon has almost three million active third-party sellers on their marketplace. While it’s great to tap into their established audience, it’s also an extremely competitive space to sell on. You’ll be listed with hundreds of other direct or indirect competitors. Even if you’re the first of your category, you can tip of other manufacturers, distributors, or Amazon’s private label to try to market a similar product, most likely sold at a lower price.

While Amazon makes it easy for you to sell on their platform, it’s easy for everyone else too.

Dealing with Low Margins

Buyers turn to marketplaces for low prices and free or discounted shipping. Amazon provides the perfect space for buyers to compare sellers by price. Selling on Amazon often turns into a pricing war that’s a race to the bottom. Not only must you continually lower your price, but you’re also paying Amazon fees for every purchase. It’s easy to see how your margins on products quickly become squeezed, deteriorating your opportunity for profit. We haven’t even factored in returns yet, either.

If your competition continues to sell lower, then your hand is forced to sell at the same price or risk losing the sale every time. It’s a harsh reality of selling on Amazon that sellers must consider.

Counterfeit Issues

Over the past few years, Amazon and its sellers have dealt with the problem of counterfeits. It’s perceived that Amazon isn’t doing enough to stop the issue either. In some cases, counterfeit items can even be sent in lieu of your own authentic products because of commingled inventory. Due to it, notable brands such as Birkenstock and Nike have refused to do business with Amazon. Counterfeits can be a considerable problem because they affect customer trust and brand image.

While Amazon presents a quicker way to sell online, your opportunity can be limited by risks like these above. Instead, merchants realize that the real opportunity lies in investing in your own branded website.

Use Amazon to Complement Your Own Web Store

The point isn’t to forgo selling on Amazon (unless experience tells you otherwise). Selling on Amazon certainly has its strategic purposes. When first starting out, it can be a great way to acquire new customers that you didn’t have access to before.

However, Amazon, at the end of the day, is a marketplace. It presents serious challenges that can hinder your overall revenue and ability to build longstanding relationships with customers. Therefore, merchants should consider Amazon as one part of your overall online strategy.

Controlling the Buying Experience Online

While a buyer might first encounter your brand on Amazon, your ultimate goal should be to drive that customer to your own branded web store where you control the buying experience going forward.

A branded web store gives you much more control over your online experience than you’ll ever have with your Amazon account. With a web store, merchants can collect first-hand data about how buyers interact with your brand online. This data – such as where they click, when they abandon a cart, what products they buy, and more – drives effective strategy for the life of the business. You’ll know how to evolve for their needs and market to them. You’re in full control of how your brand interacts with buyers and you can keep it consistent at every touch point.

Overall, building a branded web store is a long-term investment in your brand. It gives you full control over your buyer’s experience. While Amazon might be a first step or one step along the way, the ultimate goal should be drive repeat buyers to your web store.

Building out a modern eCommerce site is a project in itself for a B2B merchant. While it takes some serious thought and cultural changes to implement a successful digital transformation in any organization, it’s the type of experience that your buyers demand.

To guide you through selling on your own web store, check out these helpful articles:

• Why Manufacturers and Distributors Should Sell Online
• Get Your B2B Sales Team On Board for Your eCommerce Migration
• How to Choose the Best B2B eCommerce Platform for Your Business
• How to Navigate B2B eCommerce: Go-to-Guide for Manufacturers and Distributors Selling Online

Sources:

1. The Death of A (B2B) Salesman  –  Forrester
2. How B2B Companies Must Deal with Younger Online Buyers – Digital Commerce 360
3. Make Your B2B Business a Digital Business – Forrester
4. The Changing Face of B2B Marketing – Think with Google

The post Should B2B Merchants Sell on Amazon or Their Own Web Store? appeared first on .

If you sell online and any of your applications use cookie tracking (which they most likely do), you could be impacted by this update. It’s important you familiarize with this Google Chrome policy and check its impact on your site.

What’s the New Google Chrome SameSite Cookie Policy?

Last year, Chrome announced a secure-by-default model for cookies, enabled by a new cookie classification system. The purpose of the change is to improve privacy and security across web browsing. This new model will be implemented on February 4^th, 2020 as part of the Chrome version 80 update.

So, what’s changing exactly?

This new secure-by-default model assumes all cookies should be protected from external access unless otherwise specified. Developers must use a new cookie setting, “SameSite=None”, to designate cookies for cross-site access. When the “SameSite=None” attribute is present, an additional secure attribute must be used so cross-site cookies can only be accessed over HTTPS connection.

Read more about the new cookie model on the Chromium Blog.  

Why make the change to SameSite Cookies?

Before this model, developers weren’t following recommended practices to mark whether a cookie is only intended to be accessed in a first party context, meaning the domain name associated with the cookie matches the user’s address bar, to prevent external access. As a result, many same-site cookies are needlessly exposed to security threats like Cross-Site Request Forgery (CSRF). CSRF is how an attacker might be able to cause you to navigate to a website in a tricky way and then use your unique cookie identifier to access or authorize your browser to do something malicious like transferring money out of your bank account.

Read more about SameSite cookies in practice and what CSRF is.

Beyond security concerns, the purpose of this policy is to give users greater transparency and control over to manage cookies accessed over multiple sites. These cross-site cookies are often used for external services for advertising, content recommendation, third party widgets, social embeds and more. It’s no surprise that user data privacy and control is becoming a prominent topic with the emergence of privacy laws like GDPR and CCPA.

How SameSite Cookies Policy Affects eCommerce Sellers

Whether sellers realize it, this new cookie policy could negatively impact your site functionality, if not updated correctly. Here’s what some major eCommerce software vendors are saying.

For Magento:

For Magento website owners, this may have some wide-reaching implications. Whether you realize it or not, your site may be reliant on cookies that fall into this category. For instance, you may have software like NewRelic running on your server, or you may be using an iFrame for a secure payment gateway, like PayPal, both of which are known to use such cookies. Additionally, if you have multiple domains and share cookies for your different sites, you may be impacted.”

Read more about the policy’s impact for Magento users from the JetRail’s blog.

For BigCommerce:

As apps are loaded in the BigCommerce Control Panel using an iframe, any cookies that your app uses will be considered “cross-site” cookies from Chrome’s perspective. This includes things like session cookies which may be absolutely essential for your app to function.

Therefore, if these cookies are not set to have a SameSite=None; Secure policy, they will not be sent from the browser at all, and your application may fail to function as intended.“

Read more from BigCommerce’s Developer Changelog here.

For Shopify:
Since embedded Shopify apps run in an iframe on a different domain than the Shopify admin, they are considered to be in a third-party context.

If an app depends on session cookies for authentication but cookies are misconfigured, then Shopify might display the following error in the Shopify admin: The application can’t be loaded, check that your browser allows third-party cookies.

Read more about how to work with the SameSite cookie attribute for Shoify here.

What Should You Do about Chrome’s SameSite Cookie Policy?

If you’re unsure whether this policy will impact your site, it’s important to work with your developers or software vendor to ensure your site is ready to handle these changes. For developer guidance, Web.dev put together a helpful SameSite Cookies guide that shows how to explicitly mark your cross-site cookies.

After February 4^th, be sure to monitor your site and user traffic for any errors that could be a result from this policy change.

Do you know of any other great resources for SameSite cookies? Leave recommendations in the comments below!

The post For eCommerce: Preparing for Chrome Update for SameSite Cookies appeared first on .

B2B Sales Culture

Transitioning Your B2B Sales Culture from Offline to Online

B2B companies can no longer ignore eCommerce. See the top tips to how prepare your sales team for a digital transformation.

Product Data

Why Incorrect, Inconsistent Product Information Delays So Many Product Launches

New product introduction processes can be frustratingly slow. See how to improve your product data management.

Security

Don’t Leave Security Behind After the Holiday Shopping Rush

Consumers have more smart devices in their homes than ever before. See how retailers can help consumers protect themselves against security risks of their new devices.

The post What We’re Reading: B2B Sales, Product Data, and Security appeared first on .

Sellers operating Magento and NetSuite separately aren’t getting the most value out of their platforms. Instead, sellers spend most of their time manually moving critical data like online orders and fulfillment between these platforms, which easily leads to data errors. Teams then aren’t confident in the accuracy of their data and spend too much time fixing their own mistakes for customers.

To overcome these challenges, sellers need to integrate their Magento webstore with their NetSuite ERP. Integration automates your business processes so you can get back to growing your business and stop wasting time policing your data.

Why Integrate Magento and NetSuite

Integrating these vital retail systems has significant payoffs for both your customers and business. When you improve the efficiency of your processes, the result is a better customer experience.

So, what is integration anyway? System integration maps data flows between your systems like Magento and NetSuite to automate the movement of data between them. Sellers can automate processes like online order fulfillment in your ERP, inventory count updates online, pricing updates, financial reporting, and much more. Through automation, sellers no longer need to rely on manual data entry between systems, which reduces data processing times and costly mistakes like entering a shipping address incorrectly.

In short, integration between your eCommerce and ERP platforms makes your operations more efficient. It also gives sellers the ability to perform more advanced capabilities like intelligent inventory procurement and shipment. You can then provide more competitive shipping times. Customers will trust you to deliver on-time and accurately every time they place an order.

When your backend processes are running smoothly, you have more time and energy to focus on your top priority – your customers.

Integration allows you to sync inventory levels in real-time, process orders more quickly, and provide consistent product information on your Magento store. This translates to a better customer experience in many ways. Sellers can display accurate inventory levels to avoid overselling online, meet their promised delivery dates, always ship the right products, and more. All these efforts are important in winning the trust of your customers so they’re confident to buy from you again and again.

How to Choose an Integration Approach for Magento to NetSuite

System integration between Magento and NetSuite is challenging work, especially if you’re a B2B seller with more complex operations and high-volume data. While integration allows you to continue using your best-of-breed platforms, it’s difficult to automate data flows between two systems that weren’t built to “talk” to each other. For example, how Magento structures and uses product data is fundamentally different than how NetSuite uses it as an ERP.

The purpose of integration though is to wire up a connection that overcomes the differences between systems – according to your business requirements.

While the cost and length of integration projects can seem overwhelming, don’t let the fear of integration stop you from improving your business! It’s just a matter of understanding your business and choosing an integration approach that best meets your requirements.

Consider the following when choosing an integration approach for your software (along with looking at specific solution features):

• Customizations: How complex are your business processes? Do you have proprietary (unique to you) requirements that will require custom solutions?
• Data Volume: What’s your business’s growth forecast? Will you need a solution that scales with your growing volume of orders, customers, products, etc?
• Customers: Do you sell B2C, B2B, B2G (business to government) or all three?
• Supplier Integration: Do you work with a network of suppliers that require order splitting and complex order fulfillment workflows?
• Technical Resources: Do you have internal or external technical resources to help with the project like an IT person or a NetSuite implementer? Are you on your own?
• Budget: What can you afford relative to what your investment will return?

No two businesses are the same. Take the time to determine upfront all your needs. It’s always easier to invest the time to buy the right solution now than it is to fix the wrong one later.

How to Integrate Magento and NetSuite

There are three options for integrating Magento and NetSuite. We’ll explore all three in depth below.

Point-to-Point Integration

Some vendors (like some of those found in the Magento Extension Marketplace) offer point-to-point integration. For this type of solution, Magento and NetSuite are “pointed” at each other to synchronize data like inventory counts, orders, customers, and items.

There’s no operational platform in the middle of your systems. So, you must choose which system to “master” or manage your data in. Data is sent “as is” between systems. You’ll get a true “out of the box” solution that limits functionality to the basics like only sending orders back and forth between your systems. Beware these solutions are usually syncing data in batches, meaning every hour or even once or twice a day.

Point-to-point integration is often more affordable and a better fit for smaller retailers without plans for significant growth. If you want to only budget about $100 or so a month for a simpler integration between just NetSuite and Magento, this could be right for you.

On the other hand, this solution has major disadvantages for growing retailers. Point-to-point integration isn’t flexible when adding sales channels or other management systems as your business evolves. Each system adds multiple new connections for your integration because point-to-point integration only allows for a 1:1 relationship between each system.

For example, integrating three systems only requires three connections. However, adding a fourth system bumps you up to twelve connections! A big concern is that if one of these connections fail, the whole system can fail.

In this type of integration set up, growing means completely rebuilding your operations. It’s messy and you’ll end up spending even more of your resources.

Custom Magento to NetSuite Integration

Some sellers go the route of building their own custom integration. They work with the application programming interfaces (APIs) available for both Magento and NetSuite to write custom code that ties your systems directly together. Custom integration projects are usually done either in-house or by a third-party vendor like your eCommerce agency or ERP consultant.

Integration relying on custom code writing takes serious knowledge of both Magento and NetSuite to understand how each system accepts and sends data then reconciling those differences. It’s not something you want someone learning on the job

There are a few instances when custom integration projects are necessary for an organization. For example, some businesses require custom or proprietary changes to NetSuite or Magento to help with things like complex SKU management or order fulfillment logic. Sometimes the only option to overcome this is to write a custom solution.

However, most sellers, including B2B, don’t have truly unique requirements to justify the cost or maintenance of custom integration. Many find that another approach is easier and more cost-effective over the long run.

SaaS-based Integration Platform

The third way to integrate Magento and NetSuite is to use a SaaS-based (Software as a Service) integration platform. In this case, a cloud-based integration platform facilitates the movement of data between Magento and NetSuite.

Ideally, the platform uses pre-built connectors for Magento and NetSuite, and for any other platform you might want to integrate later. Pre-built integration leverages out-of-the-box functionality for faster implementations. However, unlike point-to-point, these connectors are often configurable, meaning they can be customized or changed to accommodate your business needs. Sellers can define business rules for how their data moves between systems, which gives merchants much more control over the flow of their data.

For example, merchants can define rules of how to fulfill a single order using different fulfillment locations for each line item on the order based on cost or warehouse location. Processes like these happen automatically as you process orders.

These solutions are more expensive than point-to-point solutions because of richer functionality, but far less expensive than custom integration projects. Sellers can expect to pay both a monthly subscription rate for access to the software and an implementation fee that covers the configuration of the connectors to your needs. The monthly subscription also covers maintenance of your integration and connectors over time.

What Integration Approach We Recommend

Magento to NetSuite integration is nChannel’s bread and butter. That’s why we know and care so much about companies choosing the right integration approach. Magento and NetSuite are two costly platforms and you deserve to get the most value out of both systems.

That being said, we recognize that every business is different and has its own needs. Choosing the best solution depends on your budget, complexity of operations, and plans for growth.

Here at nChannel, we offer a SaaS-based integration for Magento and NetSuite, which we find to be the best fit for most B2C and B2B merchants. If you’re looking for out-of-the-box functionality, but the ability to customize, then check out our solution below.

The post 3 Ways to Integrate Magento and NetSuite appeared first on .

Supply Chain

3 Retail Supply Chain Fails of 2019 and How to Avoid Them in 2020

See examples of the biggest operational problems that affected retailers’ reputations and tips on how to avoid them.

Store Closures

Will store closures worsen in 2020?

A record number of stores closed in 2019, what should we expect this year? Find out in this article.

Brand Loyalty in eCommerce

Brand Loyalty in eCommerce: Why and How Communities are Key to Long-term, Multi-million Dollar Success

Find how what some of the greatest brands in eCommerce all have in common.

The post What We’re Reading: Supply Chain, Store Closes, and Loyalty appeared first on .

Harmonic Retail

Why Harmonic Retail Succeeds Where Omnichannel Fails

See why retailers are trading in omnichannel strategies for harmonic ones.

B2B Product Content

Why Product Information Management is Fundamental to Omnichannel Success

See why B2B companies need new technology to manage their product content from the beginning of the supply chain to product delivery.

December Holiday Sales

U.S. Retailers Cap Off Strong 2019 with Solid Increase in December Holiday Sales

See the latest numbers on how U.S. retailers fared this holiday season.

The post What We’re Reading: Harmonic Retail, B2B Product Content, & December Sales appeared first on .